Technical Training Manual - ergosoft tech

Loading...
Technical Training Manual ErgoSoft RIP Solutions www.ergosoft.net

S1 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H.

Linearization and Profiling

Section 3-

Image Controls

Image Controls Image Color Controls Image Editing Spot Color Printing Color Replacement

S4 A. B. C. D.

Section 2-

Printer Linearization Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS ErgoSoft Total Ink Limit & Bleed Chart Ink Amount Check ErgoSoft Color QPC Color Management and File Processing I. Basics of Color Management II. Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs III. Controlling PostScript and Rasterization IV. PostScript and PDF Color Management V. Adobe Print Engine

S3 A. B. C. D. E.

Installation and Configuration

Installing Trial Version Recommended System Configuration Settings for Optimal Performance Workflow Configuration Print Environments Configuring Remote Servers and Clients Additional ColorGPS Dongle Print Driver Updates

S2 A. B. C. D. E. F.

Section 1-

Section 4-

Printing and Cutting

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs Printing Separations Printing with White Ink or Finish Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

Table of Contents- Technical Training Manual

S5 A. B. C. D. E.

Section 5-

Automation

Hot Folders Picture Package Position Template Variable Data Image Editing Automation

S6

Section 6-

Textile and Fabric

A. Textile Functions B. Step and Repeat C. TexPrint Notes on ColorCombine

S7

Section 7-

Production Tools

A. Production Managing Tools B. Special Production Tools

S8 A. B. C. D. E.

Section 8-

Printer and Cutter Notes

HP Latex Printers - Double Sided Printing Mimaki Printers - Notes on Settings Roland Recommended Print Modes Cutting with Fotoba Cutters Cutting Zuend Cut Center

Table of Contents- Technical Training Manual

Application Notes Installing Trial Version

Installing Trial Version

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Installing Trial Version

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Starting the Installation ...........................................................................................................................................1 Selecting the Installer Language..........................................................................................................................1 The Installation Wizard ............................................................................................................................................2 License Agreement....................................................................................................................................................2 Choose Location for Program ...............................................................................................................................2 Select Setup Type ......................................................................................................................................................3 Choose Start Menu Folder .....................................................................................................................................3 Choose User Data Folder ........................................................................................................................................3 Activating the ErgoSoft RIP and Completing Installation ..........................................................................4 Activation during the Installation Process..................................................................................................4 Activating the ErgoSoft RIP later ...................................................................................................................5 Preparing the Activation .............................................................................................................................5 Performing the Activation (and Redeeming a License Voucher) .................................................5 Finishing the Activation ...............................................................................................................................6 Entering the License .................................................................................................................................................7 Reading a License File ........................................................................................................................................7 Using a License Voucher ...................................................................................................................................7 …with Internet Access from the RIP Computer ..................................................................................7 … without Internet Access from the RIP Computer ..........................................................................8

Installing Trial Version

ii

Introduction During the installation process, the Trial Version of the ErgoSoft RIP must be activated over the internet or prepared for later activation. The following documentation describes the installation and different activation methods depending on the internet access status of the RIP computer. Activation over the internet during the installation process In order to use this method, the computer on which the ErgoSoft RIP is being installed, must have access to the internet during the installation process. 1

Activating the ErgoSoft RIP later This method allows preparing for activation during the installation process and finishing the activation later. 2

Starting the Installation Whether you received your installation setup on a CD or you downloaded it from our website, the installation process is the same. Please launch the installation wizard by selecting the installation of the ErgoSoft RIP in the main page of the installation CD or by double clicking on the downloaded setup.exe file.

Selecting the Installer Language Before the installation process can begin you have to select which language the installation wizard should be displayed in. Please select the preferred language and confirm your selection by clicking the OK button.

Installing Trial Version

1

The Installation Wizard The wizard will guide you through the installation of the ErgoSoft RIP. It is recommended that you close all other applications before starting the setup. This will make it possible to update relevant system files without having to reboot your computer. The installation process has several steps. Proceed from one step to the next one by clicking the Next button.

License Agreement Please review the license terms before installing the ErgoSoft RIP. You must accept the agreement before installation will begin. To accept the terms of the agreement, click I Agree and continue the installation.

Choose Location for Program Choose the folder in which to install the ErgoSoft RIP. We suggest installing the software in the recommended Destination Folder. To install in a different folder, click Browse and select it. Please note, that in this step you specify the installation folder. The folder for the User Data can be defined later in the installation progress.

Installing Trial Version

2

Select Setup Type Select the setup type of the ErgoSoft RIP. Setup type “Dongle Version (Codemeter)” is the setup type for the retail version requiring a dongle (Codemeter) as well as a license. Setup type “Trial Version” is meant for a test version installation without dongle but will still require a license. Now, select setup type Trial Version and click the Next button.

Choose Start Menu Folder Choose the Start Menu folder for the ErgoSoft RIP shortcuts. We suggest installing the shortcuts into the recommended folder. Once you specified the Start Menu folder you can start the installation of the software by clicking Install. The installation of the software might take some time so please be patient.

Choose User Data Folder During the installation, a dialog will be displayed which allows you to choose the location of the User Data Folder in which all User Data will be saved. If you change the suggested folder please make sure that you do not use the same directory as for any previous version. As you can see on the suggested folder it is possible to use a subfolder of the previous versions user folder EsRip. Click OK to confirm the selected folder. When a previous version has been installed on the same system, the installation offers the possibility to copy the user settings from this version.

Installing Trial Version

3

Activating the ErgoSoft RIP and Completing Installation Please follow the instructions given by the installation wizard. When being asked for the software protection activation, the next steps depend on the activation method: When having access to the internet on the computer on which you install the ErgoSoft RIP Trial Version, click Yes and complete the installation as described in chapter “Activation during the Installation Process”. 1

1

2

When not having access to the internet on the computer on which you install the ErgoSoft RIP Trial Version, you have to prepare the activation by clicking No and completing the installation as described in chapter “Activating the ErgoSoft RIP later”. 2

Activation during the Installation Process After having clicked the Yes button in the software protection activation window, the activation is done automatically as long as the internet can be accessed from the installation software. Continue the installation until the Completing the Setup Wizard window is shown in which you click the Finish button to finish the installation.

Installing Trial Version

4

Activating the ErgoSoft RIP later After having clicked the No button in the software protection activation window, the activation must be done manually by preparing and performing it. When having a License Voucher, the activation and the license request can be done in the same procedure.

Preparing the Activation For preparing the activation, a WibuCmRaC file must be saved for later use. Click Browse Folder to access a dialog for navigating on your system in order to save the Protection Activation file somewhere you will be able to re-access it later. Click the Save button and continue the installation until the Completing the Setup Wizard window is shown in which you click the Finish button to finish the installation.

Performing the Activation (and Redeeming a License Voucher) In order to perform the activation you need to copy the Protection Activation file to a data storage medium (e.g. USB stick) you can access from a computer with internet access. On the computer with internet access, you have to login to your user account on the ErgoSoft homepage (or create a new user account). Go to page MyAccount. 1

1

2 3

Select Demoversion and Get A Test Version. 2

Enter the number of the License Voucher and select the Protection Activation file (WibuCmRaC File) you saved before. When done, click the Request virtual dongle and license button. 3

Installing Trial Version

5

Wait until the Virtual Dongle file and the License file are created. Then, click the download links (file names) and save both files. 4

4

Copy the files to a data storage medium that can be accessed from the computer on which the ErgoSoft RIP Trial Version is installed. The license file is needed later when the ErgoSoft RIP Trial Version is started the first time. The Virtual Dongle file is needed for finishing the activation. 5

Finishing the Activation On the RIP computer (computer on which the ErgoSoft RIP Trial Version is installed), double-click the Virtual Dongle file WibuCmRaU. Confirm the displayed question with “Yes” and wait until the transfer is successfully finished. Now, the activation is finished and the ErgoSoft RIP Trial Version can be started.

Installing Trial Version

6

Entering the License Launch the ErgoSoft RIP. This will open the License dialog. The following depends on the method your license is provided:

Reading a License File 1

2

When you license has been provided by 1 your reseller by sending you a License file *.eslic14, click the From File button, select the license file and click OK. The license will now be displayed in the License Code field. Start the ErgoSoft RIP Trial Version by closing the License dialog with OK.

Using a License Voucher …with Internet Access from the RIP Computer After having clicked the Voucher button, a dialog is displayed in which you have to enter the voucher key and click the Request license button to obtain the license automatically from the ErgoSoft web licensing system. The license is automatically entered into the License dialog. Start the ErgoSoft RIP Trial Version by closing the License dialog with OK. 2

Installing Trial Version

7

… without Internet Access from the RIP Computer When you do not have internet access from the RIP computer (computer on which the ErgoSoft RIP Trial Version is installed) you can obtain the license using the ErgoSoft web licensing method: On the computer with internet access, you have to login to your user account on the ErgoSoft homepage (or create a new user account). Go to page MyAccount. 1

Select Demoversion and License Voucher. 2

1

2

3

4

3

Enter the number of the License Voucher and the Dongle No./System ID that is displayed in the License dialog of the ErgoSoft RIP Trial Version.

4

Enter your contact details (email and last name are required) and click the Request button.

Wait until the license is created. Then, click the Download link and save the license file. 5

Copy the license file to a 5 data storage medium that can be accessed from the computer on which the ErgoSoft RIP Trial Version is installed. Continue entering the license as described in chapter “Reading a License File”. 6

Installing Trial Version

8

Application Notes Recommended System Configuration

ErgoSoft RIP recommended System configuration

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

ErgoSoft RIP recommended System configuration

i

Contents ErgoSoft RIP recommended System configuration ......................................................................................3 Operating System: ...............................................................................................................................................3 Processor:................................................................................................................................................................3 RAM: .........................................................................................................................................................................3 Harddisks: ...............................................................................................................................................................3 Network/Ports: ......................................................................................................................................................4 Summary .................................................................................................................................................................4

ErgoSoft RIP recommended System configuration

ii

ErgoSoft RIP recommended System configuration For optimal performance of the ErgoSoft RIP, we recommend the following or a comparable configuration. Please note that this is supposed to be a high end setup, not minimum requirements. The ErgoSoft RIP can be run just fine on less powerful computers.

Operating System: Version 14 of the ErgoSoft RIP supports the following Operating Systems: Windows XP 32 Bit, Windows Vista 32 and 64Bit, Windows 7 Home 32 and 64Bit as well as Windows 7 Premium 32 and 64 Bit. We recommend Windows 7 64 Bit as it allows for more RAM than older 32Bit Systems.

Processor: Raster performance of the ErgoSoft RIP-Server mainly depends on the Processor. To achieve high raster speeds, it is recommended to have a high tact frequency on the individual processor cores rather than a large amount of cores, as the RIP-Server process profits most from a high performing individual core. It is possible to configure the RIP-Server so it uses multiple cores, and certain processes such as Dithering are automatically distributed onto the available cores, but the speed gain of using multiple processors is not comparable with the performance of a single powerful core. As an example, when using just one RIP-Server, a Dualcore with 3.5 Ghz on each core would raster faster than a Quadcore with 2 Ghz each. When using multiple RIP-Servers simultaneously, there should be one additional Core available for each RIP-Server to make running several RIP-Servers parallel to each other as efficient as possible. The Hyper Threading function of newer processors should be disabled if possible, as it barely decreases RIP-time and can in some cases even increase it. Hence, we recommend a Quadcore Processor of the last generation with at least 2.5 Ghz or more for each Core.

RAM: RAM is mainly used to buffer files and also has an influence on raster speed, even though it’s not as significant as the processor (If RAM becomes full during the raster process, the excess data needs to be stored on the harddisk, which can severely slow down rastering) . Since rastering often generates large amounts of data, it is recommended to use 6GB RAM or more on 64Bit Operating Systems (32Bit Systems support only up to 4GB). When using several RIP-Servers at the same time, the amount of RAM should be increased accordingly.

Harddisks: Read and Write times of the available Harddisks also influence the performance of the RIP-Server and are used to store data during operation, therefore access times of the Harddisks in use as well as available space should be taken into consideration. ErgoSoft recommends a System with 3 Harddisks: The first Harddisk contains the Operating System as well as the ErgoSoft RIP, the second is used to store temporary raster data and spool data (An SSD Harddisk of suitable size can be an advantage here) , while the third houses the image files that are to be printed. This setup has the advantage that it minimizes how much the Harddisks are simultaneously written to and read from at the same time, which increases speed as well as stability of the different processes.

ErgoSoft RIP recommended System configuration

3

Network/Ports: If it’s clear before purchasing the RIP System which printers and ports will be used with the RIP, it should of course be made sure that the respective Ports are available on the computer. We generally also recommend using a Gigabit Network card. Even though most TCP/IP printers still use a 100 MBit/s network connection, a fast network card is definitely an asset, especially if e.g. the image files are imported from the network.

Summary We recommend the following System Configuration for High End performance of the ErgoSoft RIP: Windows 7 64Bit Quadcore 2.5 Ghz or higher 6GB RAM or Higher 3 Harddisks as Program/Spool/Image Disks, size according to requirement Gigabit Networkcard

ErgoSoft RIP recommended System configuration

4

Application Notes ErgoSoft RIP Settings for Optimal Performance

ErgoSoft RIP Settings for Optimal Performance

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2012 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft website or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

ErgoSoft RIP Settings for Optimal Performance

i

Contents Configuring ErgoSoft RIPs for optimal performance ...................................................................................3 Speeding up the Raster/Print................................................................................................................................3 Resolution ...............................................................................................................................................................3 Preferred Dithering Method ............................................................................................................................3 Settings for PostScript .......................................................................................................................................3 Harddisk Management ......................................................................................................................................4 AntiVirus Software ...............................................................................................................................................5 Accelerating the User Interface ............................................................................................................................5 Processor threads ................................................................................................................................................5 Snapshots ...............................................................................................................................................................6 Hardware.................................................................................................................................................................6

ErgoSoft RIP Settings for Optimal Performance

ii

Configuring ErgoSoft RIPs for optimal performance ErgoSoft RIPs are installed with a number of preset parameters that are designed to work well with the largest possible number of applications and technical environments. This Application Note is meant to give users an insight into different parameters on how they relate to the performance of the RIP so they can be optimized to suit individual workflows. The first segment, “Speeding up the Raster/Print Process” explains settings which can influence the raster speed and what alterations can improve performance. The second segment deals with how to improve performance of the user interface.

Speeding up the Raster/Print Resolution The resolution used for printing has a large influence on the raster speed. The higher the resolution, the longer the raster process will take. Users can evaluate how important a high resolution is for the print job at hand or if it might be more efficient to use a lower resolution and gain raster speed for it, so the job can be produced faster.

Preferred Dithering Method In the current version of the ErgoSoft RIPs, we recommend using one of the following two dithering methods:

Smooth Diffusion The Smooth Diffusion raster is the default settings in ErgoSoft RIPs. In most cases, this dithering method provides the best results in terms of Quality, but takes longer to raster compared to other available dithering methods.

Stochastic 3e Stochastic3e raster processes files faster than the aforementioned Smooth Diffusion, but doesn’t reach the same quality in dot distribution. In general this dithering method works best for large format applications such as banners.

Settings for PostScript ErgoSoft RIPs provide several special settings concerning the handling of PostScript files (PDF, EPS). By optimizing these settings, processing time for PostScript files can be significantly reduced.

PostScript Buffersize The setting for PostScript buffer size can be found in” Tools/Options/Application/ PostScript/PDF Interpreter”. This setting determines how much of the memory available to the RIP can be used by the PostScript interpreter to process files during rastering. Increasing the memory percentage can have a very positive effect on the speed of the PostScript interpreter, but a certain amount of caution is advised when setting a higher percentage. A ErgoSoft RIP Settings for Optimal Performance

3

too high setting for the respective system can lead to problems while processing files if there is not enough memory left for the other applications of the RIP. We generally recommend not going above 50% buffer size to avoid such problems.

Raster Resolution Reduction The raster resolution reduction for PostScript (the setting can be found in Tools/Options/ PostScript/PDF Parameters) reduces the amount of data that needs to be processed at the raster stage by calculating the image down to a lower resolution for the raster process and then calculates it back up to the original output resolution for printout. A value of 2 for the resolution reduction means that the image will be calculated down to half the output resolution both vertically and horizontally. Especially with large and complex image files, this can shorten the raster time significantly. It’s important to know however that depending on the image file and initial resolution, a reduction value of 3 and above might lead to a noticeable loss in quality. For resolutions below 300dpi, even a value of 2 could already produce a noticeable loss in sharpness. Therefore, it is recommended to use the Raster Resolution Reduction only with specific jobs where it is actually useful. Alternatively, this can also be automated by setting a specific resolution above which to use the resolution reduction. This allows the user to set a threshold e.g. of 800dpi so any Job that is rastered with a higher resolution than 800dpi will automatically use the raster resolution reduction.

Harddisk Management Read and write times of the available harddisks also influence the performance of the RIPServer and are used to store data during operation; therefore access times of the harddisks in use as well as available space should be taken into consideration. ErgoSoft recommends a system with 3 harddisks: The first harddisk contains the operating system as well as the ErgoSoft RIP, the second is used to store temporary raster data and spool data (an SSD harddisk of suitable size can be an advantage here) , while the third houses the image files that are to be printed. This setup has the advantage that it minimizes how much the harddisks are simultaneously written to and read from at the same time, which increases speed as well as stability of the different processes. The folder for temporary raster data can be changed by opening the RIP-Server window and going to „Tools/Options“, in there the path can be changed in the „Temporary Raster Data“ segment by clicking the “Change Folder” button.

ErgoSoft RIP Settings for Optimal Performance

4

AntiVirus Software Constant verification of the data that is read and written by the RIP can also slow down the speed of the rastering process as well as the overall program. To improve the general performance of the RIP, it can help to exclude the program processes of the ErgoSoft RIP as well as the folders used by it. The recommended processes to exclude would be: C:/Program Files(x86)/ErgoSoft RIP 14/PPJobComp.exe C:/ Program Files(x86)/ErgoSoft RIP 14/PPJQServ.exe C:/ Program Files(x86)/ErgoSoft RIP 14/PPMedServ.exe C:/ Program Files(x86)/ErgoSoft RIP 14/PPRipSrv.exe C:/ Program Files(x86)/ErgoSoft RIP 14/PpSnpSvr.exe C:/ Program Files(x86)/ErgoSoft RIP 14/PPDesp.exe Also, the folders for temporary raster data, the userdata folder and the PrintClient Spool folder (if a PrintClient is used) should be set as exceptions from the Antivirus program. The default path for the temporary raster data is C:/Users/Public/Documents/EsRip/14/ Files/Raster (it’s in the user data folder, so setting an exception for that will include this folder). If a different path is used for the temporary raster data, it can be verified anytime from the RIP-Server by checking in Tools/Options in the “Temporary Raster Data” segment. The userdata folder is located in C:\Users\Public\Documents\EsRip, as mentioned above, this also includes the standard path for temporary raster data. The path for the spool folder of a PrintClient is defined when the PrintClient is set up.

Accelerating the User Interface Processor threads ErgoSoft RIPs allow users to customize how many processor threads the program can start and run at the same time. The default value upon installation is 1, since this works on all systems. Modern MultiCore processors however can handle more threads at a time, which can be a big benefit since the RIP Software can then split up the workload to improve the performance of the individual program modules and user interface. To increase the maximum number of threads for the program, close the software and go to „Start/Programs/ErgoSoft RIP 14/Maintenance Tool”. Then open the “Automatically Start Programs” application. The setting “Threads per Server” lets users set the maximum amount of threads for the ErgoSoft RIP that can run at the same time. It is however recommended that the maximum amount of threads should not exceed the number of cores (i.e. one thread per core) in the processor to ensure smooth performance.

ErgoSoft RIP Settings for Optimal Performance

5

Snapshots An important factor for the performance of the ErgoSoft RIP JobComposer and user interface are the snapshots (also called previews). These snapshots are the representation of image files in the JobComposer. Creating and managing snapshots can have a large influence on the overall performance of the user interface, especially when the number of snapshots that need to be managed gets very high. To avoid a decrease in performance through piled up snapshots, ErgoSoft recommends regularly deleting the stored snapshots. This can be done either manually or automated. In installations that have been running for a while, it’s a good idea to first manually delete the snapshots that have already been created by opening the main program and going to “Tools/Options/Application/Snapshots” and clicking the “Delete Snapshots” button to remove the stored snapshot files (these will of course be created anew when required), then using the “Remove folder” button to remove folders from the Snapshot Servers survey list. It’s also possible to let the RIP automatically clear the snapshots after a set amount of time. This can also be done in “Tools/Options/Application/Snapshots” with the „Delete Snapshots after“ function. All stored snapshots will then be deleted after the set number of days during the starting phase of the RIP.

Store Snapshots in common local folder By default, the Snapshots created by the ErgoSoft RIP are saved in the same folder as the image file they were created from. In most cases this is the best way to go. However with images that are located on Network or external drives, the connection to these images/drives can become an issue as they can create a bottleneck that slows down the entire program. In such cases it can help to use the “Store Snapshots in common local folder” function, which can be found in “Tools/Options/Application/Snapshots”. Activating this function will cause the RIP to store all snapshot files in the Userdata folder, reducing the traffic to the images location by not having to write files back into the origin folders.

Not Displaying Snapshots for Jobs with many Images In some cases, such as jobs that contain a large amount of images, it can make sense t o deactivate snapshot display entirely to conserve system resources. This can easily be done by going to “Tools/Options/Application/Snapshots” and activating the “Suppress Image Display” function. The preview of the actual images in the job will then be replaced by simple placeholders with the same size as the images. This can save a lot of resources and greatly improve performance on computers

Hardware Of course the computer hardware used to run the RIP is the most important factor in how the RIP performs. For information concerning the best possible hardware to run ErgoSoft RIPs, please refer to the Application Note „Recommended System Configuration“.

ErgoSoft RIP Settings for Optimal Performance

6

Application Notes Workflow Configuration

Workflow Configuration

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Workflow Configuration

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 JobComposer Layout ...............................................................................................................................................2 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................................2 Workspaces ............................................................................................................................................................3 Saving a Custom Workspace .....................................................................................................................3 Selecting a Workspace.................................................................................................................................3 Automatic Workspace Change .................................................................................................................3 Job Window ...........................................................................................................................................................4 Arranging Jobs ................................................................................................................................................4 Job Layout Helpers ........................................................................................................................................5 Other Windows.....................................................................................................................................................5 Activating Windows ......................................................................................................................................6 Arranging Windows ......................................................................................................................................6 Default Settings ..........................................................................................................................................................7 Workspace ..............................................................................................................................................................7 Job .............................................................................................................................................................................8 Image........................................................................................................................................................................9 Access Levels ...................................................................................................................................................... 10 Others.................................................................................................................................................................... 10 Display Configuration................................................................................................................................ 10 Preview Management ............................................................................................................................... 11 Controlling PostScript Rasterization .................................................................................................... 12 Measuring Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 13

Workflow Configuration

ii

Introduction The ErgoSoft RIP is build of several modules. The main module, the JobComposer is used to create, edit and print all your jobs. Even controlling the output process is possible within the JobComposer though the output process is handled in other modules. The JobComposer offers several functions to configure it according to your needs. Those can be separated into two main categories: Function to configure the layout of the ErgoSoft RIP in order to adjust it to your preferred workflow. Default settings concerning the behavior of the ErgoSoft RIP as well as default settings concerning image and job layout.

Workflow Configuration

1

JobComposer Layout Introduction The JobComposer is the main module you are working in while creating, editing and printing your jobs. Depending from your workflow and the current task you are doing, different layouts might help in increasing the efficiency of your workflow. For example, when creating the job and placing the images within the job, you need to see much of the job but not all images in detail. But when editing an image, you might prefer seeing just one image but not the complete job. The following documentation will describe the functions available to help you customizing the JobComposer to your needs in the different stages of your workflow. The JobComposer is build using the following elements: Main job window The main job window is the heart of the JobComposer. Working without it is impossible.

4

1

Windows Other windows holding information about the current job or image as well as windows for monitoring the workflow can be activated and deactivated.

3

6

2

2

Toolbars Toolbars hold icons for often used functions. They can be activated and deactivated according to your needs.

1 6 2

3

4 5 6

2 5

Menu bar Status bar Rulers

Workflow Configuration

2

Workspaces A workspace is defined to be the complete JobComposer layout that is built by the size and position of the visible toolbars as well as the size and position of the visible windows. There are three pre-defined workspaces: Standard, Edit, and Custom. The current workspace can be modified any time by activating and deactivating toolbars, activating and deactivating windows as well as positioning toolbars and windows.

Saving a Custom Workspace Configure the JobComposer layout according to your preferences. Make sure that menu View > Workspaces > Enable Workspace Change is activated (checked) Select menu View > Workspaces > Copy To Select the workspace you want to modify or select New to save a new workspace

Selecting a Workspace To select one of the pre-defined workspaces press F2 for Standard workspace, F3 for Edit workspace and F4 for Custom workspace. To select another workspace launch menu View > Workspaces and selected the desired workspace.

Automatic Workspace Change The ErgoSoft RIP offers a useful function to easily switch between the Standard and the Edit workspace. Set menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Application > User Interface Preferences, item Job Double Click Action to Toggle Workspaces To switch to the Edit workspace: double-click on an image To switch to the Standard workspace: double-click on an empty space in the job

Workflow Configuration

3

Job Window The job window is the heart of the ErgoSoft RIP user interface. You open and design jobs in it. You are not limited to have just one job open at a time; there is almost no limit to the number of opened jobs. There are several functions available that will ease your workflow.

Arranging Jobs By default, the jobs are displayed in tabbed order. To select a certain job, just click on it. 1

When more than two jobs are open, right-clicking on the job window context menu (job name in the tab) will offer the possibility to split the job window vertically or horizontally to display 2 or more jobs at the same time. Please note that the jobs can be arranged only horizontally or vertically. To move a job to another tab group select the appropriate command from the job window context menu or simply drag it with the mouse into the desired tab group.

1

2

3

2

To resize the visible part of the tab group, simply drag the separator to the desired position. 3

Images can simply be dragged from one job into another one when both jobs are visible.

Workflow Configuration

4

Job Layout Helpers When the rulers are visible (menu View > Rulers), positioning guide lines can be created: 1

Activate the guide lines by checking menu Edit > Guide Lines.

Creating a guide line Click with the mouse into horizontal/vertical ruler and move mouse with the left mouse button ing pressed down/right into the sired position in the job. 2

the the bede-

1

3

2

To move a guide line Grab the guide line with the mouse and move it to another position. To remove a guide line Move the guide line out of the job window. 3

When moving images with the mouse they will snap to the guide lines.

Other Windows In addition to the job windows, the ErgoSoft RIP allows to display several other windows: Properties: Displays properties and commands concerning the current job or image. Image Preview: Displays a preview of the current image(s) in relation to the selected command in the Properties window. The following windows reflect the production state: Preview: Connects to the JobQueueServer and displays a preview of the selected (printed) job. Details: Connects to the JobQueueServer and displays information about the selected (printed) job. Done: Connects to the JobQueueServer and displays the list of done jobs. Waiting: Connects to the JobQueueServer and displays the list of jobs waiting for being processed.

Workflow Configuration

5

Activating Windows 1 2

Make sure that Enable Workspace Change is activated in menu View > Workspaces. Select menu View > Tools and check the desired window from the lower part of the list.

Arranging Windows Make sure that Enable Workspace Change is activated in menu View > Workspaces. The windows can be positioned as window or docked to one side of the JobComposer window. To undock a window, double-click its title bar. To position a window, move it until positioning arrows (a) appear in the JobComposer window. Then, move it on the arrow pointing to the position at which it should be put. To position the window in tabbed group, drag it on the window title of the desired window group.

a

1

2

a a

a

1 2 a

1

To resize a window, move the window separator.

Workflow Configuration

6

Default Settings Workspace Besides the possibility of creating and saving workspaces, which is described in the chapters above, menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Application > User Interface Preferences offers some settings controlling several actions when working in the job. Selection Context Menu This setting controls the image context menu: Standard (default): 1 2 Shows just the commands 3 4 that are not available in the image Properties window reducing the number of entries dramatically. Select Property Page: Shows all image editing commands increasing the number of entries in the image context menu dramatically. Legacy: Shows all image editing commands available but activates just the ones that have been available in version v.2008 of the ErgoSoft RIP. 1

Automatic Apply Discard This setting specifies what will be done when you made changes to some settings in the Properties window and select another command or property without applying or discarding the modifications. 2

3

4

Job Double Click Action This setting specifies what will be done when you double-click an image or the job: None (default): Nothing will happen Toggle Workspace: Double-clicking an image will automatically switch to the Edit workspace while double-clicking the job will switch to the Standard workspace allowing fast workspace change. Ask to Save Modified Job This setting specifies what will be done when you close a modified job.

Workflow Configuration

7

Job Menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Job > Job Default Settings and menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Job > Extras offer some default settings for job layout as well as for processing jobs. Mark Ask on every new job when you want to specify the media size, margins and job processing policy settings for each new job. 1

1 2

The functions for selecting a media size are described in the manual part about Print Environments. The global media size configuration is disabled when the media size configuration is activated in the current print environment. 2

3

4

The image margin configuration is described in the manual part about Print Environments. The global image margin configuration is disabled when the media size configuration is activated in the current print environment. 3

Select the Job Processing Policy that is to be used as default for processing jobs. For a description of Job Processing Policies please refer to the manual part about Special Workflow Tools. 4

The Outer Margin is added as white border outside of the print marks. Please note that the outer margin is always used and not only when the print marks are activated. 5

Specify the method for centering images as well as an offset. When using media margins or ink control strips or plotter marks, the job size is smaller than the media size and the center of the job size may be different from the center of the media size, especially when the not available left and right media portions are different. 6

Workflow Configuration

5 6 7

8

8

When importing an image that is wider than the job, the image is automatically tiled. Automatic tiling is also used when an image is scaled to a size wider than the job. This setting specifies how automatic (horizontal) tiling is done. Vertical tiling must always be done manually. Select whether all tiles will be of Equal Size or whether the first tiles will be of Maximum Size and the last one will be smaller. Specify the value of horizontal Overlap. The setting for Put each tile on a separate page is default for each time manual tiling is launched – even when the selected image is already tiled using the opposite setting from the one specified as global option. 7

This setting allows configuring and activating the special identification lines for the Fotoba cutter. The Fotoba cutter needs special marks around the images themselves. Check Print Cut Marks and specify the size of the Fotoba strips. Please note that the print marks are switched off when using the Fotoba cutter. 8

Image Menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Image allows specifying default settings for image format, print marks, image AddOns, image margins, color management and PostScript/ PDF settings. You may select a customized preset or just enter the desired settings. For a detailed description of the available options please refer to the manual part about image preset (Image Editing Automation).

Workflow Configuration

9

Access Levels Menu Tools > User Level offers 2 user levels: Administrator and Production. This command allows entering a password for the administrator so that the ErgoSoft RIP will automatically start in production mode in which e.g. modifying the print environments is not possible. Select the user mode in which you want to currently run the ErgoSoft RIP. In Administrator mode, click on Change to change or set a password for the administrator mode. This password must be entered each time you want to run the ErgoSoft RIP in administrator mode. Production mode runs without a password. When a password has been set for administrator mode, the ErgoSoft RIP automatically starts in production mode and locks functions such as creating density linearizations and printer profiles as well as creating or modifying print environments.

Others Display Configuration Menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Application > Display offers some options to configure the display as well as image viewing and editing. Select the monitor profile that you want to use for displaying images in the image editing functions. Clicking on Delete removes the selected monitor profile after confirmation from the hard disk. Clicking on Import helps in importing monitor profiles to the folder in which the ErgoSoft RIP expects them to be. 1

Select the desired Unit of Measure (Centimeter, Inch, Millimeter, Point, or Pica). 2

1

2 3 4

Enter the complete path name for the applications you want to use for Viewing or Editing raster images as well as the application you want to use for viewing and editing Vector files. 3

Workflow Configuration

10

Enter separators that are used to split the alphabetical list of available print environments or cut environments for the tree structure. Please note that not allowed characters and signs are removed from the list without any notice. Thus, after having entered the separators and closed the dialog box be sure to check the list again. 4

Preview Management Menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Application > Snapshots offers some options for managing the previews. Check Store all snapshots in a common local folder to save the 1 snapshots in subfolder Files\SnapRO\... of the user 2 data folder. Since the complete path of the image folder is appended to the path of the user data folder 3 you should take care that this path will not exceed the limits of your operating system by using a short 4 user data folder path and/or short image folder paths. When Update automatically is checked, a preview is created automatically whenever an image is imported for which no preview has yet been created. Enter the file size in KB that snapshots shall use in high resolution (display of images in the job). Snapshots for low resolution (display of snapshots in Album and preview in import dialog and information) are sized automatically at a ratio of the high resolution snapshots. When the resolution of the snapshot is not good enough for the selected zoom factor, the original image is automatically used for the display. Click on Delete All Snapshots to remove all snapshots from the hard disk. They are recreated when needed. 1

This dialog part allows controlling the storage space usage for snapshots for complete hard drives. To limit the used disk space select the hard drive, check Limit space consumption and enter the amount in Mb that might be used for snapshots on this hard drive. 2

Workflow Configuration

11

In addition to the global space limitation per hard drive, the snapshot management can be configured for each folder: select the folder, limit the storage space, and let all snapshots delete automatically that are not used for a certain time, or exclude the folder from the automatic snapshot removal process. Click Remove Folder to manually remove the selected image folder from the list. 3

Specify whether you want to suppress the image display in the job completely and whether you want to use the original file instead of the extra created snapshots for the display in the job. Enter the cache size in MB that may be used for displaying snapshots in the job. Half of this value is used for displaying the snapshots in Album. Recommended size: 16-1024 MB, default: 80 MB 4

Controlling PostScript Rasterization Since the settings for PostScript Rasterization are very complex they are described in the manual part about Controlling PostScript Rasterization.

Workflow Configuration

12

Measuring Configuration Menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Application > Spectrophotometer offers some settings for defining the communication parameters between the ErgoSoft RIP and a spectrophotometer. Select the type of your spectrophotometer and click Detect to let the ErgoSoft RIP find the connection. Some spectrophotometers allow additional configurations or calibrations which are available by clicking on Options. 1

1

2

3 For certain workflows it might be necessary not to use the default ICC standard based on D50 but a special measurement specification that is based on D65. Please note that this setting must be done before the first measurement is started because the resulting Lab values depend on the selected measurement specification. Density linearizations and printer profiles created with D65 can only be used when the appropriate measurement specification is set. 2

Select the Print Marks preset that is to be used when printing calibrations charts. The selected print marks settings for calibration charts may be different from the global print marks settings for images. 3

Workflow Configuration

13

Application Notes Print Environments

Print Environments

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Print Environments

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Basic Functions ...........................................................................................................................................................1 Inserting Print Environments ...........................................................................................................................2 Deleting Print Environments............................................................................................................................3 Managing Print Environments ........................................................................................................................3 Configuring Print Environments...........................................................................................................................4 Tab “Quality”..........................................................................................................................................................4 Dithering Methods ..............................................................................................................................................6 Basics ..................................................................................................................................................................6 Smooth Diffusion / Stochastic3e .............................................................................................................6 Screen Printing Raster ..................................................................................................................................8 Tab “Printer and Port” ........................................................................................................................................9 Tab “Printing Ink Assignment” ..................................................................................................................... 10 Tab “Ink Control”............................................................................................................................................... 12 Tab “Media Size” ............................................................................................................................................... 13 Tab “Ink Cost”..................................................................................................................................................... 14 Tab “Device Options” ...................................................................................................................................... 14 Tab “General” ..................................................................................................................................................... 15 Tab “Extras” ......................................................................................................................................................... 16

Print Environments

ii

Introduction The print environment is the cornerstone of the ErgoSoft RIPs. It allows you to define all the necessary information and settings to print on a particular printer/media/ink combination. It contains the printer driver, the dithering method, the linearization of the printer, the output profile, the total ink limit, the port used, and other device settings. In order to get the best printing result, we strongly recommend creating separate print environments for each printer/media/ink combination. For the printout, the print environment is simply selected from the list. Thus, for a certain media, the same configuration may be used without having to select the data every time. All data are selected automatically when the appropriate print environment has been selected. The Print Environment Manager is started by clicking this icon in the Print Environment toolbar or by selecting menu Tools > Print Environments.

Basic Functions The Print Environment Manager lists all available print environments:

1

9

1 6

4

3 5

8

7 2

When Tree Structure is checked the available print environments are displayed in a tree structure (as shown in the figure) instead of a standard list. Use menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Application > Display to set the separators for the tree structure. 1

Print Environments

1

Inserting Print Environments Download: The ErgoSoft RIPs offer a number of predefined print environments available on the web. When the connection to the Print Environment Server is established, you may select the print environments that fit best to your current combination of printer, ink, and media. The print environments can be imported directly after the download and/or saved somewhere in your local or network environment for later import on the same or another system. If the imported print environment already exists, overwriting must be confirmed. Please note that the computer must have internet access in order to download print environments. 2

Import: Print environments that are saved on any data media available from the current computer system (such as network drive, CD, DVD, etc.) may be imported into the ErgoSoft RIPs. Just navigate to the source folder and select the print environments to be imported. If the imported print environment already exists, overwriting must be confirmed. 3

Add: If a print environment does not exist for your desired printer configuration and media or if the print environment does not suit your temperature/humidity environment, you will need to create your own. Click on the + to the left of the printer name to open the list. Select the print environment that is to be used as basis for the new print environment from the print environments listed in Driver. All print environments starting with “*” are installed with the ErgoSoft RIP. These print environments do not contain any specific settings, thus, should not be used without having been controlled and adjusted. Enter the Name of the new print environment. We recommend entering the media name, the creation date, and other important information in the name that will help you in recognizing the print environment later on. After having closed the dialog box by clicking on OK, the print environment may be configured directly. 4

Print Environments

2

Deleting Print Environments 5

Remove: When you do not need the print environment any longer, you may remove it from the print environment list as well as from your hard disk.

Managing Print Environments 6

Rename: The name of the selected print environment can be modified when needed.

Copy: Copying an existing print environment may be useful when you just need to make some changes to the current settings for testing purposes or others. This function can also be used to add a new print environment that is based on the settings of a current one. 7

Export: Print environments can be exported in order to save them on any location on your system e.g. for transferring them to another system. Select the location of the exported print environment in another dialog box; the name of the print environment in the list of print environments will be the name of the exported print environment file. When more than one print environments are selected (not available in the Tree Structure), a print environment package is exported. 8

Manage write protection: To secure a print environment from being modified accidentally, it can set to be ‘write protected’ (read only). Please note that this function only works on the selected print environment when the box is checked while closing the Print Environment Manager with OK. 9

Print Environments

3

Configuring Print Environments Settings: The settings of a print environment can be accessed from the Print Environment Manager or by clicking this icon in the Print Environment toolbar. The print environment has a minimum of 5 tabs for standard settings: General, Quality, Printer and Port, Extras, and Media Size. When the printer allows changing the default slot settings for the ink cartridges another tab Printing Ink Assignment is available. Additional tabs Ink Control, Ink Cost, and Device Options are available for most printers. Please note that the availability of configuration options highly depends on the selected basic printer driver. 1

The global option Archive print environment before changing allows automatically creating a backup copy of the original print environment in the standard archive folder.

Tab “Quality” The Quality tab contains information about the printer resolution, the dithering method, the total ink limit, the density linearization, and the printer profile. Select the Resolution for printing. When the printer can only print with one resolution, this field is disabled and the resolution is displayed. The resolution is displayed - depending on the printer used - either as printer mode or in DPI. For some printers the resolution may be set on the Device Options tab instead. 1

2

1 2 4

5

3

List Dithering allows selecting the dithering method to be

used. The Apply Total Ink Limit box allows for the specification of the maximum percentage of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black inks that may be used for printing. 300 % may be used as a guiding value. Please note that the color values in additional profile color channels and additional spot color channels are not modified. The method used will care for the original gray value of the color; the colors may become too light. Thus, we recommend reducing the total ink limit only when it is absolutely necessary. When the total ink limit is set to a value that is too low, the range of printable colors will be reduced. This will lead to printouts of lesser quality. 3

Print Environments

4

Check Apply Ink Limit on top of Printer Profile to limit the amount of ink for Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black always to the specified ink limit – even if the printer profile has a higher ink limit. Please note that this may result in color changes – especially when the printer profile has 5 or more color channels (e.g. CMYKOG) because the values in the additional color channels are not modified by the ink limit. Dialog part Density Linearization allows a pre-defined density linearization to be loaded. By default, the density linearization is part of the print environment file (embedded). When checking external, an external density linearization file can be selected for the print environment. Click on the arrow next to the name of the current density linearization file to get a list of the available density linearization files from which one may be selected. A short description of the selected density linearization file is displayed in the box below the name. Uncheck external to embed the external density linearization file into the print environment. Please note that the print environment with the external density linearization must be saved (closed and re-opened) before you can embed the density linearization. Clicking on Delete removes the selected density linearization after confirmation from the print environment or from the hard disk - depending on whether it is an embedded or external density linearization. Embedded density linearizations can be exported into external density linearization files by clicking on the Export button. The creation of a density linearization is described in the density manual. 4

Dialog part Printer Profile allows a pre-defined printer profile to be loaded. Printer profiles are created using the optional ColorGPS profiler to adjust the output to the inks and media. Printing takes more time when a printer profile is used. By default, the printer profile is part of the print environment file (embedded). When checking external an external printer profile can be selected for the print environment. Click on the arrow next to the name of the current printer profile to get a list of the available printer profiles from which one may be selected. A short description of the selected printer profile is displayed in the box below the name. Uncheck external to embed the external printer profile into the print environment. Please note that the print environment with the external printer profile must be saved (closed and re-opened) before you can embed the printer profile. Clicking on Delete removes the selected printer profile after confirmation from the print environment or from the hard disk - depending on whether it is an embedded or external printer profile. Embedded printer profiles can be exported into external printer profiles by clicking on the Export button. Clicking on Import allows copying printer profiles to the folder in which the ErgoSoft RIP expects them to be copied. ErgoSoft AG does not guarantee that profiles that are not created with help of the optional ColorGPS profiler can be used by the ErgoSoft RIP. 5

Print Environments

5

The creation of a printer profiles with the optional ColorGPS profiler is described in the ColorGPS manual. When not having selected a printer profile and printing RGB images (always with input profile) or Lab images or CMYK images with input profile, the ErgoSoft RIP will use a default separation. The default separation causes the gray value component of a color to be printed with black and CMY. In most cases this will improve the print quality.

Dithering Methods Basics There are two groups of raster types: irregular rasters and regular rasters. Regular rasters: Screen Printing Applications. It can look like pictures in newspapers. Screen printing Applications can be customized and is used for screen printing. Irregular or random like rasters: Smooth Diffusion and Stochastic3e which both can be customized. Both Smooth Diffusion and Stochastic3e can handle more than 4 dilutions of one ink (e.g. 6 or 7 black tones). When changing the dithering method (raster) or the settings for a raster, creating a new density linearization is recommended.

Smooth Diffusion / Stochastic3e Smooth Diffusion is based on a Floyd Steinberg error diffusion with special care for more than one light ink per color combined with variable dots. The features are: Reduction of vermicular artifacts in very light halftones Reduction of noise and structural artifacts in the transition from light ink to full tone ink Supporting combinations of light inks and dot sizes with more than 4 components (e.g. variable dot with light cyan and very light cyan) Possibility to limit the use of small and medium dot sizes to get good rasters, especially on “difficult” printers such as Roland Possibility to optimize the raster result for printers with artifacts in the printout in order to reduce printing artifacts such as horizontal lines (banding) as well as vertical striation (caused by crimped media or transportation rolls) Stochastic3e is a frequency modulated raster. The detail sharpness is less than the one at Smooth Diffusion. However, the program consumes less calculation time than Smooth Diffusion.

Print Environments

6

Clicking on the Settings button near the dithering method allows specifying some parameters for the raster. When there are printing 1 1 problems such as banding, cords, artifacts, non-smooth transitions in the density, etc. we recommend to move the slider a 2 bit to the right (higher value). This will reduce printing artifacts at the cost of clearer raster either globally for all colors or separate for each color. A good printer without striation or banding needs factor 0. Printers with striation and/or banding need a higher factor resulting in a coarser printout when looking very close but the artifacts are set suppressed. The Advanced Settings allow controlling the usage of ink dilutions and dot sizes. The graph on the right shows all combinations of dilution levels and dot sizes possible in the current print environment. The horizontal axis represents the optical density represented by the available combinations of ink dilutions and dot sizes. The vertical axis represents the maximum amount of ink used. The graph samples black ink with 3 dilutions (black, light black, and light black 2) and 3 dot sizes (small, medium, and big). To reduce the amount of ink used for a certain combination of ink dilution and dot size, just drag down the separator line between two combinations of ink dilution and dot size. Small gaps in the linearity of a gradient can be smoothened by reducing the amount of ink used for all combinations except for the darkest one. In order to meet the request of a continuously rising optical density (horizontal axis) all combinations of ink dilution and dot size must be darker than the one before. Thus, by default, the ink dilution and the dot size as well as the amount of ink used are only allowed to rise with rising optical density. List Mode offers some pre-defined combination selections: Auto: Automatically chooses between “Prefer small dots” and “Prefer light inks” depending on the configuration of your printer with more than one dot size and/or more than one ink dilution per color. Prefer small dots: This mode first changes the ink dilution from lightest to darkest before changing the dot size from smallest to biggest. All ink dilutions except for the darkest one are printed with the smallest dot size only. Prefer light inks: This mode first changes the dot size from smallest to biggest before changing the ink dilution from lightest to darkest. All ink dilutions except for the lightest one are printed with the biggest dot size only. User defined: This mode allows removing the selected combination of ink dilution and dot size and adding another combination of ink dilution and dot size that always meets the requirement of rising optical density. Experienced: This mode allows the user to add any combination of ink dilution and dot size as well as to set any amount of ink used for any combination without ensuring that the requirement of rising optical density is always met. It is the task of the user to carefully configure and check the configuration with test prints for not running into falling optical densities at any time. 2

Print Environments

7

Screen Printing Raster The Screen Printing raster also realizes half tones using regular patterns. This raster is determined by the raster width and the raster angles. Clicking on the Settings button near the dithering method allows the values for all channels of the current print color space to be set. The Frequency determines how fine the raster will be. It is specified in Lines/Inch or in 1 2 3 Lines/cm. The higher the frequency, the finer the raster and the better the reproduced continuous tone range of the image. However, the frequency must not be too high because then the pixels on the media merge into one another. It depends on the media quality and print process whether or not to use a rough or a fine raster. Often the manufacturer of a media or the repro or silk-screen partners can recommend a suitable raster. The height of line is calculated from the printer resolution and the wanted number of raster lines. For example, for the often-used raster 12, for 720 dpi printer resolution a frequency of 720/12 = 60 lines/inch must be set. 1

When colored images are printed, all colors are printed – except for the first printed color – one on top of the other with parts of the dots overlapping the dots below. To make sure that as much ink is printed directly onto the paper as possible, the different inks are printed in different Angles. It is very important to use correct angles to avoid moiré – a pattern that negatively affects the image quality. In practice, the following angle combination has proved to have favorable effects: Black, the strongest color, is rotated by 45°. Cyan is rotated at 15°, Magenta is rotated at 75°, and Yellow is rotated by 90°. 2

A raster point is built by many small color points. There are several Shapes available for the raster point: Dot, Cosine Dot, several kinds of Ellipse, Line, and Euclidean Dot. Each shape results in another patter. The default Cosine Dot results, in most cases, in a good output, so the shape should only be changed if it is necessary. 3

Print Environments

8

Tab “Printer and Port” The Printer and Port tab contains information about the used printer and the port to which the printer is connected and whether the data is sent directly to the printer or first saved on the hard disk and then sent to the printer using the Print Client. As in Windows itself, a Printer must be created for each combination of connection and connected output device. Select the Printer to which you want to print with this print environment. Only printers suitable to the basic print driver for your print environment will be displayed in the list. 1

When a spool folder is configured in the printer settings (see below), the usage of the Print Client is configured by default. When you want to send the data directly to the port by default you have to Skip the Print Client. When using the Print Client you have to select the amount of data that must be first saved to the

1 3

2

2

Spool Folder before the Print Client will start sending data to the printer. For more information on using the Print Client please refer to the manual part about printing. For printers with fast connections such as Mimaki JV5, Canon printers and others as well as all Mimaki printers connected to the firewire port, we strongly recommend using the Print Client instead of printing directly to the port. 3

Click the Edit icon to modify the settings of the selected printer or the New icon to create a new printer.

3 4 5

6 7 8

The Name is used to identify the printer in the ErgoSoft RIP. When creating a new printer, the Name is entered when saving the settings. The description is just for your information. 4

Select the Port to which the printer is connected. Depending on the type of the selected port, the button Settings is enabled and allows modifying some port settings. Clicking on Add allows another port, such as the name of a network printer, to be added to the list. The available port types depend on the printer type. 5

Print Environments

9

When adding a TCP/IP port, we strongly recommend using one of the RAW protocol types: RAW for socket version 1.1 and RAW (2) for socket version 2. The other protocol types are designed for tests with small amounts of data only and can cause severe problems when used in the production. Hint: The Port for the RAW protocol types often is 9100. Select the Status Monitor type that can be displayed in the Print Client. Please note that the status monitor type must match your printer type. The status monitor is not available for all printer types. 6

Select a folder in which the ripped data for this printer will be saved when the data is not sent directly to the printer. This is the spool folder in which the Print Client for this printer will look for data that can be sent to the printer. 7

Enter the Cost Factor for the ripping time. This value is used to calculate the computer time dependent part of the production costs that are displayed in the information to the ripped and printed job. 8

Tab “Printing Ink Assignment” The Printing Ink Assignment tab contains information about the order of inks in the printer. For each slot select the color 1 that is in the corresponding slot 2 of the printer. Tool Tools > Linearization & Profile 3 Tools > Print Ink Assignment prints a chart on the printer to show the channel settings in the printer for all 4 used slots starting with the color that must be configured for Slot 1 at the left side of the printout. When not printing with all colors, a print environment should be created for each color combination. Color channels that are not used are ignored during printing, but each specified color channel has to be rasterized. Please note that in colored printing the four basic colors Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black must be selected. The needed colors for printing with printer profiles are: 1

Print Environments

10

CMYK as first four color channels; Orange/Red, Green, Blue/Violet are used as profile channels 5, 6, 7; followed by “Profile channel 8”, “Profile channel 9”, etc. When one or more of the colors “Orange/Red”, “Green”, and “Blue/Violet” are not used they simply can be skipped. Example: Ink colors are CMYK, bright blue, Azure, Navy Blue, Lavender (4 blue tones) Since “Blue” can be selected for only one of the four blue tones (e.g. for “bright blue”), the other three blue tones must be labeled “Profile channel 8”, “Profile channel 9”, “Profile channel 10”. This means for the printer profile: CMYK are channels 1 to 4, “Blue” is channel 5, “Profile channel 8” is channel 6, “Profile channel 9” is channel 7, and “Profile channel 10” is channel 8. Click Restore Default to restore the default printing ink assignment for the current print environment. Please note that this will overwrite your modifications (except settings for spot colors) without warning. 2

When your printer can be equipped with two or three cartridges with the same ink (e.g. 2x CMYK) you may want to use two or three cartridges of the same ink color simultaneously. Check Allow Multiple Inks in order to select the same ink color in several slots. The method As Layers will use all cartridges with the same ink color together to double or triple the density of the color. When using a variable dot sizes you can specify the dot size for which you want to use the multiple inks. This method has the same effect as printing several ink layers but is much faster. Selecting Distributed will print with all cartridges of the same color, but with only one at a time. The used cartridges are chosen randomly. This method lets you print longer before you have to refill the ink. In some versions of the ErgoSoft RIP the As Layers mode is only available in the monochrome color model. 3

Normally, the used Color Model is “Color”. When the printer is set up for monochrome printing with several dilutions of the black ink you can select the color model “Monochrome Black” in order to use black and light black inks only. For more information on the monochrome color model please refer to the manual part about monochrome printing. 4

When the specified color order does not meet the actual color order in the printer, “incorrect” colors will be printed.

Print Environments

11

Tab “Ink Control” The Ink Control tab allows configuring the ink control strips printed automatically with each job. The Production Strip allows printing small strips along the left and/or right side of the job in order to prevent ink heads from becoming dry. Since the production strip is not meant for being used as visual control whether the heads are printing correctly, all heads can print at the same position. Thus, the available ink slots are divided into the available number of strips (Strip Count) with a configurable maximum amount of ink used (Coverage). 1

1

2

3

The Visual Control Strip allows printing strips along the left and/or right side of the job with all inks visible for visual control of the condition of the print heads and nozzles. Mode Dot Sizes in Row prints patches for all dot sizes of one ink color side by side requiring the strip width for each dot size. The specified number of shades of each ink color is printed one under the other along the job length – one color after the other. Mode One Column prints patches for all combinations of dot sizes and specified shades of one ink color one under the other along the job length – one color after the other. Thus, the strip always has just one patch in width. Mode Continuous prints strips for all combinations of dot sizes and specified shades of one ink color side by side requiring the strip width for each combination of dot size and shade – one color after the other along the job width. 2

3

The required width at the left and/or right side of the job for the specified strips inform about the reduction of the job width resulting from the current configuration.

Print Environments

12

Tab “Media Size” The Media Size tab allows setting a default media size for all jobs created with this print environment. Check Use as default for this print environment to specify a media format and margins that are always used as default when a new job is created for the current print environment. Please note that this setting will override the settings for the global media size for all jobs created when the current print environment is selected. 1

1

6 2 3

5

4

Select the default Media Size for new jobs. The Width and Height of the selected format are displayed under the list. The rotated orientation can be selected if it is available for the selected format. When the selected printer allows checking the width of the inserted media you can also get the media size from the printer. 2

Check currently appropriate to limit the list to those media that fit into the printable area of the current printer. Check roll media only to limit the media size list to roll formats only. 3

Specify the Margins on the media that will not be printed. Mark minimum to use the minimum margins provided by the printer. Borderless is only activated when the current print driver (print environment) allows to print without margins for the selected media size. 4

An unlimited number of media size lists can be saved (exported) and later reloaded. The button Import allows re-importing media sizes from the predefined System Files or another media size list (User Files) into the current list. 5

Use the tool buttons to modify the media size list. This list is printer-independent which means that it holds all available media sizes independent whether they can be used with the current printer or not. Pre-defined media sizes installed with the ErgoSoft RIP cannot be modified in the settings. Media size “+Maximum+” cannot be modified at all nor deleted. 6

Print Environments

13

Entering “0” for the width indicates the maximum width provided by the print driver. Entering “0” for the length indicates roll media. Check Save Paper in order to cut the roll after the job length instead of after the specified media length. This option is only used by roll printers when sheet formats are specified. 7

7

Tab “Ink Cost” The information on the Ink Cost tab is used to calculate the costs of a print. When the printer has variable dot, the dot volume can be set for each dot size. The Default dot volumes are set automatically and are not necessarily valid for your printer/ink. Check User, double-click the volume to be modified, and enter the amount (in picoliter) of ink that is used for one dot. When using variable dots, the values for all dot sizes from big to small can be entered. When using fix dots, only one dot size “FixDot” is available. 1

1

2

2

Select the Ink Type that is used in the current print environment. Clicking on the buttons allows the ink list to be edited by editing the selected ink type; e.g. specifying the cost factor for the ink adding new ink types to the list removing the selected ink type from the list renaming the selected ink type 2

Tab “Device Options” The Device Options tab allows choosing the device specific options you want to use. When using a predefined print environment please keep in mind that these settings will influence the quality of the final printout. Depending on your printer these options allow to set the print direction, the number of passes, the dot size, the dry time, and many more. Please note: When printing with an RGB print driver it is very important to select the appropriate media in order to get the expected output.

Print Environments

14

Tab “General” The General tab contains general information like name and description of the print environment, specifications about the media for which these settings are suitable, as well as the model number when the printer can be purchased in different print widths. The Name and the Description of the current print environment can be modified. When the basic printer for the current print environment had been supported in older versions of the ErgoSoft RIP, Use Legacy Driver can be used to set the print environment format to the old version in which the new layout for the control strips is not available. 1

The lower field in dialog part Suitable media list for print environment lists all media with which the current print environment is intended to be used. As soon as a media is selected in this field, the button Remove Media is activated so that the media can be removed from the field. As soon as a new media is selected in the list above, the button Add Media is activated so that this media can be entered into the field containing suitable media.

1

3

2 4

2

3

5 3

Clicking on the buttons allows the Media list to be edited by editing the selected medium; e.g. specifying the cost factor for the medium adding new media to the list removing the selected medium from the list renaming the selected medium

4

The Print Data Type just displays some information about basic print driver of the current print environment.

When the printer is available in several print widths, use the list Printer Model to specify the width of printer. This list is not displayed when there is only one width for the printer. 5

Print Environments

15

Tab “Extras” The Extras tab allows some additional settings to be specified. The Legacy Ink Control Strip is only available for legacy print drivers (see tab General). It is printed at the left side of the job when it is Enabled. It takes care that each cartridge is used either in fixed intervals (alternating) or as continuous strip of all colors side by side (continuous) so that the ink cannot dry up and that it can be seen when a cartridge stops working. Use Width and Height to specify the dimensions of the ink control strip samples. Horizontal distance is responsible for the distance between the ink control strip and job. Vertical distance is responsible for the distance between the samples in the ink control strip. 1

1 2

5

3

4

Specify in the dialog part Mirror whether or not all images in the job are to be mirrored at the vertical axis. You can either mirror Image by Image where only the images are mirrored but the order of the images from left to right is not touched. Or you can mirror the complete job either in full width including the white space at the right side (Job in full width) or without the white space at the right side (Job optimized) where not only the images are mirror but also the order of the images from left to right is reversed. 2

Select an output profile that is to be used to simulate a target printer (e.g. offset printer, not supported large format printer, etc.) during printing with the ErgoSoft RIP color management. When printing, the image data are first converted into the gamut of the proof printer using the profile and rendering intent that was specified on this tab. Then these converted data are converted into the gamut of the printer that is used for the printout. 3

The Named Colors Profile is a list of color names and color values that is used to replace colors in an image. For information about creating and using a named colors profile please refer to the manual part about Color Replacement. 4

When certain media is used, the size is changed caused by additional processing. Use the dialog part Size changes caused by additional processing to specify the horizontal and vertical change to consider it automatically during printing. The value to be entered is the size of the printed image in relation to the image size in the job. Thus, entering a value greater than 100% causes the images to be printed smaller, entering a value smaller than 100% causes the images to be printed larger. 5

Print Environments

16

Print Environments

17

Application Notes Configuring Remote Servers and Clients

Configuring Remote Servers and Clients

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Configuring Remote Servers and Clients

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Preparing the Remote Server ................................................................................................................................2 Preparing the Remote Client .................................................................................................................................3 Configuring the Remote Client ............................................................................................................................4 Configuring the Remote Server ...........................................................................................................................4 Printing from the Remote Server to the Remote Client..............................................................................5 Special Configurations and Troubleshooting .................................................................................................6 Re-Configuring the Remote Print Client as Local Print Client ............................................................6 Remote Print/Cut Clients and Older Versions of the ErgoSoft RIP ...................................................7 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................................7 Firewall Settings .............................................................................................................................................7 Connection Problems because of other Security Restrictions ......................................................8

Configuring Remote Servers and Clients

ii

Introduction The ErgoSoft RIP offers the possibility to not only run Print Clients and Cut Clients on the same computer as the JobComposer but also to run Print Clients and Cut Clients on other computers. The Remote Server will send the data to the Remote Client that controls the printer or cutter. The JobComposer and all modules except the Print Client or Cut Client are installed and run on the Remote Server computer while just the Print Client or Cut Client runs on the Remote Client computer. Some special configuration must be established to enable the communication between the Remote Server and the Remote Client.

[ Print Command ]

RIP Computer = Remote Server

Main module. Layouting and job make-ready interface.

JobCenter [

Progress Report

Display interface for JobQueueServer

]

[ RIP Command ] [

Progress Report

RIP Data

]

JQ-Server

Background task. Manages all communication between the different modules.

RIP Server Rip engine

Print Data

]

[

]

Print/Cut Client Computer = Remote Client

[ Print ]

[

[ Print Command ]

JobComposer

Print/Cut Client

Hosts spool data and print queue for a specific printer. Sends data to the printer.

Spool Folder

Common Windows fol-der containing ripped data for the Print Client.

This documentation will explain the necessary settings and configurations that must be done to establish the communication between the Remote Server and the Remote Client.

Configuring Remote Servers and Clients

1

Preparing the Remote Server Start the Maintenance Tool from the ErgoSoft RIP program group in the Windows program menu. 1

2

Select Configure remote server in the part Distributed setup.

3

Do not change the default settings. The advanced settings are not needed at the mo-

1

2

ment. Just click on the Configure button and wait for the program to finish the configuration. During the configuration process the Close button is disabled. When the configuration process is finished the Configure button is disabled while the Close button is enabled. 4

Click the Close button to close the configuration program.

3

4

The configuration must be repeated after each installation of the ErgoSoft RIP.

Configuring Remote Servers and Clients

2

Preparing the Remote Client Start the Maintenance Tool from the ErgoSoft RIP program group in the Windows program menu. 1

2

Select Configure remote client in the part Distributed setup.

3

After clicking on the Next button you can start the configuration:

When the name of the computer running the Remote Server is known check On another computer and enter the name or click the Browse button to select from a list of available computers. When the name of the computer running the Remote Server is not know: Start the JobCenter on the Remote Server. Check Search for ErgoRip NET Server and click on Next. Wait for the search to finish and Select the Net Server from the list, check Confirm location and click on Next or Check Configure location manually and click on Next to return to the dialog before in which you can enter the name of the Remote Server. Wait until the connection to the Remote Server is established and click on Finish to save the configuration.

1

2

4

Configuring Remote Servers and Clients

3

4

3

Configuring the Remote Client When both, the Remote Server as well as the Remote Client are prepared, the Remote Client can be configured to run as Remote Print or Cut Client. 1

Create a spool folder and make it shareable. Set the sharing rights and NTFS authorizations that all users of the Remote Server computer have right access.

2

Run the Print & Cut Client Setup from the program group of the ErgoSoft RIP in the Windows program menu.

Create a Print or Cut Client. When selecting the spool folder take care that the complete UNC path is used in the selection (e.g. \\server\spool). Take care to use a name for the Print or Cut Client that let it be easily identified in the printer or plotter list on the Remote Server that might also list local Print or Cut Clients. 3

The Remote Print or Cut Client can only be started when the JobCenter on the corresponding Remote Server computer is running.

Configuring the Remote Server When both, the Remote Server as well as the Remote Client are prepared and the Remote Print or Cut Client is configured, the print environment(s) on the Remote Server must be configured to access the spool folder of the Remote Print or Cut Client. Open the print environment for configuration. Select the Printer and Port tab. Select the appropriate printer from the list that does not only hold the local printers but also the remote printers. Configure cut environments accordingly.

Configuring Remote Servers and Clients

4

Printing from the Remote Server to the Remote Client When the printing command is launched in the JobComposer of the Remote Server computer using a print environment that is linked to a Remote Print Client, there is not any difference visible to printing to a Local Print Client. But the following conditions must be met so that the data will be sent to the printer: The JobCenter must be running on the Remote Server The Print Client must be running on the Remote Client The network connection between the Remote Server and the Remote Client must be established. This means that both, the Remote Server and the Remote Client, must have complete access to the spool folder of the Remote Print Client. Take care when using a password for folder access that the access is established when starting the printing process.

Configuring Remote Servers and Clients

5

Special Configurations and Troubleshooting Re-Configuring the Remote Print Client as Local Print Client When the Remote Print Client is to be re-used as Local Print Client, i.e. a Print Client that runs on the same computer as the JobComposer and the JobCenter, it must be reconfigured: Start the Maintenance Tool from the ErgoSoft RIP program group in the Windows program menu. 1

2

Select Configure remote client in the part Distributed setup.

3

After clicking on the Next button you can start the configuration:

1

2

Check On the local machine and click on Next. Wait until the connection to the local servers is established and click on Finish to save the configuration. 4

3

4

Configuring Remote Servers and Clients

6

Remote Print/Cut Clients and Older Versions of the ErgoSoft RIP When installing or running older version of the ErgoSoft RIP (e.g. v.2008) on the Remote Server computer make sure that not only all modules of the current version are closed on the Remote Server computer but also all Remote Print or Cut Clients that connect to the Remote Server computer.

Troubleshooting When the connection between the Remote Server computer and the Remote Client computer cannot be established we recommend deactivating the firewall on both computers. With the deactivated firewall, try to establish the connection on the Remote Client computer by searching for and connecting to the Remote Server as described in chapter “Preparing the Remote Client”. Having the connection established, re-activate the firewall and configure it according to the settings explained in chapter “Firewall Settings”. When the connection still cannot be established, also re-activate the firewall and configure it. Then, follow the instructions in chapter “Connection Problems because of other Security Restrictions”.

Firewall Settings The following settings for Windows Firewall are done automatically. When using another Firewall you have to configure it according to these settings: Add the following Program exceptions: PpMedSrv.exe (on Remote Server computer) PpJqServ.exe (on Remote Server computer) PpUi.exe (on Remote Client computer) PpJobCmp.exe (on Remote Client computer) PpRipSrv.exe (on Remote Client computer) PpDesp.exe (on Remote Client computer) PpJqMntr.exe (on Remote Client computer) PpNetCliCnf.exe (on Remote Client computer) All programs are located in the program folder of the ErgoSoft RIP. Add the following Port exceptions: 135 TCP protocol (Standard DCOM port) Please note that the automatic Windows Firewall configuration is restricted to the local subnet but can manually be enlarged.

Configuring Remote Servers and Clients

7

Connection Problems because of other Security Restrictions The default settings use anonymous access between the Remote Server computer and the Remote Client computer. This means that it does not matter which user is currently logged in on the Remote Server computer and the Remote Client computer; all users can use the Remote Printing functionality. But some company security policies do not allow anonymous access but just user and group based access.

1

3

2

1

2

3

Select Advanced settings in both, the Remote Server configuration dialog (displayed on the right side) and the Remote Client configuration dialog (displayed on the left side). 1

Since the Print Client needs to access the job database on the Remote Server, the Remote Server computer must run an application and allow login access for the Remote Client computer. The default setting is that the database service is run using the current user (Interactive User in Remote Server configuration displayed at the right side) and that it can be accessed from the Remote Client computer without needing a password (Anonymous logon in Remote Client configuration displayed at the left side). To follow the existing security policies of your company you might want to run the application using a certain password-protected user. Check Special user account (Remote Server configuration), Grant access for this user/group (Remote Client configuration), and enter the name of a User that does not exist at the moment (Remote Server and Remote Client configuration) as well as the Password for this user (Remote Server configuration). The user will be automatically created on the Remote Server computer where it is needed. 2

Configuring Remote Servers and Clients

8

Since the Remote Server computer needs to access the Print Clients on the Remote Client computer, the Remote Client computer must allow login access for the Remote Server computer. The default setting is that everyone (Use anonymous logon in Remote Server configuration displayed at the right side) can access the Remote Client computer from the Remote Server computer without needing a password (Anonymous logon in Remote Client configuration displayed at the left side). To follow the existing security policies of your company you might want to allow just a certain user to access the Remote Client computer from the Remote Server computer: Check Use existing user or group (Remote Server configuration) and Specified user (Remote Client configuration), and enter the User name of point 2 (in Remote Server and Remote Client configuration) as well as the Password (Remote Client configuration). Take care that grant this user/group remote DCOM access rights (Remote Server configuration) is checked. 3

Configuring Remote Servers and Clients

9

Application Notes Additional ColorGPS Dongle

Additional ColorGPS Dongle

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Additional ColorGPS Dongle

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Requirements ..............................................................................................................................................................1 Step 1: Installing the Main Dongle......................................................................................................................2 Step 2: Installing the Additional ColorGPS Dongle.......................................................................................2 Checking License Information ..............................................................................................................................2

Additional ColorGPS Dongle

ii

Introduction This document explains the procedure of using a main dongle and an additional ColorGPS dongle in ErgoSoft RIP software V14. Using a main dongle for the ErgoSoft RIP and an additional ColorGPS dongle allows transferring the ColorGPS license from one RIP system to another one.

Requirements Main dongle with any license for using the ErgoSoft RIP V14. Additional dongle with license for portable ColorGPS. Please note that this is a special license that can only be used together with a main license on another dongle.

Additional ColorGPS Dongle

1

Step 1: Installing the Main Dongle Plug in the main dongle; do not plug in the additional ColorGPS dongle. Start the ErgoSoft RIP and enter the license for the main dongle.

Step 2: Installing the Additional ColorGPS Dongle Close the ErgoSoft RIP including RIP Server, JobCenter, Print Clients, etc. Best, do this by using the function Shutdown ErgoSoft RIP of the Troubleshouting tab in the Maintenance Tool. The Maintenance Tool is available from the ErgoSoft RIP program group. Plug in the additional dongle while the main dongle is still plugged in. Wait until Windows has installed the new hardware (in case that Windows detects new hardware). Start the ErgoSoft RIP. It will automatically ask for the license for the second (ColorGPS only) dongle.

Checking License Information When checking the license information using menu Help > License Info you will see a slightly different dialog: A button Second Dongle... is added at the bottom which will display another dialog box showing the license for the additional ColorGPS dongle.

Additional ColorGPS Dongle

2

Application Notes Print Driver Updates

Print Driver Updates 

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2011 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Print Driver Updates

i

Contents  Introduction / Einführung.......................................................................................................................................1  Printer List / Druckerliste ........................................................................................................................................2  Canon .......................................................................................................................................................................2  Epson ........................................................................................................................................................................3 

Print Driver Updates

ii

Introduction / Einführung  The ErgoSoft RIP includes all basic print drivers. Some additional print drivers, such as RGB drivers for Epson and Canon printers or HTM drivers for Epson printers, are so large that they are not included into the standard setup but come as update to the installed version of the ErgoSoft RIP. This document holds a list of printers involved and the appropriate updates.

Das ErgoSoft RIP enthält alle Basis-Druckertreiber. Einige zusätzliche Druckertreiber, z.B. RGB-Treiber für Epson- und Canon-Drucker oder HTM-Treiber für Epson-Drucker, sind so gross, dass sie nicht in den Standard-Setup integriert sind sondern nur als Update zur installierten Version des ErgoSoft RIPs zur Verfügung stehen. Dieses Dokument enthält eine Liste der betroffenen Drucker und der zugehörigen Updates.

Print Driver Updates

1

Printer List / Druckerliste  Canon  Printer

Driver Type

Update

imagePROGRAF 5100

RGB

Canon RGB 1

imagePROGRAF 6100

RGB

Canon RGB 1

imagePROGRAF 6200

RGB

Canon RGB 1

imagePROGRAF 6300

RGB

Canon RGB 2

imagePROGRAF 6300S

RGB

Canon RGB 3

imagePROGRAF 6350

RGB

Canon RGB 2

imagePROGRAF 8100

RGB

Canon RGB 1

imagePROGRAF 8300

RGB

Canon RGB 2

imagePROGRAF 8300S

RGB

Canon RGB 3

imagePROGRAF 8310

RGB

Canon RGB 2

imagePROGRAF 8310S

RGB

Canon RGB 3

imagePROGRAF 9000

RGB

Canon RGB 1

imagePROGRAF 9100

RGB

Canon RGB 1

Canon RGB 1 = 14.0.3.4474 Canon RGB driver IPF 5100 6100 6200 8100 9000 9100.esup14 Canon RGB 2 = 14.0.3.4474 Canon RGB driver IPF 6300 6350 8300 8310.esup14 Canon RGB 3 = 14.0.3.4474 Canon RGB driver IPF 6300S 8300S 8310S.esup14 Please note that the Canon Updates can only be installed with version V14.0.3.4474 and later. Beachten Sie bitte, dass die Canon-Updates nur mit Version V14.0.3.4474 und später verwendet werden können.

Print Driver Updates

2

Epson  Printer

Driver Type

Update

Epson Stylus Photo 2100

CMYK

14.0.2.4362 Epson htm 2100.esup14

Epson Stylus Photo 2200

CMYK

14.0.2.4362 Epson htm 2100.esup14

Epson Stylus Photo 2400

CMYK

14.0.2.4362 Epson htm 2400.esup14

Epson Stylus Photo R3000

RGB

14.0.2.4390 Epson Stylus Pro R3000 RGB Driver.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 11880

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 11880

CMYK

14.0.2.4362 Epson htm 11880.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 3880

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 4450

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 4880

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 4900

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 7450

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 7600

CMYK

14.0.2.4362 Epson htm 7600.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 7700

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 7800

CMYK

14.0.2.4362 Epson htm 7800.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 7880

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 7890

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 7900

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 9450

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 9600

CMYK

14.0.2.4362 Epson htm 7600.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 9700

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 9800

CMYK

14.0.2.4362 Epson htm 7800.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 9880

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 9890

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

Epson Stylus Pro 9900

RGB

14.0.1.4305 Epson RGB HTI V2.esup14

These drivers use the dithering (raster) provided by Epson Diese Treiber verwenden die von Epson erzeugten Raster

Print Driver Updates

3

Application Notes Printer Linearization

Printer Linearization

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Printer Linearization

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Presets............................................................................................................................................................................2 Basics ........................................................................................................................................................................2 Detecting the Measuring Device ...................................................................................................................2 Starting the Linearization Dialog ...................................................................................................................3 Analyzing the Printer ................................................................................................................................................3 Setting Initial Values ...........................................................................................................................................4 Defining a Density Chart ...................................................................................................................................4 Printing the Density Chart ................................................................................................................................4 Measuring the Linearization Chart ................................................................................................................5 Completing the First Analysis..........................................................................................................................5 Conducting the Second Analysis .........................................................................................................................6 Analyzing Measurement Values .....................................................................................................................6 Setting the Desired Print Behavior ......................................................................................................................7 Optimizing the Specific Ink Application ......................................................................................................7 Setting the Dot Gain ...........................................................................................................................................8 Completing the Printer Linearization .................................................................................................................8 Basics about Linearization ................................................................................................................................... 10 Benefits of a Printer Linearization............................................................................................................... 10 Duties of the Printer Linearization.............................................................................................................. 11 Analyzing the Printer Behavior under a given Combination of Printer, Inks and Medium ................................................................................................................................................. 11 Specification of the Desired Target Behavior................................................................................... 11 The Density Linearization Dialog ...................................................................................................................... 12 First Analysis ....................................................................................................................................................... 12 Initial Values .................................................................................................................................................. 12 Printing the Calibration Chart ................................................................................................................ 12 Measuring the Calibration Chart........................................................................................................... 13 Completing the First Analysis................................................................................................................. 13 Conducting the Second Analysis ................................................................................................................ 14 Checking the Measuring Curve ............................................................................................................. 15 Limit Specific Ink Application ................................................................................................................. 16 Setting the Dot Gain .................................................................................................................................. 17 Importing/Exporting a Target Density ................................................................................................ 18 Saving Density Linearizations....................................................................................................................... 18 Resolve Problems Dialog for the Calibration Chart ................................................................................... 19 Estimating the Printer’s Dot Gain ............................................................................................................... 19 Problems with Ink Bleeding or Flaking ..................................................................................................... 19

Printer Linearization

ii

Additional Notes ..................................................................................................................................................... 20 Notes on Solving Measurement Problems with Varying Print Quality ........................................ 20 Measuring Charts Several Times ........................................................................................................... 20 Rotating Measuring Charts and Printing them out Several Times........................................... 20 Print only one Line per Channel ............................................................................................................ 20 Notes on Dot Gain on the Basis of Standards in Offset Printing.................................................... 21 Using Non-Supported Measuring Devices ................................................................................................... 22 Importing ASCII-File ........................................................................................................................................ 22 Entering measurement results manually ................................................................................................. 23

Printer Linearization

iii

Introduction Even before an image is printed, there exists a distinct idea about the look of the image in the print. To achieve this goal the printer must get exact information about the supposed look of the image using some RIP software. But before these guidelines can be established the reaction of the printer without external influence must be analyzed. Thus, to be able to drive a printer successfully the printing behavior must be analyzed by examining the way it applies the ink to the media. Based on the gathered information, the printer’s behavior can be influenced in order to achieve the desired printing behavior. This process is called printer linearization. This manual should shed some light on how a printer linearization can be accomplished using the ErgoSoft RIP. The first part of this documentation deals with the printer linearization in practice. The linearization process will be divided into three topical sections: 1.

Presets

2.

Analyzing the printer

3.

Setting the target behavior

The second part of this documentation deals with the theoretical backgrounds in order to provide better understanding of the way the process of a printer linearization is supposed to work.

Printer Linearization

1

Presets Basics The ErgoSoft RIP Software has to be installed on the computer that is to be used to conduct the printer linearization. Also, a suitable measuring device (spectrophotometer) is needed. Further information on the needed presets such as a print environment etc. can be found in the manual parts about e.g. print environments. Before the printer linearization process can begin, the measuring device that is to be used has to be plugged into the correct port of the computer.

Detecting the Measuring Device The measuring device needs to be detected and recognized by the software so it can be used to analyze the printer. To do this, launch menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Application > Spectrophotometer. 1

After having selected the spectrophotometer in use in the Type field, you can detect it by using the Detect button and thus make it available for use in the software. 2

As soon as the measuring device has been correctly detected, you can leave the dialog again using the OK button. 3

Printer Linearization

2

Starting the Linearization Dialog

In the main program, open menu Tools > Linearization & Profile Tools > Density Linearization or click the Density Linearization button under the Linearization & Profile Tools button in the Print Environment toolbar.

Analyzing the Printer The printer analysis is done by printing and then measuring color charts that were especially generated for that purpose. 1 2 3 4 5

Initial Values / Reset Geometry 1

No. of patches per channel Print

3

2 4

Measuring the linearization chart 5

Printer Linearization

3

Setting Initial Values The Initial Values section allows you to guess an expected behavior of the printer. Such estimates optimize the results of the first measurement. When initial values are already set, e.g. by selecting a default density linearization in the print environment, the button label changes into Reset. 1

The Initial Values / Reset button offers three estimates. Choose the one that fits your printer best: Choose no adjustment when you do not want to estimate the printer’s behavior. When printing with 540dpi or less, the estimate standard adjustment for low resolution is recommended, for 720dpi or more, the estimate standard adjustment for high resolution would be the best choice.

Defining a Density Chart The Geometry dropdown menu (Printing segment) lets you set which Geometry (type of chart) should be used. While the Universal and ScanMix geometries can be used for several measuring devices, the other geometries are device specific constructs that can be recognized by the respective devices name. 2

The dropdown menu No. of patches per channel lets you set the number of measurement patches per color channel. You can select a value from the list or enter any value manually. When using only one dilution per color (e.g. cyan, magenta, yellow, black, etc.) we recommend printing about 30 patches. When using 2 dilutions for minimum one ink color (e.g. cyan, light cyan, magenta, light magenta, yellow, black, etc.) we recommend printing about 40 patches. When using more than 2 dilutions for minimum one ink color (e.g. cyan, magenta, yellow, black, light black, light black 2, etc.), 60 patches should be printed and measured. 3

Printing the Density Chart When having made these settings, print the density chart using the Print button. To be able to clearly identify the printed stripes, a codeword is used. This codeword is printed along with the density stripes and saved in the density file. 4

Printer Linearization

4

Measuring the Linearization Chart After having printed the density chart, click the Measure button in the Prepare Linearization dialog to open the Manage Measurements dialog. 5

In this dialog, select the chart and again click the Measure button. Now, measure the linearization chart. The upper segment Next Measurement displays the next row that is to be measured. Make sure you always measure the row that is displayed. The lower segment Measurement Values shows the progress of the measurement. After having measured the density chart click the OK button to return to the Manage Measurements dialog. We strongly recommend starting a second measurement in this dialog.

To receive a good measurement it is recommended to measure every density chart at least twice. When having finished all measurements click the OK button in the Manage Measurements dialog to calculate the average of all measurements and return to the density linearization wizard.

Completing the First Analysis Now, the first impression of the printer’s behavior has been established. The linearization needs to be saved now. Click the Next button through the linearization wizard until you reach the Save dialog. At this point you should not make changes in the Measurement results or the Target Density dialog settings.

Printer Linearization

5

To save the linearization, fill in all fields in the Save dialog and complete the wizard by clicking the Finish button. The linearization will automatically be saved into the current print environment.

Conducting the Second Analysis Start the linearization dialog again. Repeat the steps 2-5 (printing and measuring of the density stripes). Setting the Initial Values again is not necessary since the estimated initial values have now been replaced by actual values from the first measurement. After having measured the density stripes twice, complete the measuring dialog and click the Next and then the Back button to get to the dialog window Measurement results of calibration chart.

Analyzing Measurement Values In the Measurement results of calibration chart dialog, you can analyze the measured values. The analysis of the printer’s behavior is completed with this step. The dialog provides the following information: In the left, graphic display the measurement values are displayed in a curve. By using the dropdown menu Channel, you can select the color you wish to look at. On the right side, the measurement values are listed as density values.

For further information on the details in this dialog please refer to the second part of this manual.

Printer Linearization

6

Setting the Desired Print Behavior The following steps are needed to define what behavior you want to achieve with this printer. Based on these presets, the tool will calculate the necessary corrections.

Optimizing the Specific Ink Application The segment Use output limitation offers the possibility to optimize the ink application for each color specifically by limiting the output of that color. Such a limitation is recommended if despite increasing use of printed pixels, no additional density is achieved. To set an output limitation you may select the corresponding value in the measurement values table and click the Limit at selected patch button. 1

To set the output limitation at any value, check Use Output Limitation and enter the desired value into the current Limitation field. 2

After having set 4 a limit, a red line representing the limit will appear in the graphic display. This red line can also be moved manually. 3

4

3 1

2

The Auto Limit button will automatically set appropriate limits all color channels.

Printer Linearization

7

Setting the Dot Gain Clicking the Next button after defining the end value limitation will proceed to the Target Density Settings dialog allowing to further define the expected respectively the desired behavior of the printer. In general the use of the default settings is recommended. Value 20 is used by default for the dot gain for the following reasons: 1.

This value corresponds best to the standards from offset printing and is therefore suitable to print CMYK data without profile.

2.

It reflects the dynamic of the digital print behavior for the profiling optimally.

Further information on target densities can be found in the second part of the documentation.

Completing the Printer Linearization After having defined the desired behavior of the printer, save the created density linearization and complete the dialog. The density linearization will now be embedded in the print environment currently in use, or in case of working with external data, saved as a single file.

Printer Linearization

8

Printer Linearization

9

Basics about Linearization Benefits of a Printer Linearization Through the density calibration the program ensures that the amount of applied inks per color increases evenly from 0% to 100%. The Printer Linearization contains details about the amount of ink that should be printed. Due to mechanical components such as e.g. the size of the ink dots, the actual area coverage of the ink does not correspond to the desired coverage. This means that without correction it seems optically as if too much ink is applied especially in middle to dark tones: The image becomes dark and lacks textures in dark areas; in extreme cases the inks start to bleed in dark spots. The density linearization contains a correction value that adjusts the actual amount of ink for a preset coverage in a way so it corresponds to the desired visual coverage. Middle values are detected using the measured data. If no density calibration is conducted, the color gradient created by the software is output in a random, uncontrollable fashion.

Without Density Linearization: The user has no control on how the printer outputs Preset the data sent to it. When using a density linearization, the printer specific behavior can be analyzed by printing and measuring a test chart, then the expected behavior of the density curve can be set using a so called Target 45% color value Density.

1.25 optical density

With Density Linearization: The values output by the printer correspond to the Preset optical density of the desired color value.

45% color value 1.25 optical density

Printer Linearization

Printed Value

?

?

? ?

1.25 optical density ?? pixel value

Printed Value

1.25 optical density 35% pixel value

10

Duties of the Printer Linearization Analyzing the Printer Behavior under a given Combination of Printer, Inks and Medium This typically non-linear behavior is analyzed by printing and measuring a linearization chart respectively the single measuring patches. A measurement can be displayed in two measures: In “optical density” or “area coverage. The optical density provides information about how much of the light touching the surface is absorbed by the printed color. Different areas of the spectrum are taken into account for Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black, which are defined in the norm DIN 16536. For additional colors, special areas calculated by ErgoSoft are taken into account. The optical density can be calculated directly from the spectrum measured by a spectrophotometer. Area coverage (sometimes also called relative dot size) is an artificial value that is calculated from the measured optical density (formula by Murray Davis). It corresponds to the relative portion of a surface area that, if printed on homogeneously with a full tone color, leads to the same optical density: e.g. a patch would have area coverage of exact 90% when it has the same optical density as one that is printed with 90% of full tone color and 10% are left unprinted. The goal of this analysis (meaning the printing and measuring of the density linearization chart) is to document at which number of printed pixels a certain print density is achieved. E.g. how many dots have to be printed so that 50% of the possible optical density is reached, etc. For this purpose a chart is printed, measured and analyzed in the first analysis. In the second analysis, the software adjusts the number of pixels to be printed based on the information gathered in the first measurement. The analysis is repeated until the control points are spread reasonably across the gradient and the printer’s behavior is captured as good as technically possible. The analysis is conducted the best way possible, measuring-wise, when each segment of the gradient is taken into account.

Specification of the Desired Target Behavior The specification of the desired target behavior is based on the goals described before as well as the notes on dot gain based on the standards in offset printing.

Printer Linearization

11

The Density Linearization Dialog First Analysis Initial Values The Initial Values serve the purpose of being able to preset an already known basic behavior for the printer. The use of initial values reduces the effort of a density linearization. This value can be selected before printing respectively measuring the first density chart. A later change of this value deletes all previous measurements. This is why as soon as a measurement has been conducted, this button is named Reset. 1

1

2

Printing the Calibration Chart To be able to print a calibration chart, the following parameters have to be set: Geometry and number of patches per channel. The geometry describes the size of the measurement patches as well as the distance between the patches, etc. It also makes sure that the measuring device can read the chart correctly. The number of patches per channel sets how many patches are printed/measured per color channel. 2

The number of measuring patches is not limited to the numbers displayed in the list but can be set freely. The option Print multiple calibration charts across job width allows you to print several identical print charts next to each other. In addition to this, there is another option Print additional charts rotated 90 degrees across job width available. These options can be helpful with unreliable printers which give varying results across the job width.

Printer Linearization

12

Each printed calibration chart automatically receives a name (e.g. KUNOK), which is displayed on the printed chart as well as in the dialog. This is useful so as not to confuse the charts. If you want to enter the measurement values manually, click the Enter measurement results manually checkbox and then click the Next button to get to the measuring dialog in which you will be able to enter the values manually. 3

3

Measuring the Calibration Chart The Manage Measurements dialog allows you to save measurements and to continue them at a later time. Click the Save button to save a measurement. The program will automatically propose the Chart-ID as a filename. We recommend using that one and maybe amend to it if necessary. This dialog also allows checking and modifying the selected (marked) measurement as well as comparing all selected measurements.

Completing the First Analysis After closing the measuring dialog, the first analysis can be considered completed. Click through the dialogs until you reach the Finish button and save your density linearization. Afterwards open the density linearization dialog again.

Printer Linearization

13

Conducting the Second Analysis As soon as measurement values are present, the initial values option is not available anymore. The set initial values have now been replaced by the values from the first measurement. The values measured in the first analysis will be used to optimize the next measurement. This allows the measuring points to be spread across the measuring curve optimally and the printer’s behavior is acquired ideally. In contrary to the first measurement, where the allocation of measuring patches is based on assumptions, the second analysis can be based on actual measurement values. By clicking the Reset button, the measured data will be deleted and replaced by initial values again. The geometry should also be maintained for the second measurement, respectively be suitable for the device that is used. For the second analysis, the number of measuring patches should be doubled. Although one has to keep in mind that the number of patches might be increased so far that a line break within a channel becomes necessary while the printer might show different behavior for different lines. Troubleshooting suggestions for these kinds of problems can be found in chapter “Additional Notes”.

Printer Linearization

14

Checking the Measuring Curve The dialog Measurement results of calibration chart lets you check up on the measured curve. In general, a measurement is successful if the measurement points are allocated across the curve in about the same vertical distance to each other. When using light inks or different dot sizes, it is also important to exactly acquire breaks in the curve. 4

3 2

1 4 4 5

The line seen in above image represents a good analysis. The measuring points are well spread and the breaks respectively transition points of ink type or dot size are well documented. 1

In the list to the right side the measured points are displayed numerically. For every measurement it shows the measured patch, the measured density as well as the dot size that was used. 2

The dropdown menu Channel allows you to choose the color channel you want to look at. By using the checkbox Change measurement values manually you can also move the points around manually. Usually we do not recommend this; as such an action normally reduces the accuracy of the measurement. 3

Should the curve obvious deviation from the expected curve (see img. 4), the button Auto correction will be displayed. If you push that button, all measurement values that do not fit into the expected picture will be deleted and remaining points will be reconnected. It is not mandatory to push the Auto correction button, as it simply illustrates the correction that is done anyway when the linearization is saved. 4

5

Using the Export measurement values button, the measurement values can be exported into a .txt file.

Printer Linearization

15

Limit Specific Ink Application From the list of measurement values, choose the field you wish to limit your ink application at, using either the patch number or the achieved density as a guideline and click the Limit at selected patch button. 1

To use a patch-independent density or dot size value for the limit, you can enter it into the respective field. If you do not have a limitation already active, you can make those limitation fields available by clicking the Use Output Limitation checkbox. The limitation can also be activated or deactivated anytime by using this button.

3 1

2

2

The limitation serves the following purpose: Prevention of problems through unnecessary application of Ink Economize ink (Financial Motivation) Equalization of a group of printers to one and the same, absolute level. Creation of a “Reserve” to keep an (unstable or aging) printer on constant absolute level.

3

It is also possible to move the limitation line directly in the graphic display. However, a limitation must already be active in order to be able to do this.

Printer Linearization

16

Setting the Dot Gain The second part of the desired printer’s behavior can be defined in the Target Density Settings window, the dot gain. In general, we recommend using the default settings for most applications in digital printing. To define the desired dot gain, you have control modes at your disposal: Dot Gain Control Mode In the Dot gain control mode, you have the ruler at the bottom available to make changes. By moving this ruler to the left or to the right you can decrease or increase the dot gain which is applied to that curve. Using the make all equal box, you can apply the changes you make to all channels or simply choose which channel you would like to edit through the dropdown menu Channel.

Advanced Control Mode The advanced control mode allows you to influence the dot gain using the ruler at the right side by dragging it up or down. Furthermore, it enables the user to move specific points and/or add new points by simply dragging an existing point or clicking into an empty part of the curve. This allows you to achieve an arbitrary and exotic behavior of the printer as e.g. simulating the result of Flexoprint or gravure printing. If you switch back to Dot gain mode after editing the Advanced settings, all changes will be lost.

Printer Linearization

17

Importing/Exporting a Target Density The Import/Export target density feature allows the user to import the target density of another density linearization. This makes it possible to force the same print behavior onto different printers.

Saving Density Linearizations Not until this step the actual calibration is created by connecting the measurement values with the target density curve. This means it is possible to partially change an already existing density calibration and then save it afterwards. It is possible, and also makes sense in some cases to e.g. only change the target density curve without conducting a new measurement. The measurement values and the target density curve are independent from each other! When saving (not before) the program will calculate a new calibration from the new target density curve and the old measurement values. Notes about the density linearization wizard Basics: It is possible to browse back and forth in the wizard and therefore skip single pages; e.g. it is possible to jump to the last page and save everything there. The following day, one can simply resume work by continuing to edit this density linearization instead of creating a new one and restarting. Technical background: The density linearization creates a table assigning a pixel value to every color value (8bit value). For that purpose, a value for the optical density is determined through the density curve that corresponds to that respective color value. Afterwards, a matching pixel value is determined in the measurement curve. Respectively, in the target density curve a spline interpolation is done, meaning that with a “nice, round“ curve you will need less supporting points. With measurement values the interpolation is usually done linear, since that usually achieves a far more reliable method with the sometimes rather erratic measurement points.

Printer Linearization

18

Resolve Problems Dialog for the Calibration Chart Estimating the Printer’s Dot Gain The dialog segment Problems due to excessive color in halftone areas is only available when no measurement has been conducted yet. Using the ruler, the estimated dot gain respectively the estimated overlap of the printed dots can be set. Basically, specific starting values can be defined here. But in most cases it is recommended to use the settings available in the Initial Values dialog.

Problems with Ink Bleeding or Flaking In the second part of the dialog, a linearization chart itself can be limited, if e.g. the last 10 of 40 printed patches bleed and thus cannot be measured. In this case it is possible to use this dialog to limit the printout/chart to 29 patches, with patch 29 being the maximal value, thus making it possible for the chart to be measured.

The actual end value limitation should not be made here, but rather with the measurement values respectively target density, since in this dialog the linearization is cut down rather than just limited.

Printer Linearization

19

Additional Notes Notes on Solving Measurement Problems with Varying Print Quality Many printers show the phenomenon of varying print quality. Such as if e.g. the color application is different from one pass to the next due to banding. Such problems are often overlooked while printing due to the total view of the image or distance from where the print is seen. When analyzing the printer’s behavior, such circumstances can lead to corruption of the analysis, e.g. if two rows of one color are needed for the analysis, it is possible that the printer loses some color application in the second line, thus creating breaks in the density curve. For these cases, the ErgoSoft RIP offers different options to bypass this problem:

Measuring Charts Several Times Measuring a chart at least twice is part of the basics of a good analysis. With the situation described above in combination with the use of only one chart the results would be barely useable, if at all. This is why we recommend measuring the chart multiple times and to try to measure a different area of the patches every time, this will give you a better average value.

Rotating Measuring Charts and Printing them out Several Times When printing the charts, the options Print multiple calibration charts across job width and Print additional charts rotated by 90 degrees across job width are available. These options allow you to select the best chart and measure that one. Furthermore, it enables you to measure several charts from the same printout and therefore get an average of the printer’s behavior across the entire job. Since e.g. the charts rotated by 90 degrees will show a different banding it can greatly improve the analysis.

Print only one Line per Channel One possibility to achieve this would be to reduce the amount of patches per channel until they fit onto one line. However this will vastly reduce the accuracy of the analysis. Printing enough measurement patches into one row is only possible when using an X-Rite DTP 41 or the Universal geometry. This geometry is only readable by the measuring devices Spectroscan and Eye-One (without ruler). When using the Eye-One without a ruler, it is recommended to tape up the edges of the optical aperture (e.g. with hole stabilizer tape) so as to not damage the printout with its rough surface.

Printer Linearization

20

Notes on Dot Gain on the Basis of Standards in Offset Printing We remember that the ideal curve was always defined as a linear curve 100% (Img. 1). If we do now take a look at the ideal curve that is set as target curve by default, we will notice that it is not linear but actually slightly bellied, similar to the actual measured curve and not linear as the original ideal curve. This can be tracked back to the definition of color pro0% file standards in four color printing. To understand the problems that this standard for digital printing Img. 1 brings, one has to understand the dot gain problem in offset printing Linear run and how to solve it. Here is some information on that matter: When dots are printed larger than expected, the colors (or gray tones) automatically become darker than expected. Such a change of size can happen when copying the screens to the printing plate, or while printing through bleeding on more or less absorbent paper. When a dot is printed onto the paper or exposed onto film, the point expands a bit depending on the quality of the paper and the screen laser. This makes the point bigger, causing the Img. 2 color tone to appear darker as a whole. As an example, on coated fine Ideal curve regarding art paper, the dot gain is about 9 %, on newsprint it is at about 38 % dot gain (using color). Following the previous description, we can say that the printouts often suffer of a compression of the dots/colors, especially in the middle parts of the curve. This means that instead of e.g. 50 % magenta, the printer created 70 % optical coverage while using 50% of available magenta dots, which of course falsified the printout. Since the dot gain usually stays constant when using the same media type (such as e.g. 38 % on newsprint), a solution was conceived on which the problems for digital print are based. It was decided to prevent the dot gain by adapting the image to the falsification that happens in print by adjusting a value of e.g. 50% (which would result in 70% when printed) down to 30% (which is then printed as the expected 50%). Even in programs such as Adobe Photoshop, profiles were defined so they had the above mentioned 50% magenta set as 30% etc. Since people wanted to be able to also print CMYK files that were prepared for use with an offset printing machine, inkjet printers had to display similar characteristics as offset printers. In the easiest cases, this could be done by calibrating the inkjet printer to the same dot gain as an offset printer. However, for better output color accuracy we strongly suggest to create a special profile and to apply the correct input profile to the files created for the offset printer.

Printer Linearization

21

Using Non-Supported Measuring Devices In case you wish to use a measuring device that is not supported by the ErgoSoft RIP, you have the following possibilities to use the device nonetheless:

Importing ASCII-File When measuring calibration charts in other programs which allow you to save the measured data into a (text) file, you are able to import these files into the ErgoSoft RIP: In menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Application > Spectrophotometer select the spectrophotometer type “From File”. Format of the ASCII-File The ASCII-File has to be set up as follows (spectral format): The first line contains comments; it is not processed by the ErgoSoft RIP All following lines start with “Spec_400_10_700“, followed by the spectral values of 400 until 700 (incl.) in percent and including 2 decimals after the comma, with a step size of 10 (31 values). The data has to be separated by spaces or tab-stops; empty lines will be ignored. The patches have to be listed in the order that the ErgoSoft RIP expects them: color by color beginning with field A1. Example: Density values Spec_400_10_700 22.04 27.58 29.44 28.59 27.29 25.29 24.26 29.33 44.71 62.95 74.24 78.47 79.60 80.22 80.89 81.27 81.63 81.88 82.55 83.27 83.72 83.83 84.23 84.91 85.98 86.86 87.24 87.37 87.29 87.04 87.43 Please note that the line with the spectral values in the example is broken, but does actually represent one single line. If your measuring device cannot measure spectral values but only density values, you can also use another format (densitometer format). But keep in mind that this type of values cannot be used as a basis for printer profiles in the profiling module ColorGPS. The first line contains values. It is not processed by the ErgoSoft RIP. All the following lines begin with the letter “D“, followed by the density value, which is separated from “D“ through a space or tab-stop. The patches have to be listed in the order in which they are expected from the ErgoSoft RIP: Column-wise from the upper left to the lower right. Only the density values of one color are used. Example: Density Values D 0.000 D 0.070 D 0.279 D 0.488 D 0.662 D 0.800 Printer Linearization

22

D 0.995 D 1.441 D 1.593

Entering measurement results manually Mark the Enter measurement results manually field in the density configuration window (Prepare Linearization) and click Next. Select channel Select the channel for which you would like to enter the measured values. Entering values Enter the measured values into the field below the Density column. Add the entered value to the list by selecting just another entry. In the list, the value for which the next entry is expected is highlighted. You can also move this mark by clicking on the desired value/line with your mouse. Please keep in mind that densitometric values are expected when entering values

Printer Linearization

23

Application Notes Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

i

Contents Basics on ColorGPS ...................................................................................................................................................1 Using ColorGPS ..........................................................................................................................................................2 Starting the ColorGPS Wizard .........................................................................................................................2 The ColorGPS Wizard .........................................................................................................................................2 Basic Settings ........................................................................................................................................................2 Choosing the Print Environment ..............................................................................................................2 Creating the Profile .............................................................................................................................................3 Color Settings ..................................................................................................................................................3 Total Ink Limit ...........................................................................................................................3 Black Generation .......................................................................................................................3 Calibration Chart Presets ............................................................................................................................3 Calibration Chart ............................................................................................................................................4 Printing the Calibration Chart ...................................................................................................4 Measuring the Calibration Chart...............................................................................................4 Calculating the Profile ..................................................................................................................................6 Optional Settings .......................................................................................................................................................8 Overview of the Options ...................................................................................................................................8 Using the Options................................................................................................................................................8 Calibration Chart ............................................................................................................................................8 ICC Neutral Black ...........................................................................................................................................9 ICC Profile Accuracy ................................................................................................................................... 10 ICC Profile Contrast .................................................................................................................................... 10 ICC Profile Gamut Mapping .................................................................................................................... 11 Priorities ................................................................................................................................. 11 Color Purity ............................................................................................................................ 11 RGB Special ............................................................................................................................ 11 Color Gradients ...................................................................................................................... 12 ColorBoost Option ................................................................................................................................................. 12 Choosing the Correct GCR .................................................................................................................................. 13 No Black (GRC0) ................................................................................................................................................ 13 Black only in Shadows (GCR1) ..................................................................................................................... 13 Black in Dark Tones (GCR2)........................................................................................................................... 13 Black from middle Tones (GCR3) ................................................................................................................ 14 Black also in Light Tones (GCR4)................................................................................................................. 14 User defined Black (GCR+) ............................................................................................................................ 14

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

ii

Basics on ColorGPS ColorGPS creates a color profile conform to the ICC standards, which characterizes the maximum gamut of the printer. The technical term for a printer’s color space is gamut. By using an output profile created with ColorGPS you can make sure that all input files, regardless of input color space are rendered color-accurately. More information on color management can be found in the manual part “Color Management” or in current technical literature. The “International Color Consortium” (ICC) is a group of manufacturers that have joined under the lead of Fogra to define the ICC format. This format contains cross-platform specifications after which third party developers can create profiling tools and applications to support the ICC standard. Among the founding members of this consortium are companies such as: Adobe Systems Inc., Afga-Gevaert N.V., Apple Computer Inc., Eastman Kodak Company, FOGRA (Honor Member), Microsoft Corporation, Silicon Graphics Inc., Sun Microsystems Inc. and Taligent Inc. These companies have committed themselves to fully support the ICC specifications in their operating systems and applications.

ColorGPS is an “IN-RIP” solution which can only be used as part of an ErgoSoft RIP. Such an “IN-RIP” solution has the advantage that the profiler has direct access to data such as e.g. the density linearization. Furthermore, data such as the calibration grid do not need to be exported and imported, but can be processed directly within the program. To create an output profile for a printer, the print environment must already contain a density linearization. The density linearization is the basis for the output profile. ColorGPS even offers the possibility to create output profiles using only the density linearization.

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

1

Using ColorGPS Starting the ColorGPS Wizard To start the wizard, click the ColorGPS icon under the Linearization & Profile Tools list in the Print Environment toolbar or select menu Tools > Linearization & Profile Tools > ColorGPS.

The ColorGPS Wizard The ColorGPS Wizard is made up of two parts. 1. Basic settings Choosing the print environment 2. Creating the profile Color application Calibration chart Creating the profile

Basic Settings Choosing the Print Environment The first dialog window allows you to choose the print environment that will be edited. The print environment currently active in the JobComposer is always selected by default. Choose the print environment that should be edited in the Print Environment list. 1

1

Depending on the selected print environment, the Density Linearization section will display the density linearization used in that print environment. 2

The Used Colors section displays 3 the colors that are used in the selected print environment. Light inks are not shown as independent colors.

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

2

3

2

Creating the Profile Color Settings The Color settings section allows you to set a maximum amount of ink that should be used as well as how black inks (K) should be handled. 1

Total Ink Limit

1

2

The total ink limit for the profile is based on the total ink limit for CMYK files without input profile, which is de3 fined in the print environment and adapted from there. But there is also a possibility to use different values. 5 Using the Apply Ink Limit on Top of Printer Profile option available in the print environment, the ink limit for the profile can be overwritten with the one from the print environment. Using a lower ink limit than the one the profile was created with can cause color inaccuracies. Hence this option should only be used in emergencies. Black Generation Using the dropdown menu Black Generation, the desired black generation can be selected. ColorGPS will recommend the most suitable black generation mode based on the set ink colors. You can find a more in-depth description of the different GCRs in the “Choosing the Correct GCR” section of this manual.

Calibration Chart Presets In the dropdown menu Precision of the calibration chart, you can define how precisely the printed chart should describe the gamut of the printer. A higher precision leads to a higher amount of patches to be measured, but leads to better results. 2

Click the Calculate calibration chart button to create the calibration chart. The Size of calibration chart section allows you to change the number of patches on the calculated calibration chart. This can be helpful if e.g. you need an exact amount of patches. An identical amount of patches combined with high precision of the calibration chart results in more accuracy on the gray axis while the combination with lower precision of the calibration chart results in more accuracy at the edges of the gamut.

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

3

Calibration Chart 3

Section Calibration chart allows printing and measuring the calibration chart as well as checking the measurements.

Printing the Calibration Chart The generated calibration chart can now be printed using the Print button. Measuring the Calibration Chart Before starting to measure by using the Measure button, make sure that the Chart ID displayed in the dialog matches the one printed on the chart. Now start the measuring dialog using the Measure button. The Manage Measurements dialog gives you an overview over the chart pages to be measured for the current calibration. The Measured column shows how often a page has already been measured.

3

4

To measure a page, select it and start the measurement with the Measure button. 4

4

The upper part of the dialog shows which row should be measured next. Make sure that you always measure the line that is specified. The lower part of the dialog displays the progress of the measurement. As soon as all lines of the current chart page have been measured, you can close the measuring dialog using the OK button.

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

4

The Manage Measurements dialog lets you select the next page to be measured and repeat the previously described steps. We strongly recommend measuring each page several times. The Manage Measurements dialog allows you to save measurements and to continue them at a later time. To save a measurement, click the Save button. The program will automatically propose the Chart-ID as a filename. We recommend using that one and maybe amend to it if necessary. Furthermore we recommend to also save the ColorGPS File (*.cpd file) should the measuring process or the creation of the profile be interrupted. To complete the measurement at any other time, you can load this measurement by clicking the Load button. Please note that measurement that has not been saved is lost after leaving the Manage Measurements dialog. This also applies for complete measurements that are further processed after the dialog is closed. Also, you can select the measured data in the lower left window to automatically display the measurements. It is also possible to select several measurements to compare them. When having selected one measurement, the expected and the actually measured values are displayed; otherwise, only the measured values are displayed. You can access specific values by clicking on the respective patches. Then, the value may be deleted or re-measured. Once the measurement is completed, you can leave the Manage Measurements dialog by clicking the OK button to calculate the average of all measurements and to get back to the ColorGPS wizard. In the ColorGPS dialog, you can always access all measurements using the Show Measurements button.

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

5

Calculating the Profile After having measured the calibration chart and closed the Measure Color Chart dialog , click the Generate profile button to create the ICC profile. By default, the ICC profile is automatically embedded into the current print environment. If the print environment is configured to use an external printer profile (or when the ICC profile is re-created using saved ColorGPS data *.cpd and the original print environment does no longer exist) you are prompted to specify a name and save the ICC profile. 5

Please note that this will save the generated profile but not the settings and measurements used to create the profile. To save the settings (presets, calibration chart, measuring values, etc.) select menu File > Save. This will save all settings in a *.cpd file. After having created the profile, close ColorGPS by clicking the Finish or the Cancel button. You will be prompted to save the ColorGPS data in a *.cpd file when not having saved them already.

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

6

Optional Settings

COLORGPS

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

7

Optional Settings ColorGPS has several options available that allow the professional to make settings for gamut mapping and color mixing. These do however require technical knowledge to be used efficiently and precisely.

Overview of the Options The ColorGPS menu bar allows selecting the following options. Depending on your license, some options might not be available to you. Calibration Chart ICC Neutral Black ICC Profile Accuracy ICC Profile Contrast ICC Profile Gamut Mapping ICC Color Intensity (Color Boost)

Using the Options Calibration Chart The Calibration Chart Print Options allows you to make settings that affect the look and output of the calibration chart. The Geometry selection menu allows you can change the geometry that should be used (placement, size of the patches). ColorGPS will suggest a fitting geometry based on the measuring device selected in the ErgoSoft RIP. 1

The number of patches to be printed per row can be set by using the No. of patches per row option. Keep an eye out for the maximum amount of patches readable per Row, which varies depending on what measuring device you use. 2

1 2 3 5

4 6

7

By default, during chart creating very similar or even equal patches are omitted in order to reduce the number of patches to measure. In addition, the number of patches can be reduced by reducing the quality of the calibration chart. When the option Use fixed chart layout is checked, very similar and equal patches are not omitted and the quality of the calibration chart is unchangeably set to 100%. This might dramatically increase the number of patches to be printed and measured. On the other hand it avoids that the quality of the cali3

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

8

bration chart is set to a too low value, especially when ColorGPS automatically creates small charts because of the number of inks used. When using the Edit job before printing option, a generated chart can be edited in the ErgoSoft RIP just like every other. This option should only be used in special cases, since the program will not automatically select the correct print environment; you will have to make sure the right one is selected yourself. Otherwise errors will occur during calibration. 4

Option Print multiple calibration charts across job width duplicates the calibration chart across the entire printing width, whereas every second chart is rotated by 180°. This comes in handy at times since there are several charts available for ongoing processes (such as sublimation) or if a chart is damaged by e.g. printing errors, so you do not have to repeat the entire step. 5

6

If the option Print additional charts rotated 90° across job width is activated, a second row of calibration charts will be printed that is rotated by 90° respectively by

270°. Instead of printing a long but small job with the calibration chart, option Use multiple columns to print chart to save media divides the long chart into several parts printed next to each other in order to use the whole job width and thus, save media. 7

ICC Neutral Black The option ICC Neutral Black allows selecting the method how neutral black is mixed: Blackest Black mixes the black using as much colored ink as possible resulting sometimes in a color shift in the darkest black. Darkest Neutral mixes the black regarding to the neutrality of the black. This may result in a dark black that is not as brilliant as the one mixed with Blackest Black but might avoid the color shift in the darkest black.

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

9

ICC Profile Accuracy The option ICC Profile Accuracy provides the possibility to set the number of calculated grid points and the accuracy of the profile. A higher amount of grid points leads to a more precise profile, but will also require more time to calculate. Also it will make the file become larger. max. gamut - precision

1

+ precision

3

2

To further describe how the number of printed patches affects the profile, the images 1 + 2 show heavily simplified graphics of the maximum LAB gamut (outer blue line) and the device specific CMYK gamut (inner line). In image 1, less grid points are selected than in image 2. Hence the gamut in image 2 is described more accurately than the one in image 1 and can therefore be used more efficiently (see image 3).

ICC Profile Contrast The ICC-Profile Contrast option allows you to set in what areas the profile should allow textures, respectively should have high contrast. You can increase or decrease the contrast in terms of saturation. This results in more or less texture in light and dark tones (respectively in saturated or unsaturated colors). For perceptual rendering intent and Saturation, the brightness contrast gets adapted to the maximum black automatically, so the neutral setting of 100% delivers the best results. Changes to the standard settings can lead to unexpected results. There are no contrast settings for the colorimetric rendering intents, since they would lose the color correctness. Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

10

When decreasing the contrast, the apparent gamut gets bigger, meaning that colors on the outer edges of the Gamut also get textures.

ICC Profile Gamut Mapping In this dialog you can set the parameters for the gamut mapping, meaning that you can set how the colors that are out of gamut should be calculated. But to “apparently“ enlarge the gamut (“apparently“ moving the gamut’s edge out further) you should set a lower contrast in the ICC Profile Contrast option. To “apparently” increase the gamut in this case means to give the RIP a recipe that it should apply to imitate colors that are out of gamut. The following four parameters are available: Priorities The Priorities tab lets you set the derivations that should be tolerated, so you can define in which part of a color recipe the RIP should accommodate to the out of gamut color. You can set in which area of the gamut you want to accept changes or not by using values from 0 100. Entering e.g. 0 into the Higher luminance (+L) field means that deviations in this area are tolerated, the out of gamut color will be replaced with a color recipe that does not have the same L value. On the other hand, when entering the value 100, the program will make sure that the replacing color mixture has the same L value. Color Purity The Color Purity tab lets you define how the colors that are far off the gamut should be cleaned up. In this case, cleaning colors means that if e.g. you print a saturated cyan that is out of gamut and can only be printed as a combination of cyan and magenta, the cyan value will be corrected far upwards while the magenta values will be corrected downwards. RGB Special In the RGB-Special tab you can set a special handling for certain colors to prevent them from drifting off too far. Namely this concerns shifts from blue to violet, red to orange and green to yellow, which can be prevented or allowed in this dialog.

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

11

Color Gradients The Color Gradients tab is used to prevent so called “Graying” in gradients from dark saturated colors to black. As a bonus, other color gradients are automatically smoothed as well. However, with a low total ink limit (below 300%), setting a high value can also result in the contrary than what you hope to achieve.

ColorBoost Option The Color Intensity (Color Boost) option allows increasing or lowering the intensity of the measured values without having to print a calibration chart with this changed color intensity. For example, this could be used to compensate for measuring a transparent medium with a spectrophotometer that can only perform reflectance measurement and thus, returns measurement values that are not bright enough. Drag the slider to the right (higher value) to increase the color saturation. After having changed this value, you do not have to reprint and re-measure the calibration; you just have to recalculate the profile. Since the color intensity value is only saved in the profile data we strongly recommend to mention the value in the profile description so that you will be able to easily recognize these special profiles some time later. Please note that in most cases this feature will adversely affect the color accuracy.

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

12

Choosing the Correct GCR The following GCRs are available to create an ICC grid.

This GCR uses no black inks, meaning that all gray tones on the axis from black to white are mixed from CMY.

100%

100% 75% 50% 25%

75% used ink

No Black (GRC0)

50%

25%

black value 0-100%

Using GCR1, the black and gray tones in light areas are printed with only CMY. Black ink is only used starting at 50% of the black value.

100%

100% 75% 50% 25%

75% used ink

Black only in Shadows (GCR1)

50%

25%

black value 0-100%

GCR 2 is similar to GCR1, whereas black (K) can be used sooner, which leads to less CMYK being applied.

100%

100% 75% 50% 25%

75% used ink

Black in Dark Tones (GCR2)

50%

25%

black value 0-100%

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

13

The middle GCR is a more extreme variant of GCR1 + 2. With this GCR, black inks can already be used in middle tones.

100%

100% 75% 50% 25%

75% used ink

Black from middle Tones (GCR3)

50%

25%

black value 0-100%

GCR4 allows to print with maximal linear rising black from the beginning. At the end of the curve CMY is used to create a deep black.

100%

100% 75% 50% 25%

75% used ink

Black also in Light Tones (GCR4)

50%

25%

black value 0-100%

User defined Black (GCR+) GCR+ provides the possibility to define a custom black buildup, respectively setting up on your own how the black ink should be used. Using the slider that can be moved between the values 0 and 100 the user can set from which brightness value between paper white (0) and maximum black (100) the black ink should be used.

Creating Printer Profiles with ColorGPS

14

Application Notes ErgoSoft Total Ink Limit & Bleed Chart

ErgoSoft Total Ink  Limit & Bleed Chart 

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2011 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

ErgoSoft Total Ink Limit & Bleed Chart

i

Contents  Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1  Loading the Chart ......................................................................................................................................................2  Printing the Chart ......................................................................................................................................................3  Examining the Chart .................................................................................................................................................4  Checking Pattern Conditions...........................................................................................................................4  Finding the Total Ink Limit ...............................................................................................................................5 

ErgoSoft Total Ink Limit & Bleed Chart

ii

Introduction  It is necessary to determine the optimal total ink limit percentage for a specific ink, media and printer combination in order to prevent ink bleeding, ink pooling, and bronzing artifacts on printed output. Starting in February 2011, the ErgoSoft RIP comes with a new ErgoSoft Total Ink Limit / Bleed Chart that provides a guide to determine the total ink limit percentage based on evaluating different color combinations ranging from 200% to 400% ink coverage. This document describes how this chart is loaded and printed as well as its examination and possible reactions on the different conditions.

ErgoSoft Total Ink Limit & Bleed Chart

1

Loading the Chart 

The chart is loaded using menu Tools > Linearization & Profile Tools > Test Images or selecting Test Images under the Linearization & Profile Tools button in the Print Environment toolbar. The Chart consists of two A4 files using a multicolor zig-zag pattern with white and goldcolored background, labeled TotalInkLimit_A4White (on the left side in Figure A) and TotalInkLimit_A4Gold (on the right side in Figure A).

Figure A. Total Ink Limit / Bleed Chart in White and Gold Colored Backgrounds

ErgoSoft Total Ink Limit & Bleed Chart

2

Printing the Chart  Print one or both chart files with your desired Print Environment settings. If the chart is used as part of a linearization and profiling process with the intention to find the maximum amount of ink your media can absorb, you have to print the test chart with the maximum ink possible. Therefore, uncheck Apply total ink limit on the Quality tab of your current print environment.

ErgoSoft Total Ink Limit & Bleed Chart

3

Examining the Chart  Checking Pattern Conditions  Read the chart by scanning the Zig-Zag patterns and look for the following conditions shown in the table below: Pattern Conditions

Description

Normal

Pattern without ink limit issues.

Bleeding Type I

Distorted pattern with ink bleeding along fibers or media.

Bleeding Type II

Distorted and blurred pattern. Tips of Zig-Zag pattern are rounded.

Ragged Edges

Pattern edges are jagged.

Ink Pooling

Color inside pattern is not uniform and blotchy in appearance.

Bronzing

Color of pattern has a two-color or oily appearance.

ErgoSoft Total Ink Limit & Bleed Chart

Example Image

4

Finding the Total Ink Limit  1

Starting from 200% find the last line where all Zig-Zag patterns are normal, make note of the number on the edge of the pattern (See Figure B).

Figure B. In Example, 260% is the selected total ink limit percentage

The total ink limit is typically between 240% and 300%. The total ink limit percentage may be higher if the printer has internal ink limits. If the selected total ink limit is less than 230% (red numbers), the limitation in the density linearization should be checked. 2

If the total ink limit is being used for linearization and profiling, check Apply total ink limit on the Quality tab in the Print Environment settings and enter the value you found by examining the Total Ink Limit Chart. 3

ErgoSoft Total Ink Limit & Bleed Chart

5

Application Notes Ink Amount Check

Ink Amount Check

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Ink Amount Check

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Checking for 100% Ink per Dot Size Usage Possibility ................................................................................1 Checking the Quality of the Density Linearization........................................................................................1 Tools for Ink Amount Limitation ..........................................................................................................................2 Dot Size and Light Ink Limitation ..................................................................................................................2 Ink Limitation for Non-Mixed Colors ...........................................................................................................2 Ink Limitation for Mixed Colors ......................................................................................................................2 Solutions for Common Problems ........................................................................................................................3 Printout Shows Strange Pattern .....................................................................................................................3 Ink Assignment Strip is not Good..................................................................................................................3 Density Linearization Chart is Bleeding .......................................................................................................4 Chart for Printer Profile is Bleeding ..............................................................................................................4 Output Uses too Much Ink ...............................................................................................................................5 Finding the Best Settings for Dot Size and Light Ink Limitation ........................................................5

Ink Amount Check

ii

Introduction Before starting with the printer calibration it is wise to check whether all available dot sizes will be printed in good quality when using 100% ink. It might be possible that a certain combination of printer/ink/media does not print good results e.g. for 100% black with medium dots. After having created the density linearization and before creating the printer profile, it is absolutely necessary to check the quality of the density linearization and to find out how much ink your media can absorb. The ErgoSoft RIP offers several tools for checking the quality of the density linearization and for limiting the amount of ink used. Performing the 100% ink per dot size usage possibility check before starting with the printer calibration and the quality of the density linearization check before setting the total ink limit and before creating the printer profile might help in avoiding unnecessary repetitions of printer profile creation.

Checking for 100% Ink per Dot Size Usage Possibility The ErgoSoft RIP provides a simple tool to check whether all dot sizes can be used with 100% ink or whether some has to be limited because of e.g. bleeding. Select menu Tools > Linearization & Profile Tools > Print Ink Assignment to print the available physical inks in all available dot sizes with maximum ink possible (100% ink).

Checking the Quality of the Density Linearization In order to check the quality of your density linearization before starting with printer profile creation you should print a test chart or just some gradients using only pure inks. When the density linearization is not good, e.g. has some gaps, all printouts using this part of the density linearization will show strange effects. You can either use a CMYK density test chart provided as part of the ErgoSoft Profile Testcharts in the Sample Images section of the download area on the ErgoSoft web site or create your own one using all color channels you use for printing.

Ink Amount Check

1

Tools for Ink Amount Limitation Dot Size and Light Ink Limitation When certain combinations of ink dilution and dot size do not print well they can be limited. This is done in the settings of the dithering method in the print environment.

Ink Limitation for Non-Mixed Colors The darkest dilution of an ink can be limited in the density linearization when examining the measurement values.

Ink Limitation for Mixed Colors To check the amount of ink for mixed colors a media can absorb we recommend printing an ink limit test chart provided as part of the ErgoSoft Profile Testcharts in the Sample Images section of the download area on the ErgoSoft web site.

When having found the ink limit you may set it in the print environment as well as in ColorGPS when creating the printer profile.

Ink Amount Check

2

Solutions for Common Problems Printout Shows Strange Pattern The printout can show strange patterns because of the following reasons: 1)

Regular patterns especially in large areas with solid colors often indicate a so called moiré meaning that there are interferences between the image raster (especially for scanned images) and the dithering method for the output. Try another dithering method in the print environment.

2)

Regular patterns that are independent from the selected dithering method often indicate a kind of hardware “problem” with the used combination of printer/resolution/ink/media. Try another setting for the slider in section “Reduce printing artifacts” of the settings for the dithering method in the print environment.

3)

Long vertical stripes in the direction of the media feed often indicate a kind of hardware “problem” of the printer´s media transportation system; the rubber rolls of the media feed system press a bit too hard on the media so that the media shows a kind of “rubber roll´s street”. Try another setting for the slider in section “Reduce printing artifacts” of the settings for the dithering method in the print environment.

4)

A certain color tone (mixed with two dilutions of an ink color or with two dot sizes) might always show strange pattern because the used mixing of ink dilution and/or dot sizes creates interferences or bleeding. Try the “dot size and light ink limitation”.

Ink Assignment Strip is not Good Bleeding patches in the ink assignment strip (used to check for 100% ink per dot size) indicate that the combination of ink dilution and dot size for the bleeding patch is not suitable for the used media. Try the “dot size and light ink limitation”.

Ink Amount Check

3

Density Linearization Chart is Bleeding There are several kinds of bleeding for the density linearization chart: 1) The chart is bleeding somewhere within the patches of a color but not at the end. This indicates that the transition from one dot size to the next bigger one or from one ink dilution to the next darker one causes problems with the current settings. Try the “dot size and light ink limitation”. 2) The chart is bleeding at the end but still can be measured. a) The ink assignment strip (used to check for 100% ink per dot size) shows the same problem: The media cannot absorb 100% of this ink. The output limitation in the density linearization (dialog “Measurement results of chart”) should be used. When you would have to skip a lot of patches in this kind of limitation you can combine it with the limitation described in point 3 by limiting the printout to the second patch bleeding and using the limitation in above mentioned dialog for fine-tuning (after having printed and measured the limited density linearization chart). b) The ink assignment strip does not show this problem: The last patches in the density linearization chart are printed not only with the darkest ink dilution but also with the next lighter one. In the advanced settings of the dithering method (print environment), switch from “Prefer light inks” to “Prefer small dots” or limit all combinations of ink dilution and dot size except for the darkest one. 3) The chart is bleeding (or polling) at the end and cannot be measured at all. a) The ink assignment strip (used to check for 100% ink per dot size) shows the same problem: The media cannot absorb 100% of this ink. The density linearization chart must be limited to the patches that can be measured. In the density linearization dialog “Prepare Linearization” use the “Resolve Problems” button to limit the printout of the density linearization chart to the last patch that can be measured. Before measuring, you have to print the density linearization chart again. b) The ink assignment strip does not show this problem: See the explanation for point 2b.

Chart for Printer Profile is Bleeding When the chart for the printer profile you intend to create in ColorGPS is bleeding you have to use a smaller value for the “Total ink limit” in ColorGPS.

Ink Amount Check

4

Output Uses too Much Ink 1) Printing CMYK images without input profile The ink limitation in the printer profile is not used but the “Total ink limit” set in the print environment which should be reduced. 2) Printing images with input profile and using a printer profile you created yourself The printer profile was created using an ink limit too high and should be re-created with a lower ink limit. 3) Printing images with input profile and using a printer profile not created by you The printer profile was created using an ink limit too high. Since you cannot re-create the profile with a lower ink limit you can only reduce the “Total ink limit” in the print environment and use it “on Top of Printer Profile”.

Finding the Best Settings for Dot Size and Light Ink Limitation Since the best settings vary from media to media there are no common rules but just try and error solutions and experience. 1)

Print a gradient for the color to be examined that is long enough to show all values from 0% to 100%. 2) Examine it with the help of the ink assignment strip (used to check for 100% ink per dot size) to find the combinations of dot sizes or ink dilutions that cause the problem. 3) Limit the value of the smaller dot size or lighter ink dilution in the advanced settings for the dithering method in the print environment. 4) Print the gradient of step 1 again. Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the printout shows no longer bleeding.

Ink Amount Check

5

Application Notes &SHP4PGU 5. $PMPS21$ 

ErgoSoft TM ColorQPC

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2011 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 ColorQPC Measure – Creating a New Measurement Session ..................................................................2 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................................2 Workflow Overview .............................................................................................................................................3 Workflow 1: New Session .................................................................................................................................5 STEP I. Setup ....................................................................................................................................................5 STEP II. Print .....................................................................................................................................................6 STEP III. Measure ............................................................................................................................................7 STEP IV. Compare Measurements ...........................................................................................................8 STEP V. Measurement Session Report ...................................................................................................9 Step VI. HTML Report................................................................................................................................ 10 Workflow 2: Existing Session – Printed but not Measured ............................................................... 11 STEP I. Setup ................................................................................................................................................. 11 Workflow 3: Existing Session – Printed and Measured ...................................................................... 12 STEP I. Setup ................................................................................................................................................. 12 ColorQPC Setup Details.................................................................................................................................. 13 Launch Setup ................................................................................................................................................ 13 Tab I. Color Chart ........................................................................................................................................ 13 Tab II. Statistics ............................................................................................................................................ 14 Tab III. Report Options .............................................................................................................................. 15 ColorQPC Analyze – Comparing Measurement Sessions........................................................................ 16 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 16 STEP I. Session Selection ................................................................................................................................ 17 STEP II. Multiple Session On-Screen Report ........................................................................................... 18 STEP III. HMTL Report ..................................................................................................................................... 19 Suggested Methods for using ColorQPC ...................................................................................................... 20 Checking Profiles .............................................................................................................................................. 20 Process Control.................................................................................................................................................. 21 STEP I. Create Baseline Measurement Sessions .............................................................................. 21 STEP II: Compute Baseline Warning and Fail Limit Statistics ...................................................... 22 STEP III. Update Warning and Fail Limit Statistics in ColorQPC Settings............................... 22 STEP IV. Process Control .......................................................................................................................... 23

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

ii

Introduction ErgoSoft ColorQPC™ is a color quality process control solution for monitoring and certifying color results from a digital printing system. ColorQPC permits production shops to Determine whether a color profile produces accuracy color results, Assess potential color differences with ink and media lot changes or printer maintenance, Ensure critical spot colors in a production job are printed correctly, Certify that a printer, ink and media combination print can reproduce color output to a specific printing standard. ColorQPC consists of two modules: ColorQPC Measure and ColorQPC Analyze. ErgoSoft ColorQPC™ Measure prints and measures a definable set of colors from a Swatch Book or Named Colors recipe and checks whether the printed colors fall within preset color tolerances. ErgoSoft ColorQPC™ Analyze provides quality departments and production managers with an overall summary of color process control information from a given printer. Both ColorQPC modules include options to conduct color process control comparisons to an expected set of color values or to results from previous production runs. The color coded HTML reports also make it easy to identify which colors or production jobs passed or exceeded the required color tolerances. ColorQPC™ will be included in most standard and Premium editions of the ErgoSoft RIP V14 (such as TexPrint, PosterPrint Pro, PosterPrint Premium) and works with all supported color measurement devices.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

1

ColorQPC Measure – Creating a New Measurement Session Introduction ErgoSoft ColorQPC™ Measure prints and measures a definable set of colors from a Swatch Book or Named Colors recipe and checks whether the printed colors fall within preset color tolerances. Customizable color difference statistics and summary results are reported on screen and as an HTML document for easy assessment of the results. ColorQPC incorporates adjustable controls for setting warning and fail tolerances that alert printer operators about color control errors before, during and after a production job. This reduces production waste and certifies that the printed output meets a customer’s color critical requirements. Special reporting features within ColorQPC determines whether specific tested colors are within a printer’s color gamut and optionally excludes these colors from the quality statistics. ColorQPC Measure is launched using menu Tools > Color & Special Features > ColorQPC Measure.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

2

Workflow Overview The overall workflows for ColorQPC Measure is shown in the figure below and explained in the next chapters.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

3

Define Print Environment: A Print Environment is selected based on the print job requirements. Specify Color Process Control Setup: The color process control setup provides the definition for monitoring specific colors before, during or after a production run. Three specific items are included in the setup: Color Test Chart Design: The design of the color test chart is based on the colors to be monitored, either from a Swatch Book or Named Colors, and the chart geometry for the color measurement device being used. Statistical Process Control (SPC) Parameters: The statistical process defines what is considered acceptable, marginal and out-of-tolerance colors on the color test chart. Reporting Options: The options to be used as part of the statistical analysis report (e.g. Company Name, Customer Name, Reference ID, and others). Select Session/Print Session: The user selects whether to start a new session with this Color Chart and SPC parameters. If it is a new session, the module generates a print job and ID, which then is printed. If an existing session is chosen, the session is assumed to have been printed, but not necessarily measured. If the session has already been printed and measured then it goes to Single Session Report. Measure Session: The Test Chart is measured using the device designed to the printed color test chart. Session Report: Single session analysis provides specific color difference details between the measured and expected results. The analysis indicates whether the printed job passed, marginally passed or failed. In addition to single session reports in ColorQPC Measure, ColorQPC Analyze offers the possibility to evaluate all the sessions associated with a Color Process Control setup. This function is described later in this document. The workflow in ColorQPC Measure permits the user to complete the print and measurement and reporting steps at different times.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

4

Workflow 1: New Session STEP I. Setup 1

Select New ColorQPC Measure Session.

Choose the ColorQPC Setting from the pull-down menu that you want to use for the current ColorQPC Measure session. Administrators can edit, create and delete ColorQPC settings. For a description of the ColorQPC Settings, please refer to chapter “ColorQPC Setup Details”. The ColorQPC Settings summary is displayed in the information window.

1 2

2

3

3

4 5

The current Print Environment and information about the status of the current ColorQPC Measure session is displayed.

Clicking the button Paths optionally saves data from the current session to a specific location that is different than the standard location in the user data folder. Please note that this setting only changes the path for the current session and is not a global setting. 4

5

Click the Next button to continue.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

5

STEP II. Print For printing, the chart is automatically created according to the configuration of the selected ColorQPC Settings for the current measurement session. ColorQPC Measure automatically rotates charts for better media usage whenever possible. Print Options provide additional options for printing the chart: Option Print multiple calibration charts across job width duplicates the calibration chart across the entire printing width such that every second chart is rotated by 180°. This prevents having to reprint the chart if one chart is damaged. Option Print additional charts rotated 90° across job width works together with previous option and adds a second row of calibration charts that is rotated by 90° respectively by 270°. When using the Edit job before printing option, a generated chart can be viewed and modified in the ErgoSoft RIP before printing. Since print environment settings can be changed accidently before printing and in turn impact results, it is advisable to use this option only in limited instances. 1

2 3

1

3 2

4

Click the Spectrophotometer button to change the measuring device to be used. Click the Print button to print the chart.

Click the Next button to measure the chart. Clicking Cancel either prompts to save the session as a file, if a chart has been printed, or exits the ColorQPC Measure module. The saved session file can be reopened at a later time in order to measure the printed chart (see the description of workflow 2). 4

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

6

STEP III. Measure

1

2

1

2

The Manage Measurement dialog includes controls for measuring and saving the session chart measurements: Click the Measure button to start the measurement. When having measured the complete chart, click OK to transfer the measurement into the Manage Measurements dialog. We recommend performing minimum 3 measurements to be able to identify measurement errors. Click the Save button to save the measurements. Click the Load button to load saved measurements of the chart in order to continue an interrupted measuring session. Please note that you can only load measurements exactly made for the session chart. A warning message may be displayed if the measurements are potentially made for another measurement session. The functions on the right side of the dialog allow highlighting deviations, deleting and remeasuring single patches (when it is supported in the measuring device). Click the OK button to continue. Click Cancel to cancel measuring and return to the ColorQPC Measure: Print Chart dialog.

Please note that the measurements are displayed in absolute colorimetric. When the ColorQPC Setting is defined with the relative colorimetric rendering intent, the displayed Lab values may vary from the actual measured Lab values. Changing the rendering intent is described in the chapter entitled “ColorQPC Setup Details”.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

7

STEP IV. Compare Measurements Choose the method of analyzing and displaying the current 1 measurement in the reports. Show measurements only Only the measurement values and out-of-gamut information are displayed. Compare with expected values Compare the measurement session results to expected Lab values for the test chart. Compare with another ColorQPC Measure session Compare the measurement session results to a previous session (i.e. a “golden standard”). In this case, you have to select a print environment and another measure session to report results. 1

2

Click the Next button to continue. Clicking Cancel prompts either to save the session or discard the results. Saved sessions can be evaluated at a later time (see the description of workflow 3). 2

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

8

STEP V. Measurement Session Report The measurement session report dialog displays results based on the analysis method in Step IV. 1 The signal lamp icon and the message below icon visually highlight the analysis results based on the warning and fail delta E (dE) color limits defined in the ColorQPC Settings: 2 Red: One or more color patches are higher than fail limit. 3 5 Yellow: One or more color 4 patches are higher than the warning limit and no colors ex6 7 ceed the fall limit. Green: All color patches are lower than warning and fail limits. When the analyses is based on the Compare with expected values option, the warning and fail limits are based on the color differences between the measured values and expected Lab values for each color patch. The Compare with another ColorQPC Measure session analyses uses the warning and fail limits to compare the results between two measurement sessions. No icon is displayed for the Show measurements only option. 1

2

Overall statistics for the measurement session based on the ColorQPC Settings. This information is not displayed with the Show measurements only option.

3

Clicking the Measurements button redisplays the measurement dialog and permits remeasure of all or parts of the test chart.

Clicking the Show Report button creates an HTML report, automatically saves it, and displays it in the default web browser. Refer to Step VI: HTML Report for more details about the report. 4

5

Clicking the Export Data button allows to save the measurement data in csv format.

6

Clicking the Back button returns to the Compare Measurements dialog. This provides the option to perform other comparisons using the session measurements.

7

Clicking the Finish button closes the ColorQPC Measure session and saves the session information while the Cancel button closes the session without saving.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

9

Step VI. HTML Report The HTML report is only created and saved when clicking the Show Report button. Report header: Displays information about the ColorQPC Measure session according to the ColorQPC Settings. 1

Displays visual signal lamp icon, statistics and pass, warning or fail messages. 2

1

2

Displays the list of colors printed including the approximate 3 color as a square, the name of the color defined in the Swatch book or Named Colors, the expected Lab values, the measured Lab values and the color difference (dE) between the expected and measured results. The color coding used in the color difference column designates whether or not a color passed the evaluation: Gray indicates out-of-gamut colors (Only shown if comparison done to expected values). Green indicates specific color passed Yellow indicates specific color was higher than the warning limit, and Red indicates specific color exceeded the fail limit. 3

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

10

Workflow 2: Existing Session – Printed but not Measured This workflow is done when measuring and analyzing a chart printed at an earlier time.

STEP I. Setup 1

Select Existing ColorQPC Measure Session.

1

Choose the ColorQPC Setting from the pull-down menu for which you want to load a ColorQPC Measure session.

2

2

3

Select the desired Print Environment. Please note that only print environments used with the selected ColorQPC settings will be displayed. 3

4

5

Select the ColorQPC Measure 4 6 Session that you want to measure. The ChartID and print time is displayed in the lower information field. Please note that the measurement session list only shows sessions created with the selected print environment and ColorQPC Settings. Clicking the Delete button next to the list will remove the selected ColorQPC Measure session from the system. Clicking the button Paths optionally saves the data for the current session in a specific location that is different from the standard location in the user data folder. Please note that this setting only saves reports and results for the current session and is not a global setting. 5

Click the Next button to continue. The Manage Measurements dialog will be displayed. Follow Steps III to VI in the “New Session” workflow for reporting and saving session results. 6

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

11

Workflow 3: Existing Session – Printed and Measured STEP I. Setup 1

Select Existing ColorQPC Measure Session.

1

Choose the ColorQPC Setting from the pull-down menu for which you want to load a ColorQPC Measure session.

2

2

3

Select the desired Print Environment. Please note that only print environments used with the selected ColorQPC settings will be displayed. 3

4

5

Select the ColorQPC Measure 4 6 Session that you want to evaluate. The ChartID, print time and measurement time is displayed in the lower information field. Please note that the measurement session list only shows all sessions created with the selected print environment and ColorQPC settings. Clicking the Delete button next to the list will remove the selected ColorQPC Measure session from the system. Clicking the button Paths optionally saves the data for the current session in a specific location that is different from the standard location in the user data folder. Please note that this setting only saves reports and results for the current session and is not a global setting. 5

Click the Next button to continue. The ColorQPC Measure: Compare Measurements dialog will be displayed. Follow Steps IV to VI in the “New Session” workflow. 6

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

12

ColorQPC Setup Details Launch Setup In the ColorQPC Measure: Color Quality Setup dialog, choose the ColorQPC Settings Edit or Create buttons to configure the ColorQPC settings for ColorQPC Measure.

Tab I. Color Chart 1

The current print environment is displayed.

The Color book to be used for creating 1 the test chart can be selected with various options. 2 Choose Swatch Book or Named Colors. Please note that the lab values of Named Colors may not be accurate and can impact the results. Choose to evaluate with either Absolute or 3 Relative Colorimetric rendering intent. Reset colors when an alternative set of Swatch Books or Named Colors are required. Please note that once the ColorQPC Settings are saved, the current Swatch Book/Named Colors are stored for the 4 ColorQPC Setting. If the Swatch Book or Named Colors are changed in the ErgoSoft RIP, these changes will not be updated in the list of stored colors. View Colors pops up an HTML file to verify the colors and Lab values to be used for the chart. 2

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

13

3

Chart Options Selection of color measurement device and geometries required for the printed test chart. The number of patches per row can be selected for the color device. The pulldown provides a list of recommended numbers for the specific color measurement device and geometry. Test Chart Size summarizes the number of charts and the number of rows/columns to be printed.

4

Clicking OK prompts to save the ColorQPC settings.

Tab II. Statistics The Statistics can be saved as a preset by clicking on the Add button or deleted with the Delete button. 1

2

Choose the desired Delta E calculation used for the reports.

3

Enable and choose the desired Warning and/or Fail Delta E limits.

Choose whether the report is based on all colors or only in gamut colors. Default is checked on.

1

2

4

5

Clicking OK prompts ColorQPC settings.

to

save

the

3

4 5

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

14

Tab III. Report Options The Report Options can be saved as a preset by clicking on the Add button or deleted with the Delete button. 1

2

Company name and optional reporting fields can be added to the report.

3

Clicking Ok prompts ColorQPC settings.

to

save

the

1

2

3

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

15

ColorQPC Analyze – Comparing Measurement Sessions Introduction ErgoSoft ColorQPC™ Analyze provides quality departments and production managers with an overall summary of color process control information from a given printer. ColorQPC Analyze computes historical color results either for all print production jobs or for jobs run over a specific time frame. This makes it possible to monitor color quality trends and certify the color results from a given digital printing system. ColorQPC Analyze generates an onscreen and HTML result that summarizes the overall color difference information and lists the production runs that either passed or exhibited color errors. ColorQPC Analyze is launched using menu Tools > Color & Special Features > ColorQPC Analyze.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

16

STEP I. Session Selection Choose the ColorQPC Setting from the pull-down menu that you want to use for the current ColorQPC Analyze session. 1

1

Select the Print Environment for which you want to analyze the ColorQPC Measure sessions. Please note that only print environments used with the selected ColorQPC settings will be displayed. 2

Choose whether to analyze all sessions or sessions within a specific range of dates. 3

2 3

4 5

Clicking the button Paths optionally saves data for the current session in a specific location that is different from the standard location in the user data folder. Please note that this setting only saves reports and results for the current session and is not a global setting. 4

$

Click Next to continue.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

17

STEP II. Multiple Session On-Screen Report 1

Highlights the Report information.

2

Provides overall statistics for all evaluated sessions.

3

Indicates the number of passing, marginal and failing ses-

1

sions.

2

Clicking Show Report displays an HTML version of the report (description see next chapter).

3

4

4 5

Modify settings makes it possible to temporarily change to the statistics and report options (description see chapter “ColorQPC Setup Details”) for testing purposes. 5

6

6

Clicking Finish or Cancel closes the dialog.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

18

STEP III. HMTL Report The HTML report provides an overall summary of the ColorQPC Analyze session statistics. Please note that the report is generated when required and will be overwritten if another report is created. To permanently save it, use the Save or Print functions in the web browser. Report header: Displays information about the ColorQPC Analyze session according to the ColorQPC Settings. 1

Displays statistics and number of pass, warning or fail sessions. 2

1

2

3

Displays the list of colors printed. The list includes the approximate color as a square, the name of the color and Lab values defined in the Swatch Book or Named Colors, the average Lab values from all evaluated colors, the average color difference (dE) between the expected and measured results, the standard deviation in dE between the expected and measured results, and the analysis results for each color in all the evaluated sessions. The color coding used in the PWF columns designates whether or not a color passed the evaluation: Gray indicates out-of-gamut colors (Only shown if comparison done to expected values), Green indicates specific color passed for all evaluated sessions, Yellow indicates specific color was higher than the warning limit in one or more sessions, and Red indicates specific color exceeded the fail limit in one or more sessions. 3

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

19

Suggested Methods for using ColorQPC Checking Profiles For checking the color accuracy of profiles, use the following procedure: Select the desired print environment. Ensure the desired ICC color profile is loaded in the print environment. Launch ColorQPC Measure. Select a ColorQPC Setting. It is recommended to start with one of the standard default settings (e.g. Digital Textile Standard Quality Barbieri LFP 8mm). Edit the settings, if necessary, to work with a specific color measurement device. Change reporting options if desired. Create a new measurement session. Follow the process in this document to print and measure the session. Select the Compare with expected values option in the Compare Measurements dialog. Create report to assess results. If desired, repeat process with one of the high quality default ColorQPC Settings. Please note that the inherent color repeatability of some printer, ink and media combinations may be higher than the warning and fail limits in the high quality default settings.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

20

Process Control The following procedure describes a method for maintaining color process control tolerances with ColorQPC. This procedure assumes that the color profile in the print environment was created for the printer, ink and media combination used for process control monitoring.

STEP I. Create Baseline Measurement Sessions Measurement sessions are done over time to understand the color repeatability of the current process. Select the desired print environment. Launch ColorQPC Measure. Select a ColorQPC Setting. It is recommended to start with one of the standard default settings (e.g. Digital Textile Standard Quality Barbieri LFP 8mm). Edit the settings, if necessary, to work with a specific color measurement device. Change reporting if desired. Save the Baseline ColorQPC Setting and change name if desired. Create a new measurement session. Follow the process in this document to print and measure the session. Select the Show measurements only option in the Compare Measurements dialog. Finish and save session. Repeat the process to create, print, and save measurement sessions with the same printer, ink type, media type, Print Environment, and ColorQPC setting on a shift or daily basis for at least 5 shifts or 5 days. Increasing the number sessions will provide more realistic information about the process.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

21

STEP II: Compute Baseline Warning and Fail Limit Statistics Using the measurements from the Step I, the overall warning and fail limits can be computed for the process. Select the desired print environment as in Step I. Launch ColorQPC Analyze. Select ColorQPC Setting and print environment used in Step I. Generate the Multiple Session Report. Record at the average dE and standard deviation values in the report. Compute a baseline warning limit by multiplying the standard deviation by 2 and adding this value to the average dE. Compute a baseline fail limit by multiplying the standard deviation by 3 and adding this value to the average dE. For example: Average dE = 4 Standard Deviation = 0.75 Warning Limit = 4 + (0.75*2) = 5.50 Fail Limit = 4 + (0.75*3.0) = 6.25 Close ColorQPC Analyze. Please note that high average and/or standard deviation values may be a sign that either the profile is incorrect or there are problems with the printing process. A high average value indicates that colors are being printed incorrectly in every session while a high standard deviation is a symptom that the printing process has a large degree of variability between sessions.

STEP III. Update Warning and Fail Limit Statistics in ColorQPC Settings Select the print environment used in Step I. Launch ColorQPC Measure. Edit the ColorQPC Setting used in Step I. for the baseline measurement sessions. Go to the Statistics tab. Enter the warning and fail limit values computed in Step II and click OK.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

22

STEP IV. Process Control With the updated ColorQPC Setting, subsequent measurement sessions can now be compared to the baseline statistics computed in Step III. Create a new measurement session using the print environment and the ColorQPC Setting modified in Step III. Follow the process in this document to print and measure the session. Select the Compare with expected values option in the Compare Measurements dialog. Create report for the session. If the report results in a warning message, it is worthwhile to check which colors are out-of-tolerance. A fail message would indicate a printing error or unexpected change in the printing process.

ErgoSoft ColorQPCTM

23

Application Notes Basics of Color Management

Basics of Color Management

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Basics of Color Management

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Color Spaces ................................................................................................................................................................1 Basics ........................................................................................................................................................................1 CMYK ........................................................................................................................................................................2 RGB............................................................................................................................................................................3 sRGB..........................................................................................................................................................................3 Lab .............................................................................................................................................................................4 Gamut Mapping (Rendering Intents) .................................................................................................................5 Basics ........................................................................................................................................................................5 Colorimetric Rendering Intents ......................................................................................................................6 Perceptual Rendering Intent and Saturation.............................................................................................6 Data Formats ...............................................................................................................................................................7 Basics ........................................................................................................................................................................7 Raster Data .............................................................................................................................................................7 Vector Data ............................................................................................................................................................8 File Formats and Color Management ................................................................................................................9 Pure Raster Formats............................................................................................................................................9 Vector Formats .................................................................................................................................................. 10 Problems with Mixed Formats ..................................................................................................................... 11 OPI Support .............................................................................................................................................................. 12 What is OPI?........................................................................................................................................................ 12 Advantages of Using OPI ............................................................................................................................... 12 Limitations of Using OPI ................................................................................................................................ 13 Creating OPI Images........................................................................................................................................ 13 Fidelity of Colors in the Printing Process ....................................................................................................... 14 Selecting the Best Rendering Intent .......................................................................................................... 14 Controlling the Mixing of the Inks ............................................................................................................. 15

Basics of Color Management

ii

Introduction Color management describes a controlled conversion between the colors of various color devices, such as scanners, digital cameras, monitors, printers, and corresponding media. The primary goal of color management is to obtain a good match across color devices. For instance, imagine an image which should look the same on all media printed with any printer. Color management helps to achieve the same appearance on all media and printers, provided the device is capable of delivering the needed color intensities. In order to describe the behavior of the various combinations of printer, ink, and media they must be compared (calibrated) in relation to a standard color space. Therefore, pre-defined samples are printed and measured so that an idealized color description of the device is created. This description is called a profile. A profile is created for a certain purpose: either to describe the image color space (input) or to describe the printer color space (output). The possibilities of the color management for the printout are not only controlled by the printer, ink, and media but also by the data format and color space of the image that is printed. The following chapters explain the supported data formats, color spaces, and the methods for matching the input and the output color spaces.

Color Spaces Basics Color models are abstract mathematical figures describing the way colors are represented by numbers, typically with three or four components. When the color model is mapped to a certain device, e.g. a monitor or a printer, a color space with a certain gamut is created as a part of the global color model. For example, Adobe RGB and sRGB are two different color spaces both based on the RGB color model. In the following, the terms “CMYK color space” (or just “CMYK”), “RGB color space” (or just “RGB”), and “Lab color space” (or just “Lab”) are used as generic terms for any RGB, CMYK, or Lab color space.

Basics of Color Management

1

CMYK The CMYK model depends of the absorption on the paper. When white light hits color that is permeable to light a part of the color system is absorbed. The other part is reflected to the eye. Theoretically, a pigment mixture of pure Cyan (C), Magenta (M), and Yellow (Y) absorbs all of the light and creates black; thus, they are called subtractive colors. But, since inks for printing contain also pollution this mixture results in a dirty brown and has to be mixed with black ink (K) to be able to create real black. Mixing the inks for printing for reproducing all other colors is called four-color printing. Note: subtractive (CMY) and additive (RGB) colors are complementary colors. Two subtractive colors at a time create an additive color and vice versa. Normally in CMYK mode, a percentage value for each print color is assigned to each pixel of a CMYK image. The lightest colors (lights) have low percentage values whereas darker colors (depths) have higher percentage values. A bright red e.g. may be build by 2% Cyan, 93% Magenta, 90% Yellow and 0% Black. In CMYK images, pure white is created when all components have a value of 0%. The CMYK mode is used when an image is prepared for four-color printing. The therefore necessary conversion process from RGB to CMYK is called color separation. Today´s large format printers often do not print with CMYK only, but also with lighter dilutions of the basic inks (Light inks) and additional full tone inks such as Orange, Green, Blue, Violet, etc. These additional inks are used to reduce the amount of ink needed (e.g. when using an orange ink instead of mixing magenta and yellow) or to increase the gamut of the printer when the color tone of the additional ink cannot be achieved by just mixing the basic inks.

Basics of Color Management

2

RGB The RGB model describes what kind of light needs to be emitted to produce a given color. A part of the visible color spectrum can be represented by mixing the three basic components of colored light. These components are the primary colors Red, Green and Blue (RGB). Overlapping these three primary colors creates the secondary colors Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. Because the primary colors together create white, they are called additive colors. When all colors are joined together white will be created – that is, light is completely reflected to the eye. Additive colors are used for illumination, in video technology, for slide exposure, and for monitors. The monitor creates colors by emitting light through red, green, and blue phosphor particles. In RGB color images, an intensity value between 0 (black) and 255 (white) for each RGB component is adjusted to each pixel. Bright red may have a value of 246 for R, 20 for G and 50 for B. When the value for all components is the same, gray will be created. When the value of all components is 255, pure white is created; black is built by a value of 0 for all components. RGB images use three colors to represent 16.7 million colors on the monitor. They are 3 channel images; thus they contain 24 (8x3) bit per pixel. RGB is standard for scanners.

sRGB RGB colors always depend on the device on which they are displayed. The sRGB color space, a standard RGB color space, was created by Hewlett-Packard and Microsoft Corporation for use on (CRT) monitors, RGB printers, and the internet. Since the gamut of the sRGB color space can be displayed with almost all monitors, the sRGB color space is a common color space for the internet and World Wide Web. Modern non-CRT hardware, such as LCD monitors, digital cameras, and RGB printers, might have a larger gamut but - since sRGB turned out to be a standard for RGB devices - are built to obey the sRGB standard. Just high-end professional equipment might break this rule. For this reason, you may assume that any RGB image you do not have other information for, has been created using the sRGB color space.

Basics of Color Management

3

Lab The Lab color model is based on the color model that the “Commission Internationale d‘Eclariage” (CIE) declared in 1931 to be the international norm for measuring colors. This model was improved in 1976 and named CIE Lab. Lab colors are device independent; that is, they create constant colors independently from certain devices like monitors, printers, or computers that are used to create and print images. Lab colors are built by a luminosity or brightness component (L), and two chromatic components: the a-component ranges from green to red; the b-component from blue to yellow. The Lab model is often used when editing Photo CD images or modifying luminosity and color values in an image independently from each other.

Basics of Color Management

4

Gamut Mapping (Rendering Intents) Basics The rendering intent specifies how out-of-gamut colors of the device-independent Lab color space are to be converted into the printer gamut. This conversion is necessary because the Lab color space holds much more colors than the printer gamut. A common task for the CMM (color management module) is to convert the image (input) into Lab and then convert it into CMYK (printer):

A closer look to the color spaces will show that the gamut of the RGB input color space and the gamut of the CMYK output color space are both completely covered by the Lab profile connection color space, but the RGB and the CMYK color space cover not completely matching areas. There is a gamut mismatch.

Each time a gamut mismatch occurs, the CMM uses the rendering intent to decide how the out-of-gamut colors are converted and which consequences for the image quality are prioritized. Basics of Color Management

5

Colorimetric Rendering Intents The absolute colorimetric and relative colorimetric rendering intents do not compress the Lab color space to the printer gamut. Thus, colors lying in the printer gamut can be exactly reproduced; all other colors are projected to the printer gamut. The relative colorimetric rendering intent adjusts the Lab white to the white of the media. This means that white in the image will remain white in the output; all other light colors are printed - even when the original color tone is lighter than the output media.

Perceptual Rendering Intent and Saturation The perceptual rendering intent compresses the complete color space so that the color distances survive (adjustment to black and white). The colors themselves are moved so that exact reproduction of colors using Lab values is not possible but the general impression of the image is preserved. Color gradients in the original image will persist as gradient in the output (no abrupt changes in color). The perceptual rendering intent is often used to reproduce images, photos, etc. Saturation is a modification of the perceptual rendering intent with more weight on the saturation of the colors. Color gradients become less smooth but with higher color intensities. This is useful for vector graphics like diagrams and charts.

Basics of Color Management

6

Data Formats Basics Images are made up of either pixel or vector data, which is rasterized to pixels for the display in most image processing applications. Thus, image files always consist of raster data or vector data or a mixture of vector and raster data. The following chapters describe the features of the main image data types while the file formats are described later.

Raster Data A raster image or bitmap is a structure representing a generally rectangular grid of small points of color, so called pixels. Each pixel has a certain position and a certain color value. A bitmap or raster image corresponds bit for bit with an image displayed on the screen. For example, a bicycle tire is built in a bitmap by an accumulation of colored pixels that are located at certain positions. When working with pixel images pixels are edited instead of objects or forms. A bitmap is characterized by the width and height of the image in pixels and the number of bits per pixel, which determines the numbers of colors it can represent. The quality of a bitmap depends on the total number of pixels, the resolution, and the amount of information in each pixel, the color depth. For example: an image that stores 24 bit of color information per pixel can represent smoother degrees of shading than one that can store only 256 colors. Also, an image sampled with 640 x 480 pixels will look rough and blocky compared to one sampled at 1280 x 1024 pixels. Raster graphics cannot be scaled to a much higher resolution without loss of apparent quality. This is in contrast to vector graphics, which easily scale to any size.

Basics of Color Management

7

Vector Data As opposed to the raster image formats above (where the data describes the characteristics of each individual pixel), vector image formats contain a geometric description which can be rendered smoothly at any desired display size. For example, a bicycle tire is built in a vector graphic by a mathematical definition of a circle that is drawn with a certain radius at a certain location in a certain color. It can be moved, scaled, and its color can be changed without any loss of quality. Vector graphics do not depend on the resolution – that is, they are not determined by a given number of pixels. They are scaled automatically so that they come out very sharp on any output device and in any resolution. Vector images are suitable for text (especially in small sizes) and graphics such as logos that require clear contours in any size.

Basics of Color Management

8

File Formats and Color Management Pure Raster Formats The ErgoSoft RIP supports the following raster file formats: TIFF, BMP, JPEG (or JPG). The BMP (Bit Mapped) format is internally used in the Microsoft Windows operating system to handle graphics. These files are typically not compressed resulting in large files. A typical bitmap file uses the RGB color model. Since BMP files do not offer embedded profiles, an external input profile must be selected in order to convert the RGB values into CMYK and being able to print them. The TIFF (Tagged Image File) format is a flexible and adaptable image file format. The ability to store image data in a lossless format makes TIFF files a useful method for archiving images. Unlike standard JPEG, TIFF files can be edited and resaved without suffering a compression loss. TIFF does have an option to use LZW compression, a lossless data compression technique for reducing file size. TIFF files can be saved in RGB, Lab, or CMYK including additional spot color channels. Since they offer the option to embed the used color profile, the ErgoSoft RIP offers the possibility to automatically use it. The embedded profile in TIFF files can ensure that the conversion from the original image color space RGB or CMYK to the Lab color space is done correctly (as long as the correct profile is embedded in the image) and thus, helps to ensure the color fidelity of the printout. The JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) image files are a lossy format. The JPEG format supports 8-bit per color - red, green, and blue, for a 24-bit total - and thus, produces relatively small file sizes. Fortunately, the compression in most cases does not detract noticeably from the image. But JPEG files do suffer generational degradation when repeatedly edited and saved. The JPEG compression algorithm is also used for compression in other file formats such as TIFF and PDF, but not recommended to be used because of the loss of data and color information involved. JPEG files use the RGB or CMYK color model. Up to and including version 12, embedded profiles were utilized in the ErgoSoft RIP for RGB JPEG files only; CMYK JPEG files needed an external input profile.

Basics of Color Management

9

Vector Formats The ErgoSoft RIP supports the following vector file formats: EPS, PS, PDF, and AI. Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) is a graphics file format based on the PostScript language. It can consist of one small vector image up to a complete page of any size and even of several pages. The EPS format is not linked to a certain print driver; it is a common graphics file format that often is used for transferring vector data from one application to another one. PostScript (PS) is a page description language that is created by PostScript print drivers such as Adobe Generic PostScript. The dimensions of the PS file are limited to the paper sizes provided by the PostScript print driver. It can consist of several pages. When using a PostScript printer to create a PostScript file for printing with the RIP, you have to configure the print driver for highest compatibility or Encapsulated PostScript in order to eliminate print driver specific commands that cannot be processed in the ErgoSoft RIP. Portable Document Format (PDF) is an open file format that is created and controlled by Adobe Systems. PDF files do not encode information that is specific to the application software, hardware, or operating system used to create or view the document. This feature ensures that a valid PDF will render exactly the same regardless of its origin or destination (but depending on font availability when fonts are not encapsulated in the file). PDF files are most appropriately used to encode the exact look of a document in a device-independent way. While the PDF format can describe very simple one page documents, it may also be used for many pages, complex documents that use a variety of different fonts, graphics, colors, and images. Adobe Illustrator Artwork (AI) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing vector-based drawings in either the EPS or PDF formats. The .ai filename extension is used by Adobe Illustrator. Up to version Adobe Illustrator version 8, the .ai file format was an EPS like format. The Adobe Illustrator CS versions save the .ai file in a PDF like format. As long as there are no Illustrator specific commands in the .ai file, it can be processed in the ErgoSoft RIP.

Basics of Color Management

10

All supported vector formats have one common property: they can not only consist of pure vector data but also of raster data which leads to the problems with mixed formats that is discussed in the next chapter. Another property of the supported vector formats is concerning the Color Management: The elements in the vector files may be created in different color spaces and combined in the vector file in the original color spaces. This requires the Color Management to treat the different elements differently, for example: text elements should be treated differently from raster images. Up to and including version 12, the Color Management was not able to handle this task so that all elements were treated the same and converted into one color space which could be configured to be CMYK or RGB. The usage of embedded profiles could not be configured so that we highly recommended not embedding profiles in vector files. Now, it is possible to configure the global usage of embedded and external profiles for the three elements text, normal vector images such as logos, and raster images in both color spaces CMYK and RGB.

Problems with Mixed Formats Apart from the color management problem of mixed color spaces in PostScript files for which the solution is already discussed in the previous chapter, there is another problem resulting from the possibility to mix vector and raster data. As discussed earlier, raster data saved in pure raster files such as TIFF files are scaled using an interpolation so that the scaled image will still look smooth and only lose contrast when the scaling factor is too high. On the contrary, vector data are first scaled as vectors and then rasterized (translated into pixels) so that the sharp lines of e.g. a logo or a letter are retained. But exactly this feature is a problem when you have to scale raster data that are part of a vector file: each pixel is interpreted as a tiny square and scaled like a square resulting in more or less visible bricks that now make up the raster image. In order to avoid this problem you have to separate vector data and raster data and do not have to use both types in the same file. Because this is almost impossible, many image processing applications offer possibility to use the so called OPI functionality when creating EPS files.

Basics of Color Management

11

OPI Support What is OPI? OPI (Open PrePress Interface) is a production tool used to link very large, high resolution image files to PostScript files. This process automatically or manually creates two versions of the same image: a high resolution version for printing, and a low resolution version that is used for the whole layout process. For printing (final output), the “small” file is either automatically replaced by an OPI server or is manually replaced by the large high resolution image file. Thus, OPI is a special PostScript file with the raster data not included directly in the file. It is rather organized using links to files with pixel data in addition to the PostScript file. The ErgoSoft RIP supports OPI by replacing while ripping the links in the PostScript file by the raster data in additional files.

Advantages of Using OPI Saving storage space Fonts and vector graphics need less space because they can be described using mathematical formulas. On the other hand, raster data need very much space (e.g. a page scanned with 300 dpi needs –in uncompressed mode –about 40 MB storage space). The PostScript file will be considerably smaller when placing raster data into the PostScript files using OPI link; space is saved on the hard disk. Saving rasterizing time The ErgoSoft RIP needs considerably less time to rasterize the PostScript document. Scaling The PostScript file must not be created in the size that it will be printed, for vector graphics are scaled without any loss of quality. When scaling TIFF images the ErgoSoft RIP does not use the image size that is noted in the PostScript file, but instead uses the original size of the separate TIFF file. Creating the image When using very large TIFF images (with long loading time), a low resolution copy of the original image can be worked on, which is replaced by the high resolution original when it is printed.

Basics of Color Management

12

Limitations of Using OPI Presently, there are some restrictions to using OPI: Rotated raster data Placed TIFF images may only be rotated by 0°, 90°, 180° or 270°. The ErgoSoft RIP cannot print images that are rotated by any other degree (for example 45°). Image frames Non-rectangular image frames (e.g. oval image frames in QuarkXPress) are not supported, but the images may be cropped.

Creating OPI Images The following instructions are only meant to be little hints for some design programs. For more information please refer to the help or support of the design program in use. QuarkXPress Save the file as EPS and select “Omit TIFF“ in the OPI part / menu of the export dialog window. In Version 5, select “OPI active” for TIFF images in the export dialog box. Macromedia Freehand From menu File – Output Options select “none” for “image files”. Take care that “include OPI comments” is checked. Save the image in EPS format. Adobe Illustrator Does not support OPI Adobe Photoshop Does not support OPI Adobe InDesign Export the file in EPS or PrePress format and omit the proper graphics in the next window “Omit Imported Graphics”. Coreldraw After having selected the TIFF file in the import dialog box, select “link file with high resolution for OPI output”. In the EPS export dialog box, select “keep OPI links”.

Basics of Color Management

13

Fidelity of Colors in the Printing Process Selecting the Best Rendering Intent As mentioned earlier in this manual, there are four rendering intents available with different properties. Which rendering intent you choose highly depends on the color space and the creation method of the image you want to print: Rule When (almost) all colors used in the image are inside the printer gamut, use the Relative Colorimetric rendering intent. When many (and especially dark) colors used in the image are outside the printer gamut, use the Perceptual rendering intent or Saturation. Finding colors outside the printer gamut The ErgoSoft RIP offers a function to visually display image parts that are outside the printer gamut: Select the image you want to check and launch the Tuning command. Configure the properties of the preview windows (add a new preview window when necessary) so that colors outside the gamut are marked in a certain customizable color. The colors outside the printer gamut do not depend on the selected rendering intent but on the selected input profile. Colors selected from a color book When all colors in the image have been selected from a color book that was printed with the same printer, printer settings, and ink on the same media as your image should be printed: use the same rendering intent that was used to print the color book. Reproducing colors As long as the colors to be reproduced are in the printer gamut select the Absolute Colorimetric rendering intent. When the colors are very light so that they are not printed when using the Absolute Colorimetric rendering intent: select the Relative Colorimetric rendering intent. When the Lab values of the colors are outside the printer gamut you have to print a color book and visually select a similar color (with another Lab value) that is in the printer gamut.

Basics of Color Management

14

Examples: Lab color space When all of the Lab color space is used (from white to black), the color space of the printer is much smaller than the color space of the image. In this situation, the Perceptual rendering intent or Saturation should be the first choice. When only the colors are used that are inside the printer gamut (which is a very small part of the Lab gamut), the Relative Colorimetric rendering intent is the first choice. RGB color spaces The RGB color spaces are smaller than the Lab color space but still larger than the printer gamut. Thus, the Perceptual rendering intent or Saturation should be the first choice – except when the file has been created using another rendering intent such as relative colorimetric with black point compensation. sRGB color space (photos from a digital camera) The sRGB color space is smaller than most other RGB color spaces but still larger than the printer gamut. Thus, the Perceptual rendering intent or Saturation should be the first choice – except when the file has been created using another rendering intent such as relative colorimetric with black point compensation. CMYK color spaces The CMYK color spaces are smaller than the RGB color spaces. Since the printer color space is also (enhanced) CMYK the CMYK color space of the image may be smaller than the printer gamut or almost identical. In this case, almost all colors are inside the printer gamut and you can try the Relative Colorimetric rendering intent as first choice.

Controlling the Mixing of the Inks When using the Color Management (input profile and printer profile), the mixing of the inks is completely controlled by the printer profile. In some cases, this results in unwanted mixings, e.g. Cyan and Magenta dots in a Yellow logo area where the customer does not insist on a certain yellow but on only yellow dots. This requires that the Color Management is (partly) by-passed. The ErgoSoft RIP offers two functions for this procedure: 1)

By-passing the Color Management for the complete image: Create your image in CMYK and do not attach an input profile (neither embedded nor external input profile).

2)

By-passing the Color Management for just a certain color: Use the functions for replacing colors that are described in another manual part.

Basics of Color Management

15

Application Notes Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Color Management Workflow ..............................................................................................................................2 The Color Engine..................................................................................................................................................2 CMYK Output: RGB Input..................................................................................................................................3 CMYK Output: CMYK Input with Input Profile ..........................................................................................4 CMYK Output: CMYK Input without Input Profile ...................................................................................5 RGB Output ............................................................................................................................................................6 Tools for Color Management ................................................................................................................................7 Output Calibration ....................................................................................................................................................8 Requests on Output Calibration ....................................................................................................................8 Tools for Output Calibration ...........................................................................................................................8 Density Linearization ....................................................................................................................................9 Printer Profile...................................................................................................................................................9 Ink Limitation ...................................................................................................................................................9 Image Color Control .............................................................................................................................................. 11 Input Color Management .............................................................................................................................. 11 Additional Tools for Image Color Control ............................................................................................... 11

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

ii

Introduction These days, one of the crucial demands on large format printing is the color fidelity of the output. The output is not only requested to be brilliant in colors but also to show the same colors on different media or printed with different printers. For this task, The ErgoSoft RIP offers a well thought out color management workflow with several tools for output calibration, ink amount control, and color fidelity.

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

1

Color Management Workflow The Color Engine Most printers supported in the ErgoSoft RIP software print in CMYK mode (CMYK including light inks) or expanded CMYK mode (CMYK including light inks and additional full tone and light inks). This means that the ErgoSoft RIP has to send the images in (expanded) CMYK mode to the printer. For the same (expanded) CMYK values the printed color shade depends on the ink and media used. In addition, some printers can use the RGB output interface provided by Windows. Internally, the ErgoSoft RIP uses the device independent Lab mode. RGB image are converted with the help of input profiles (e.g. for scanners) to Lab values. The Lab values are converted into (expanded) CMYK or RGB values with the help of printer profiles, which are especially created for the combination of ink and media used. The result is that an image that is printed on different media look about the same on all media.

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

2

CMYK Output: RGB Input RGB colors must be converted in order to print them on a CMYK printer. Thus, the ErgoSoft RIP is delivered with an RGB input profile that is selected by default in the profile settings. The density linearization is used for ink linearization. The printer profile is used to convert the Lab values resulting from the input conversion (RGB -> Lab) into CMYK and additional colors when the printer profile supports them. When a printer profile has not been selected, a standard conversion from Lab to CMYK without support of additional colors is used.

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

3

CMYK Output: CMYK Input with Input Profile CMYK colors must not be converted in order to print them on a CMYK printer. By default, the ErgoSoft RIP does not convert CMYK values into Lab values. Selecting an input profile different from “(none)” forces the color engine to convert the CMYK values of the image into Lab. The density linearization is used for ink linearization. The printer profile is used to convert the Lab values resulting from the input conversion (CMYK –> Lab) into CMYK and additional colors when the printer profile supports them. When a printer profile has not been selected, a standard conversion from Lab to CMYK without support of additional colors is used.

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

4

CMYK Output: CMYK Input without Input Profile CMYK colors must not be converted in order to print them on a CMYK printer. By default, the ErgoSoft RIP does not convert CMYK values into Lab values. When an input profile has not been selected, only the density linearization is used: the CMYK values cannot be converted into Lab and back into the printer color space.

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

5

RGB Output RGB output with help of Windows printer drivers offers very limited output calibration: Just the RGB printer profile can be used; density linearization and ink limitation are not available. Color replacement is available in a very limited way.

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

6

Tools for Color Management The ErgoSoft RIPs provide several tools for the color management. The tools can be separated into two parts: tools for output control and tools that control the input directly.

The tools for output control – density linearization, ink limitation, and output profile (printer profile) – are combined to build the output calibration. The tools for direct input control are separated into two groups. The first group, the input color management, influences the complete image by using a certain profile or rule to convert the image color space into Lab. The second group, the direct color control, is used to modify the image or to control the output color of a certain part of the image to manually make sure that certain colors are printed as expected.

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

7

Output Calibration Requests on Output Calibration The main requests on output calibration are: 1) Linearity in ink coverage The ink amount used should rise continuously from 0% (no ink) to 100% (all ink) without gaps, steps, and cracks. 2) Controlled amount of ink used Bleeding, polling, etc. must not occur – independent from the number of inks used for printing a certain color. 3) Controlled mixed colors The ink mixing must consider the color of the ink used as well as the color of the media which is gleaming through the inks.

Tools for Output Calibration There are two parts for output calibration: density linearization and printer profile. The reason for this is that producers of paper/film and ink have their experienced formulas for creating a media or an ink series. Thus, reprinting an image should theoretically give the same result as the sample that was printed some time ago (provided that the same ‘ingredients’ were used, namely printer, paper, ink version, software settings, etc.). In practice, a colored spot may meet this theory but not an image. Reasons for this may be the wear and tear of the print heads, an invisible change of the surface of the media, a slightly different consistency of the ink, etc. All of these points do not have any visible influence on the mixture of the colors; only more or less ink flows on the media, or the media is able to absorb more or less ink as before. Thus, calibration of a printer is in the ErgoSoft RIP divided into density linearization and printer profiles.

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

8

Density Linearization The density linearization contains specifications about the amount of ink that is to be used for printing. Dependent on mechanical components such as the size of the ink drops, the real covering of the ink does not meet the required. Thus, visually, too much ink will flow to the media, especially for medium and darker colors: the image will be too dark and the darker areas will have no gradation. In the extreme the ink will float on darker parts. The density linearization contains a correction factor that adjusts the real amount of ink for the given covering (in 2.5%, 5% or 10% steps) to match the desired covering. Intermediate values are determined with help of the measured data. Thus, the density linearization contains the part of the Color Management that changes frequently. It should be done from time to time, but certainly, with a new cartridge of ink. Only then can it be guaranteed that the ‘correct’ amount of ink will always flow to the paper. For a detailed explanation on density linearization please refer to the manual part “Density Calibration”.

Printer Profile The printer profiles contain specifications about the required mixture of the process colors to create colors. These specifications are set by the Color Management, with certain types of print heads and certain versions/series of ink on a certain media. Thus, the printer profiles only need to be recreated when the print head is changed, when the media is replaced by another media, or when the version number for the ink is changed. For a detailed explanation about printer profiling please refer to the manual part “ColorGPS”.

Ink Limitation When the media cannot absorb all the ink provided, the ink amount used must be limited. There are several ways for ink limitation depending on the stage in which the ink limitation must come in: Ink limitation for individual ink colors when the printout is bleeding or polling just when printing with pure inks. Limitation of light inks in order to avoid gaps or steps in the transition range from one dot size to another. Overall ink limitation for mixed inks. For a detailed explanation about ink limitation please refer to the manual part “Ink Amount Check”.

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

9

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

10

Image Color Control Input Color Management Images can be created using different sources and color settings. Thus, in order to convert the image color space correctly into Lab, the ‘correct’ conversion must be used. This is done by using an input profile. As a special case, PostScript files and PDF files can include objects with different color spaces as well as different object types. The ErgoSoft RIPs offer a sophisticated PostScript Color Management to deal with these files. For a detailed explanation about the input color management please refer to the manual part “Image Color Control”.

Additional Tools for Image Color Control In addition to the input color management, the ErgoSoft RIPs offer two other tools for image color control: A very basic tool to tune the complete image regarding brightness, contrast, and color channels. Several well-founded tools for manually or automatically replacing certain colors in an image (e.g. company logos) by individually defined replacement colors. For more information please refer to the manual parts “Image Color Control” and “Color Replacement”.

Color Management in ErgoSoft RIPs

11

Application Notes Controlling PostScript Rasterization

Controlling PostScript Rasterization

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Controlling PostScript Rasterization

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Global PostScript Interpreter Settings ...............................................................................................................1 Global PostScript Image Settings ........................................................................................................................3 Individual PostScript Image Settings .................................................................................................................4 Limits of the PostScript Interpreter.....................................................................................................................4 Size of File to be Rasterized.............................................................................................................................4 Amount of Raster Data in PDF Files..............................................................................................................4

Controlling PostScript Rasterization

ii

Introduction PostScript files are rasterized using a so-called PostScript interpreter which can be configured according to your needs. Some settings relate to the PostScript interpreter itself, some relate to the images. Thus, the configuration is done globally affecting all images imported after the settings are specified. In addition, some settings can be changed for each image.

Global PostScript Interpreter Settings The global PostScript interpreter settings concern settings about fonts, storage of temporary raster files, memory usage, etc. To specify the global PostScript Interpreter settings In the JobComposer select menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Application > PostScript/PDF Interpreter In the Rip Server select menu Tools > Options Please note that the settings relate only the PostScript interpreter running on the computer on which the settings are done. Raster files are saved in a folder so that the images must not be rasterized again when a job with (Encapsulated) PostScript 1 files is reproduced. This function configures the raster file management. You may set the folder in which 4 raster files are to be saved (Change Folder) 2 delete all saved raster files to get more availa3 ble space on the disk (Empty Folder) limit the disk space that raster files may occupy set the disk space that must be kept free for other applications specify the number of days after which the raster files are to be removed automatically 1

Select the level of Compression of raster data suitable for your image files. The higher the compression level the less space is needed on the hard drive resulting in faster writing and reading the data but the more CPU time is needed to uncompress the data. 2

Controlling PostScript Rasterization

1

Enter the value of the PostScript buffer size in percentage of the available physical memory that may be used by the PostScript interpreter. The recommended value is 20% of the available physical memory. When the value is too low, the PostScript interpreter will be slower because too many too small blocks are needed for reading and rasterizing the file. When the value is too high, the PostScript interpreter will be slower because there is not enough memory left for other purposes. Please note that the available physical memory is less than the available memory for Windows because it only concerns the memory that is available to the PostScript interpreter. 3

4 Since the PostScript interpreter will always load all available fonts, the ErgoSoft RIP manages its fonts independently from Windows. Thus, each font that is installed in Windows that will be used with the ErgoSoft RIP must also be installed in the ErgoSoft RIP. This section allows for the specification of the paths where the ErgoSoft RIP should look for fonts. List Font Path allows all paths in which the PostScript interpreter will look for fonts to be entered. Clicking on the icons allows adding a new path, removing the marked path from the list, and setting the order of the paths. 4

Controlling PostScript Rasterization

2

Global PostScript Image Settings The global PostScript image settings concern settings about raster resolution, OPI files, DCS files, etc. To specify the global PostScript image settings select menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Image > PostScript/PDF Parameters. Sometimes, it is wise or even necessary not to rasterize the PostScript or PDF file for the output resolution because e.g. the output dimensions are too big. Then, you can either specify a minimum resolution for automatic raster resolution reduction or a factor. Additional scaling is done that may result in a small loss of quality in fonts and straight lines. 1

1 2

3

Importing OPI files requires Use external image files for OPI images being checked in order to use the external image. Deselecting this field is necessary whenever importing the file results in a “searching for missing linked file” error (e.g. for FreeHand 5 PostScript files). 2

By default, DCS files are treated as CMYK files with additional color channels, if any. Checking Treat DCS as separated file treats DCS files as multi-channel files without the possibility of assigning an input profile or using any color corrections. 3

Controlling PostScript Rasterization

3

Individual PostScript Image Settings Since the raster resolution reduction might be necessary for just some image, this setting can be specified for each image individually – in addition to the global setting affecting all images imported afterwards. To specify the PostScript settings for the current image select Edit Parameters from the Image context menu. The settings are already described in the chapter above.

Limits of the PostScript Interpreter Size of File to be Rasterized The physical size of the PostScript or PDF file does not matter as long as the operating system can handle it. Important is the output dimension: The maximum size in lines or characters per line the PostScript interpreter can handle is about 524600. Printing 720 dpi this is about 18.5 m. When needing to print larger output, you have to use the functionality for reducing the raster resolution (see above).

Amount of Raster Data in PDF Files The sum of all raster data in a PDF file must not exceed 2 GB for the uncompressed size. When the sum is more, you have to include raster files with lower resolution in the PDF file.

Controlling PostScript Rasterization

4

Application Notes PostScript and PDF Color Management

PostScript and PDF  Color Management 

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2011 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

PostScript and PDF Color Management

i

Contents  Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1  PostScript/PDF Color Management in V14 vs. Older Versions ................................................................2  Legacy Color Management for PostScript/PDF Files .............................................................................2  PostScript/PDF Interpreter Color Management .......................................................................................3  PostScript/PDF Color Management V14 vs. v.2008 ................................................................................4  Legacy Color Management vs. PostScript/PDF Interpreter CM .........................................................4  Spot Color Replacement Using “Named Colors Profiles” ..........................................................................5  Replacing Spot Color Gradients .....................................................................................................................5  Spot Color Replacement and Transparencies ...........................................................................................5  Option “Use embedded”.........................................................................................................................................5  Transparencies ............................................................................................................................................................6  Known Problems with Transparencies .........................................................................................................6  Known Problems with Flattened Transparencies .....................................................................................6  Options for Printing Flattened Transparencies.........................................................................................7  PDF/X .............................................................................................................................................................................8  CorelDRAW X5 – Using Spot Colors ...................................................................................................................9  DeviceN Color Spaces ..............................................................................................................................................9  PDF Files Created with Adobe CS5 .................................................................................................................. 10  Recommendations for Saving PDF Files ........................................................................................................ 11  Selecting the PDF Version ............................................................................................................................. 11  Saving Raster Data ........................................................................................................................................... 12  Color Spaces ....................................................................................................................................................... 13  Fonts ...................................................................................................................................................................... 13  Transparency Flattening ................................................................................................................................. 14  PDF File Preparation and RIP Settings Overview ........................................................................................ 15  PDF File Creation Guidelines ........................................................................................................................ 15  RIP Setting Guidelines..................................................................................................................................... 15 

PostScript and PDF Color Management

ii

Introduction  PostScript (EPS, PS) and PDF (PDF, AI) files offer numerous options for color management with a print workflow environment. The ErgoSoft RIP comes with several presets for handling color management of PDF documents. It is necessary to carefully prepare both the PDF file as well as the RIP to achieve optimal color results. Since it is difficult to cover all valid PDF print workflows, this document describes some typical workflow possibilities one can use for effective print production. The document also provides some helpful tips to troubleshoot printing and ripping issues related to the PDF file format. This document primarily focuses on the PostScript/PDF Color Management settings accessed either under Tools > Options > Preferences > Image > Color Management >PostScript/PDF or by accessing the Color Management PS/PDF Presets for a specific PostScript or PDF file.

PostScript/PDF settings dialog

PostScript and PDF Color Management

1

PostScript/PDF Color Management in V14 vs. Older Versions  With v.2008, the ErgoSoft RIP offers a new color management option for PostScript and PDF files: the PostScript/PDF interpreter color management. The color management method of older versions is still available in Version 14.

Legacy Color Management for PostScript/PDF Files  The legacy color management for PostScript/PDF Files has one input profile and one rendering intent for the complete file. The global settings offer a CMYK Profile, which is used for printing on all CMYK based printer drivers, and an RGB Profile, which is used for printing on all RGB printer drivers that are available for just some printers such as Epson, Canon, and HP. With the legacy color management, all color spaces within the PostScript or PDF file are converted into either CMYK or RGB depending on the output color space. For this color management workflow, standard conversion tables are used that are part of the PostScript interpreter. This conversion occurs when the PostScript interpreter rasterizes the file. Afterwards, the standard color management works by applying the input profile, rendering intent, density linearization and printer profile to the rasterized data. This method functions similar to the color management workflow for raster data (TIFF, JPG, etc.). The legacy color management for PostScript files provides the possibility to reproduce older jobs printed with earlier versions of the ErgoSoft RIP. For new jobs, we recommend using the PostScript/PDF interpreter color management.

PostScript and PDF Color Management

2

PostScript/PDF Interpreter Color Management  Compared to the legacy color management, the PostScript/PDF Interpreter Color Management offers several additional color controls and options. Some basic settings are explained in this chapter. Alternative configurations to the basic settings as well as advanced settings are explained in the next chapters. Unlike the legacy color management, the PostScript/PDF Interpreter Color Management applies input color management during the PostScript or PDF file rasterization process. This means, that all color spaces within the PostScript or PDF file are converted into the output color space using input profiles, rendering intents, and printer profiles. The color managed rasterized data is then adjusted to the printer using only the dithering method, density linearization, and total ink limit settings. This offers the advantages including the ability to Use different input color management methods for RGB and CMYK data Utilize different input color management settings for 3 object types: All raster data (object type Images) All vector data including text that is converted into outline (object type Graphics) All text created with fonts instead of outlines (object type Text) Enable and disable input color management for monochrome (grayscale) objects (Treat gray as RGB) Convert DeviceN color spaces into CMYK to ensure color management is applied Work with a predefined printer profile if no profile is specified in the print environment Control the PDF/X workflow and settings.

PostScript and PDF Color Management

3

PostScript/PDF Color Management V14 vs. v.2008  The PostScript/PDF color management within v.2008 and V14 is essentially identical. In some cases it may be necessary to check Use CMYK color management for DeviceN color spaces in V14 to achieve comparable printouts from both RIP versions.

Legacy Color Management vs. PostScript/PDF Interpreter CM  The two color management methods generally produce different color output results. These differences can be quite pronounced especially when printing a RGB generated PDF file on a CMYK based printer, and working with a CMYK generated PDF file using an RGB print environment. In most cases, it is therefore recommended to use the PostScript/PDF Interpreter color management. There is one special set of printing conditions where, in most cases, both color management methods produce identical results. This is when the file only contains CMYK data and the PostScript/PDF interpreter color management is configured such that the Use images profile for all types option is checked or the same input profile and rendering intent for all three object types is selected, Use embedded option is not checked, and Use CMYK color management for DeviceN color spaces option is checked. All other combinations of image data and color management settings will generally produce different output colors.

PostScript and PDF Color Management

4

Spot Color Replacement Using “Named Colors Profiles”  The ErgoSoft RIP provides an option to automatically replace spot colors (e.g. Pantone colors) with color recipes in the Named Colors Profile. For detailed information about this function please see the application note about color replacement.

x

x

Replacing  Spot  Color  Gradients  Gradients from either white or black to a spot color or from one spot color to another spot color are often saved as DeviceN color spaces. In order to automatically replace these types of gradients with Named Colors, the Use “Named Colors Profile” to interpret DeviceN color spaces option must be checked.

Spot Color Replacement and Transparencies  When transparencies are flattened, spot color information is often lost in transparent regions of the file and automatic spot color replacement will not work. In general, avoid flattening transparencies when spot color replacement is used.

Option “Use embedded”  When PostScript and PDF applications typically save or export a document, they often embed the application profile as input profile and the application rendering intent. When the Use embedded option is checked, the ErgoSoft RIP applies the embedded input profile and embedded rendering intent for color conversion. If the application creating the Postscript/PDF does not explicitly indicate which rendering intent is being selected, it is recommended to keep the Use embedded option unchecked and instead work with the desired external input profiles and rendering intents selected from the pulldown menu options for the three object types.

PostScript and PDF Color Management

5

Transparencies  In most cases, users intentionally create transparencies to produce a specific printed output result. However, they are typically unaware that the image editing and document design software (e.g. Adobe Illustrator) may also automatically apply transparencies for as part of their document design functionality. Typical examples for automatic transparencies include text or frame objects with shadows or objects placed on top of gradient objects. When saved, the file format may preserve or automatically flatten transparencies as shown in the table below. Document Format

Handling of Transparencies

EPS

Flattens

PDF/A

Flattens

PDF 1.3

Flattens

PDF/X – 3

Flattens

PDF 1.4 and higher

Preserves

AI (all CS Versions)

Preserves

PDF/X – 4

Preserves

Known Problems with Transparencies  Some software applications may save PDF files with transparencies in a way that can potentially generate unexpected output results when processed by the PostScript interpreter. Reading PDF files with complex transparencies is more memory intensive and can slow down the processing and printing of the file.

Known Problems with Flattened Transparencies  Flattening transparencies requires transparent regions of a file to be rasterized while other regions remain in vector format. The combination of vector and raster regions in many cases produces objectionable image artifacts and unexpected colors results. This is especially the case when a specific vector object is partially rasterized in the flattening process. The color issues become more acute if different input profiles and rendering intents are applied for Images (Raster) and Graphics (Vector) objects. Spot color information is often removed when flattening transparencies and automatic spot color replacement cannot be used. It is therefore recommended to avoid flattening transparencies when using spot color replacement.

PostScript and PDF Color Management

6

Options for Printing Flattened Transparencies  Since the legacy color management for PostScript/PDF files only uses a single input profile and rendering intent for all data, working with the legacy color management method is the easiest solution for PostScript/PDF files in CMYK format (or RGB formatted Postscript/PDF files using RGB print environments). When the PostScript/ PDF file contains a mixture of CMYK and RGB data, the PostScript/PDF interpreter color management should be used to apply the correct color conversion for each color type. To overcome color differences between vector and flattened transparent regions, the same input profile and rendering intents need to be applied to all object types. This only works if the raster and vector data are in the same color data format. This can be done either by selecting the input profile and rendering intent manually or by checking Use images profile for all types. In either case, do not check Use embedded. In the figure, the settings for RGB data avoid the problem with flattened transparencies. The settings for CMYK data will still result in issues because the settings differ for each of the object types both in terms of input profile and rendering intent.

PostScript and PDF Color Management

7

PDF/X  PDF/X is a standard for creating color managed PDF files for the graphic arts and conventional printing industry. The PDF/X file contains embedded profiles, rendering intents, and the description of the output color space (output intent). The output intent within a PDF/X file is less suited for digital printing workflows. The PDF/X settings are meant for experienced users that want to have more control over their documents. In most cases it is inadvisable to check the PDF/X settings. One specific exception would be when the PDF/X file contains colors that are already converted to the output intent and do not contain an embedded input profile. In this instance, the embedded output intent can be used as an input profile in order to revert back to deviceindependent colors.

PostScript and PDF Color Management

8

CorelDRAW X5 – Using Spot Colors  When spot colors (e.g. Pantone colors) are used in PostScript/PDF files for automatic color replacement with Named Colors Profiles, do not check Convert spot colors to on the Colors tab of the PDF settings dialog. With this setting for PDF export, colors that are selected from a color palette or library (e.g. Pantone Color Library) are saved together with the color name so that automatic spot color replacement can be applied to the file.

DeviceN Color Spaces  DeviceN color spaces are defined as multi-channel color spaces that do not match CMYK, RGB, Lab, and Grayscale. Examples of DeviceN colors include Gradients from RGB or CMYK to a spot color, Gradients from one spot color to another spot color, and Mixtures of spot colors The PostScript/PDF interpreter color management allows the user to Automatically convert DeviceN color spaces into CMYK using the alternative colors that are saved together with the spot color in the PDF, and Use automatic color replacement with Named Colors Profiles for complete control over the ink mixings for DeviceN colors

PostScript and PDF Color Management

9

PDF Files Created with Adobe CS5  Adobe CS5 often automatically converts black-only CMYK gradients into the monochrome color space (grayscale color space). By default, the monochrome color space is printed in the ErgoSoft RIP without color management. To activate color management for colors saved in the monochrome color space, check Treat gray as RGB (Otherwise it is treated as K) to automatically convert all gray values into the RGB color space with equal values for all 3 components. It is important to note that Illustrator may choose to save CMYK gradients in a DeviceN color space (with Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black as DeviceN color channels) as opposed to CMYK process colors. Because of this, it is highly recommended to ensure that the Use CMYK color management for DeviceN color spaces option is checked.

PostScript and PDF Color Management

10

Recommendations for Saving PDF Files  PDF export/saving dialogs normally offer numerous options. Some of these options are important for optimal printing. The following information illustrates these options with the help of the PDF export dialog of Adobe Illustrator CS3. Other PDF export dialogs may look different, but the mentioned options are typically available. Most of the recommendations below do not depend on the selected PDF version unless specifically noted for PDF compatibility and compliance.

Selecting the PDF Version  The selection of the PDF version (Compatibility) depends on some other options, you want to use. Automatic flattening of transparencies requires that you save in Compatibility “Adobe 4 (PDF 1.3)”. Keeping transparencies require that you save in any higher Compatibility than PDF 1.3, e.g. “Adobe 5 (PDF 1.4)” which we recommend. The PDF/X versions (Standard) may be linked to specific compatibility requirements (PDF/X3 or higher recommended). Please read the chapter “PDF/X” for hints on its usage.

PostScript and PDF Color Management

11

Saving Raster Data  Raster data that are included in PDF files can be compressed as well as converted into lower resolutions. Most of the available presets may hold quality problems so that you should check the settings for Compression.

1 2

To reduce the file size, raster data 1 often is compressed. This Compression method (automatic, JPEG, JPEG2000, ZIP, etc.) may not only reduce the file size but also the quality of the saved raster data. All JPEG compression methods will reduce the file size by reducing the quality of the data; the ZIP compression methods just reduce the file size but not the quality. ZIP compressions always results in larger file sizes than JPEG compressions, but the quality of the raster data is (much) higher. Thus, we strongly recommend favoring the ZIP compression methods over the other options. Automatically downsampling images reduces the PDF file size as well as the resolution. For optimal image quality it is generally recommended to select Do not Downsample. When you run into the limits of the PostScript interpreter for embedded raster data, which is 2 GB for all raster data (uncompressed) in the PDF file, it is necessary to save them in lower resolution. When the limit of PostScript interpreter is reached (PostScript error -25), you may either Split multi-page PDFs into several one-page PDFs or Downsample high-resolution bitmap images to a lower resolution. For information on the downsampling methods, please refer to the documentation of your image editing or document design software. 2

PostScript and PDF Color Management

12

Color Spaces  When saving the PDF file, all colors may be converted into one single output space (e.g. converting RGB colors into a CMYK color space). To keep the original colors and 1 benefit from the possibilities of the PostScript/PDF interpreter color management, we recommend to select No Conversion for Color Conversion options.

1 2 3

The input profile and possibly the rendering intent that are selected in the color management setting of your image editing software may be embedded in the PDF. Please refer to the chapter “Option “Use embedded” for more information. For future reference about the color setup of the PDF file, it may be useful to embed profiles without using them for the PostScript/PDF interpreter color management (but when later re-opening the PDF in the image editing software). 2

3

Please read the chapter “PDF/X” for hints on the usage of PDF/X.

Fonts  For compatibility reasons with other operating systems we recommend to either embed the fonts in the PDF file, convert all text into outlines or convert some text into outlines and embed the remaining fonts. Text generated with embedded fonts will be recognized as a Text object type while text converted with outlines become Graphics object types. It is important to note that text in a file without an associated embedded font may be rendered incorrectly.

PostScript and PDF Color Management

13

Transparency Flattening  Automatic transparency flattening is only available for PDF 1.3 format. For higher PDF formats, transparencies must be flattened manually when needed. Please note that we do not recommend manual flattening of transparencies when you want to benefit from the PostScript/PDF interpreter color management. For high-quality printing, we strongly recommend to select High Resolution options for transparency flattening. But keep in mind that you might run into some limits of the PostScript interpreter related to raster data (see chapter “Saving Raster Data” for more information).

PostScript and PDF Color Management

14

PDF File Preparation and RIP Settings Overview  Below is a summary of general recommendations for creating, saving and ripping PDF files for optimal color results.

PDF File Creation Guidelines  Embed all fonts used in the file or convert text to outlines Avoid using color conversion when saving file Use ZIP compression for images within the file Downsample images only if absolutely necessary Embed input profiles in file and record rendering intent for optimal color conversion To preserve transparencies, save file either as PDF/X-4 or PDF 1.4 (or greater). It is advisable to preserve transparencies when using spot color replacement. To flatten transparencies, save file either as PDF/X-3 or PDF 1.3. It is recommended to use the same profile and rendering intent for all object types (Images, Graphics and Text).

RIP Setting Guidelines  Check Use PostScript/PDF interpreter color management Check Use Embedded if the input profile and rendering intent are known for the file. Otherwise uncheck this option and manually assign the profile and rendering intent for each object type. Check Use CMYK color management for DeviceN color spaces to ensure all colors are correctly color managed. For monochrome files, check Treat gray as RGB (Otherwise it is treated as K) in order to apply color management. Check Use “Named Colors Profile” for spot color replacement when replacing spot colors in a file with Named Color recipes.

PostScript and PDF Color Management

15

Application Notes "EPCF1%'1SJOU &OHJOF "11&

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2012 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Requirements for Using the Adobe® PDF Print Engine .............................................................................2 Installing Adobe® PDF Print Engine ............................................................................................................2 Activating/Deactivating Adobe® PDF Print Engine .....................................................................................3 Global Activation/Deactivation.......................................................................................................................3 Activation/Deactivation for Single PDF Files .............................................................................................4 Configuring PDF Color Management ................................................................................................................5 Recommendations for Using Adobe® PDF Print Engine ...........................................................................7 Saving PDF Files ...................................................................................................................................................7 Selecting the PDF Version ..........................................................................................................................7 Saving Raster Data ........................................................................................................................................8 Color Spaces ....................................................................................................................................................9 Fonts ...................................................................................................................................................................9 Transparency Flattening ........................................................................................................................... 10 System Configuration...................................................................................................................................... 10 Limitations of the Adobe® PDF Print Engine .............................................................................................. 11

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

ii

Introduction Starting with version 14.1, the Adobe® PDF Print Engine 2.5 is implemented in the ErgoSoft RIP software. With the Adobe® PDF Print Engine 2.5 (APPE 2.5) the ErgoSoft AG now supports the latest PDF workflow technology. The Adobe® PDF Print Engine 2.5 is available as an option to the complete product range of the ErgoSoft RIP that includes support of PostScript/PDF files and is setting new standards for the handling of PDF files. Adobe® PDF Print Engine 2.5 (APPE 2.5) Options The Adobe® PDF Print Engine 2.5 ensures fast, reliable, and consistent printing even for complex PDF designs. The Adobe® PDF Print Engine 2.5 eliminates the need for early conversions such as color conversions or flattening transparency. Even gradients from one spot color to another do not need any special treatment. The Adobe® PDF Print Engine 2.5 leverages the same PDF rendering libraries, color management systems, and other technology components used in Adobe Acrobat® and Adobe Creative Suite, ensuring that complex designs and effects, such as transparency, can be consistently reproduced. This document explains the installation, activation and usage of the Adobe® PDF Print Engine. It also explains the color management settings and gives recommendations for PDF file creation and system configuration. All information in this document are for usage with Adobe® PDF Print Engine only and replace the information of other application notes to PostScript and PDF color management when different.

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

1

Requirements for Using the Adobe® PDF Print Engine In order to use the Adobe® PDF Print Engine the following requirements must be met: The license must include the APPE option, Minimum version 14.1.1. of the ErgoSoft RIP is installed on your system. The APPE update is also installed on your system.

Installing Adobe® PDF Print Engine Before installing the APPE update (link for download) close all open modules of the ErgoSoft RIP including JobComposer, JobCenter, Rip Servers, and Print Clients. After having downloaded the APPE update (link for download) double-click the *.esup14 file (14.1.1.4803 Adobe APPE.esup14) to start the ErgoSoft update installer. Please note that you need to have administrator rights for your Windows system in order to install the update. 1

2a 2b

Ensure that your version of the ErgoSoft RIP is minimum V14.1.1 (2a) and that 2c the name of the update is Adobe PDF Print Engine Update (2b) before you click the Install button (2c). The update will automatically close still running processes of the ErgoSoft RIP. 2

When the update is installed successfully (3a) click the Close button (3b) to close the ErgoSoft update installer. The Adobe® PDF Print Engine is now ready to be used. 3

3a 3b

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

2

Activating/Deactivating Adobe® PDF Print Engine The Adobe® PDF Print Engine can be configured that it will be used For all PDF files that are imported after having activated the Adobe® PDF Print Engine (global activation) For each PDF file in a job separately (activation for single PDF files)

Global Activation/Deactivation 1

Launch menu Tools > Options to open the global settings.

1

In the left tree menu, select Preferences > Image > PostScript/PDF Parameters to open the PostScript/PDF options dialog. 2

3

Select the Interpreter for PDF Rendering: Selecting Ghostscript will activate the default PostScript/PDF interpreter (Artifex Ghostscript). Selecting Adobe APPE will activate the Adobe® PDF Print Engine for rasterizing PDF files; PostScript files will still be rasterized using Artifex Ghostscript.

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

3 2

3

Activation/Deactivation for Single PDF Files Right-click on the PDF file in the job and select Edit Parameters from the Image Context Menu or select menu Image > Edit Parameters to open the PostScript/PDF Parameters dialog. 1

2

Select the Interpreter for PDF Rendering: Selecting Ghostscript will activate the default PostScript/PDF interpreter (Artifex Ghostscript). Selecting Adobe APPE will activate the Adobe® PDF Print Engine for rasterizing PDF files; PostScript files will still be rasterized using Artifex Ghostscript.

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

1

2

4

Configuring PDF Color Management To set the color management for the selected image(s), select Color Management in the Properties window. 1

2

3 1

Select a preset for PostScript/PDF files.

2

3

The current settings can be edited. 3 Furthermore, a new preset can be created based on the current one. 4

The global color management is set in menu Tools > Options.

7

For automatic color replacement the spot color names in the PDF file must match (case-sensitive) with color names in the Named Colors Profile. 5

6

The current settings can be saved as a preset.

5

6

4

8 9

When using the Adobe® PDF Print Engine for rasterizing PDF files, the color space of PDF file is set to “separated” (SEP in the status bar of the program window) so that no additional color management is used.

10

7

8

The Adobe® PDF Print Engine supports the following options: The color management can be specified separately for both CMYK and RGB data. Different input profiles and different rendering intents can be used for images (raster data), graphics (vector data), and text. Embedded profiles can be used together with the embedded rendering intent instead of external profiles and rendering intents that are selected in the list.

Checking Adobe APPE: Use black point compensation will activate the Adobe® black point compensation. Please note that the rendering intent type “relative colorimetric black point compensation” of the global settings will be automatically converted into “relative colorimetric” when using the Adobe® PDF Print Engine. 9

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

5

The PDF/X and advanced settings allow to: If the current print environment does not use a printer profile, the Default Output Profile of the PostScript/PDF color management is used. When there is not an embedded input profile in the PDF file but an embedded 10 output intent, the embedded output intent can be used as an input profile (PDF/X: Use embedded output intent, if no embedded input profile is available). Embedded input profiles take priority over the embedded output intent which takes priority over external input profiles. The embedded output intent can be used instead of the printer profile provided in the print environment (PDF/X: Use embedded output intent as output profile). Hints for using PDF/X options PDF/X is a standard for creating color managed PDF files for the graphic arts and conventional printing industry. The PDF/X file contains embedded profiles, rendering intents, and the description of the output color space (output intent). The output intent within a PDF/X file is less suited for digital printing workflows. The PDF/X settings are meant for experienced users that want to have more control over their documents. In most cases it is inadvisable to check the PDF/X settings. One specific exception would be when the PDF/X file contains colors that are already converted to the output intent and do not contain an embedded input profile. In this instance, the embedded output intent can be used as an input profile in order to revert back to device-independent colors.

10

Please remember that the output of the Adobe® PDF Print Engine is already color managed and will be treated as separated files by the ErgoSoft RIP. This means that additional color manipulation functionalities like color replacement and tuning will not be available. The following options are only available in the global color management settings for compatibility reasons when using the Artifex Ghostscript interpreter for rendering. When using Adobe® PDF Print Engine, these options are ignored: Treat gray as RGB (Otherwise it is treated as K) Use CMYK color management for DeviceN color spaces. Use “Named Colors Profile” to interpret DeviceN color spaces PDF/X: Use embedded output intent as printer simulation profile

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

6

Recommendations for Using Adobe® PDF Print Engine Saving PDF Files PDF export/saving dialogs normally offer numerous options. Some of these options are important for optimal printing. The following information illustrates these options with the help of the PDF export dialog of Adobe Illustrator CS3. Other PDF export dialogs may look different, but the mentioned options are typically available. Most of the recommendations below do not depend on the selected PDF version unless specifically noted for PDF compatibility and compliance.

Selecting the PDF Version The selection of the PDF version (Compatibility) depends on some other options, you want to use. Automatic flattening of transparencies requires that you save in Compatibility “Adobe 4 (PDF 1.3)”. Keeping transparencies require that you save in any higher Compatibility than PDF 1.3, e.g. “Adobe 5 (PDF 1.4)”. The PDF/X versions (Standard) may be linked to specific compatibility requirements (PDF/X-3 or higher recommended). Please read the “Hints for using PDF/X options” for information on its usage.

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

7

Saving Raster Data Raster data that are included in PDF files can be compressed as well as converted into lower resolutions. Most of the available presets may hold quality problems so that you should check the settings for Compression.

1 2

To reduce the file size, raster data often is compressed. This Compression method (automatic, JPEG, JPEG2000, ZIP, etc.) may not only reduce the file size but also the quality of the saved raster data. All JPEG compression methods will reduce the file size by reducing the quality of the data; the ZIP compression methods just reduce the file size but not the quality. ZIP compressions always results in larger file sizes than JPEG compressions, but the quality of the raster data is (much) higher. Thus, we strongly recommend favoring the ZIP compression methods over the other options. 1

2

Automatically downsampling images reduces the PDF file size as well as the resolution. For optimal image quality it is generally recommended to select Do not Downsample.

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

8

Color Spaces When saving the PDF file, all colors may be converted into one single output space (e.g. converting RGB colors into a CMYK color space). To keep the original colors and benefit from the possibilities of the Adobe® PDF Print Engine color management, we recommend to select No Conversion for Color Conversion options. 1

1 2 3

The input profile and possibly the rendering intent that are selected in the color management setting of your image editing software may be embedded in the PDF and used for printing to replace the selection in the list of input profiles and rendering intents. For future reference about the color setup of the PDF file, it may be useful to embed profiles without using them for the Adobe® PDF Print Engine color management (but when later re-opening the PDF in the image editing software). 2

3

Please read the “Hints for using PDF/X options” for information on the usage of PDF/X.

Fonts For compatibility reasons with other operating systems we recommend to either embed the fonts in the PDF file, convert all text into outlines or convert some text into outlines and embed the remaining fonts. Text generated with embedded fonts will be recognized as a Text object type while text converted with outlines become Graphics object types. It is important to note that text in a file without an associated embedded font may be rendered incorrectly.

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

9

Transparency Flattening Automatic transparency flattening is only available for PDF 1.3 format. For higher PDF formats, transparencies must be flattened manually when needed. Please note that we do not recommend manual flattening of transparencies when you want to benefit from the Adobe® PDF Print Engine color management. For high-quality printing, we strongly recommend to select High Resolution options for transparency flattening.

System Configuration Converting PDF files into printer dependent data requires two steps: Step 1: Rasterizing the PDF file which means that the complete file is converted into raster information. Step 2: Ripping the rasterized data which means that the data that is saved in step 1 is converted into printer dependent data which can be sent to the printer. Since the generation of the raster data and the ripping of the raster data can be divided over multiple CPU cores the calculation time will be reduced if more CPU cores are available. Especially when multiple instances of the RIP Server are running in parallel a multi-core system is advised. Tests showed that having more CPU power reduces rastering and ripping time more than having more cores with less CPU power. The Hyper-threading option for Intel CPU’s does not improve the calculation time but even may slow it down. As conclusion, at least two CPU cores per RIP Server are recommended. Memory (RAM) also has a big impact on calculation time. The amount of RAM and the frequency (memory speed) at which they are clocked is important. When using a 32 bit operating system, the maximum amount of RAM that can be used is limited by the operating system. When using a 64 bit operating system you can benefit from its RAM usage: For 64 bit operating systems, 2 GB of RAM for Windows plus 2 GB of RAM per RIP Server is recommended. If for example the license for the ErgoSoft RIP allows using 2 RIP Servers the computer should have 6 GB of RAM. Fast memory of type DDR-3 (PC10600, PC12800, PC16000, …) is recommended.

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

10

Limitations of the Adobe® PDF Print Engine Compared to the Artifex Ghostscript PostScript interpreter the Adobe® PDF Print Engine has the following limitations: The number of DeviceLink profile channels has to match the number of the output profile channels. Simulation profiles, which are set in the print environment on the tab “Extras” for simulation another output device, are ignored when using the Adobe® PDF Print Engine.

Adobe PDF Print Engine (APPE)

11

Application Notes Image Color Control

Image Color Control

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Image Color Control

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Image Color Management .....................................................................................................................................1 Raster Data Color Management ....................................................................................................................1 PostScript/PDF Color Management..............................................................................................................3 Color Management for OPI Images ..............................................................................................................5 Direct Image Color Control....................................................................................................................................6 Tuning ......................................................................................................................................................................6 Pure Colors .............................................................................................................................................................7 Replace Colors ......................................................................................................................................................8

Image Color Control

ii

Introduction The tools for image color control are separated into two groups. The first group, the input color management, influences the complete image by using a certain profile or rule to convert the image color space into Lab. The second group, the direct color control, is used to modify the image or to control the output color of a certain part of the image to manually make sure that certain colors are printed as expected.

Image Color Management Images can be created using different sources and color settings. Thus, in order to convert the image color space correctly into Lab, the “correct” conversion must be used. This is done by using an input profile. As a special case, PostScript files and PDF files can include objects with different color spaces as well as different object types. The ErgoSoft RIPs offer a sophisticated PostScript Color Management to deal with these files. The color management can be set globally as preset for imported images and for each image separately. The global setting is done in menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Image > Color Management where you select Input profiles for raster data and PostScript/PDF for PostScript and PDF files. The color management for the selected image is set using the command Color Management resp. Color Management PS/PDF in the image Properties window.

Raster Data Color Management To set the color management for the selected image(s), select Color Management in the Properties window. 1

Select the color profile in the list that corresponds to the source of the image data. When only one image is selected, the effects of the selected color profile can be seen in the preview window. When there is a color profile embedded in the image file that the ErgoSoft RIP can use, the list is enlarged by an entry “(Embedded)”. Profiles that are embedded in image files that are created with Adobe Photoshop version 5 or later can normally be used.

1

2

Image Color Control

2 3

1

Select the Rendering intent to be used for printing the selected image when the corresponding conversion table is saved in the printer profile. When the conversion table is not saved in the printer profile the first conversion table is used (Automatic). 3

The global color management is set in menu Tools > Options. It allows the image data profile – separate for RGB, 5 CMYK, and Lab images – to be specified 6 4 that is to be used as default when images are imported that cannot be treated with 2 the special PostScript color management such as TIFF files, JPEG files, DCS files, etc. RGB input profiles are profiles that are 3 able to convert RGB image data into Lab mode. 7 CMYK input profiles are profiles that are able to convert CMYK image data into Lab mode. Lab input profiles are only needed in some special cases where – for a certain intention – a sort of conversion from one Lab basement to another Lab basement is needed. The ErgoSoft RIP installation includes some standard RGB and CMYK profiles. 4

Mark Use profiles embedded in image data files to use the profile as input profile that is saved within the image file. Restriction: The image file has to be created using ADOBE PHOTOSHOP version 5.0 or higher. When Ask on missing embedded profile is checked, you have to select the input profile whenever an image without embedded profile is imported. 5

Clicking on Delete removes the selected profile after confirmation from the hard disk. Clicking on Import helps in importing color profiles to the folders in which the ErgoSoft RIP expects them to be. 6

Some special workflow simulations may require that the image data have to Use colorimetric rendering intent for input profile while the printout needs any other rendering intent. 7

For information about the rending intent and about using image data profiles please refer to the manual part about Color Management.

Image Color Control

2

PostScript/PDF Color Management To set the color management for the selected image(s), select Color Management in the Properties window. 1

2

3 1

Select a preset for PostScript/PDF files.

2

3

The current settings can be edited. Furthermore, a new preset can be created based on the current one. 3

4

The global color management is set in menu Tools > Options.

7

For automatic color replacement the spot color names in the PostScript or PDF file must match (case-sensitive) with color names in the Named Colors Profile. 5

6

The current settings can be saved as a preset.

7

5

6

4

8

9

For PostScript or PDF files, the color 7 management of the PostScript interpreter can be used. Then, the color space of image is set to “separated” (SEP in the status bar of the program window) so that no additional color management is used. The color management in the ErgoSoft RIP rasterizes PostScript files into the color space of the current print environment. It allows assigning default input profiles and rendering intents for the rasterization into the CMYK color space as well as into the RGB color space. These settings can be different from the default input profile and rendering intent for raster images. When the PostScript file contains data of another color space than the output color space we strongly recommend to use the color management of the PostScript Interpreter. 8

Instead of assigning an input profile to the rasterized data the color management of the PostScript Interpreter can be controlled during the rasterization process: The color management can be specified separately for both CMYK and RGB data. Different input profiles and different rendering intents can be used for images (raster data), graphics (vector data), and text. Embedded profiles can be used instead of external profiles.

Image Color Control

3

9

The PDF/X (only available for PDF files) and advanced settings allow to: Convert gray (monochrome) color spaces into RGB so that they are printed with all inks instead of printing them only with black and gray inks. When all channel names of a DeviceN color space match (case sensitive) with color names in the Named Colors Profile, the mixtures in the Named Colors Profile are used to convert the DeviceN color space into CMYK. If the current print environment does not use a printer profile, the Default Output Profile of the PostScript/PDF color management is used. When there is not an embedded input profile in the PDF file but an embedded output intent, the embedded output intent can be used as an input profile. Embedded input profiles take priority over the embedded output intent which takes priority over external input profiles. When Use embedded output intent as printer simulation profiles is checked, the intention of using a certain profile (Gamut) when creating the PDF file is taken into consideration during printing. This may result in a smaller gamut than the gamut that printouts with your printer normally have. The embedded output intent can be used instead of the printer profile provided in the print environment.

Please note that activating the color management of the PostScript Interpreter will treat PostScript files as separated files so that the color replacement and tuning functionality will not be available.

Image Color Control

4

Color Management for OPI Images To set the color management for the selected OPI image, you first have to activate the Legacy mode for the context menu using menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Application > User Interface Preferences. We recommend setting this configuration back to Standard when having finished working with the OPI image because this setting reduces the image context menu by all entries that are available directly in the image Properties window to enhance the clearness of the image context menu. 1

2

1

1

Select Color Management from the Image Context Menu (right-click on the im-

age). The ErgoSoft RIP allows a color profile for the PostScript part to be selected and for each image linked via OPI by marking the components one after the other. The mark can be moved to any component. Click on OK to start assigning a color profile. PostScript marks the PostScript part of the file. The linked images are listed by names. When the desired color profiles have been assigned, the dialog box can be closed by clicking the Close button. 3

Image Color Control

2

3

5

Direct Image Color Control In addition to the input color management, the ErgoSoft RIP offers some additional tools to control the colors in an image.

Tuning The Tuning tool can be used to make color corrections to the current image. Please note that this function is not intended to replace an image editing program; it is only meant to be a tool for global changes in the image. Since it allows complex changes to the image within its restrictions, tuning presets can be created. For more information please refer to the manual part about image presets (“Image Editing Automation”).

Image Color Control

6

Pure Colors The Pure Colors tools allows printing pure CMYK and/or RGB image colors automatically using pure inks without adding few dots in other inks. The settings can be done globally to be assigned when images are imported or for the selected image(s). The pure color function is launched for global settings by selecting menu Tools > Options and for the selected image by selecting the function Pure Colors in the image Properties window. 1

The dialog allows specifying the pure colors that should not be modified by the color management. 2

1

1

2

2

The colors for the Pure Colors tool must be realized as follows: in CMYK

in RGB

Cyan Magenta Yellow Red Green Blue White Gray

100% C 100% M 100% Y 100% M + 100% Y 100% C + 100% Y 100% C + 100% M all values 0% any % K

Black only

100% K

255 G + 255 B 255 R + 255 B 255 R + 255 G 255 R 255 G 255 B all values 255 R + G + B with same value, e.g. 175 R + 175 G + 175 B all values 0

Image Color Control

7

The sample below shows the resulting printout. The left images are CMYK with the values of above table, the right images are RGB with the values of above table. The upper images use input profile and go through the color management; the lower images use input profile and Pure Colors (all possibilities selected). 3

Please note that the printout uses a very rough raster for better visualization.

Replace Colors The color replacement functions allow customizing the ink mixture of certain colors in the images according to your needs and letting the color management control the ink mixtures of the rest of the image. For more information please refer to the manual part about Color Replacement.

Image Color Control

8

Application Notes Image Editing

Image Editing

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Image Editing

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Grouping and Combining Images .......................................................................................................................1 Grouped Images...................................................................................................................................................1 Combined Images / Overlays ..........................................................................................................................2 Color Control ...............................................................................................................................................................2 Image Layout...............................................................................................................................................................3 Tiling Images .........................................................................................................................................................3 Overlap Type "Symmetric" .........................................................................................................................5 Overlap Type "Symmetric White" ............................................................................................................6 Overlap Type "Right White / Bottom White" ......................................................................................7 Overlap Type "Left White / Top White".................................................................................................8 Overlap Type "Half Transparent" .............................................................................................................9 Resizing Images................................................................................................................................................. 10 Printing Marks .................................................................................................................................................... 10 AddOns ................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Using Automatic Elements .................................................................................................................................. 11 Generating Rectangles.................................................................................................................................... 11 Generating Solid Black Lines ........................................................................................................................ 11 Generating Dashed Black Lines ................................................................................................................... 11 Generating Text Elements ............................................................................................................................. 12

Image Editing

ii

Introduction The image editing functions can be separated into two functional groups: Functions that are simple and easy to use so that they do not need a detailed description (such as moving an image, rotating, etc.) and more complex functions with features that are not obvious at first sight. This documentation focuses on the more complex functions. For the simple and easy to use functions please refer to the Reference Manual. Many of the image editing functions can be automated by creating presets with the appropriate configuration and just select those instead of entering the settings each time manually. For a description of the presets please refer to the manual part about presets (“Image Editing Automation”). The most important image editing functions are launched by selecting the command in the Image Properties window. Others can be launched by selecting the command in the Image context menu or in the Image menu.

Grouping and Combining Images Besides the possibility to select several images for positioning, rotating, etc. there are two major methods to link images together: grouping images and combining images.

Grouped Images Grouped images are linked together with a frame but each image in the group keeps it individual image properties such as print marks, AddOns, etc. Image editing functions such as mirroring, AddOns, etc. are applied to each image in the group. Images in a group do not need to touch each other. To group images: Mark all images you want to group by holding the Ctrl key and clicking the images or frame the wanted images with the mouse so that they are selected. Select the Group command from the Image context menu or the Image menu or press Shift+G. To ungroup images just select the image group and launch the Group command. Please note that you should do all image editing before grouping images. Image Editing

1

Combined Images / Overlays Combined images are not only linked together; they are combined to act as one overlay image. The images in the overlay loose the individual properties such as AddOns, print marks, etc. Image editing commands apply to the complete overlay so that e.g. print marks are positioned at the border of the overlay or AddOns frame the complete overlay and not the individual images that form the overlay. To create overlays With Overlay mode activated in menu Edit or in the Edit toolbar: Just drag one image (partly) on top of another image and release the mouse button. With Overlay mode not activated: Drag one image (partly) on top of another image and press the Alt key while releasing the mouse button. The overlay will be created automatically with the image on top being opaque. Please note that you can move just one image on top of other images for creating overlays. Thus, when you need to position several images on top of one image you have to create a nested overlay with always one image being dragged over another image or overlay. To re-separate the images, select the command Split Overlay from the Image context menu or press Shift+O. The overlay will be split into the image on top and the bottom image or overlay with the image on top becoming transparent. To position an image transparently over another one, you have to create an overlay and split it or use the Position command in the image Properties window with the option Allow Overlay checked. Use the Group command to link the images together.

Color Control The ErgoSoft RIP offers sophisticated tools to control the color of images. Those tools include assigning and configuring input color management (Color Management), specifying the basic colors of RGB and CMYK color spaces remaining pure (Pure Colors), modifying the color channels and color balance in an image (Tuning) as well as replacing selected colors (Color Replacement). These complex topics are described in a separate manual part about Image Color Control to which you should consult for more information.

Image Editing

2

Image Layout Tiling Images When importing an image that is wider than the job, the image is automatically tiled. Automatic tiling is also used when an image is scaled to a size wider than the job. The settings for automatic tiling are described in the manual part about Workflow Configuration. To manually tile the current image select the command Tile from the Image Properties window. The features of the tiling function are spread over three tabs. For many image editing functions such as AddOns, print marks, etc. the tiles are linked together to form one image. To treat each tile as an image of its own you have to unlink them using the command Disconnect Parts in the Image context menu or the Image menu. 1

1

Enter the width and height of the tiles on the tabs Horizontal and Vertical. Mark the column or row for which the value is to be modified in the list. Modify the value in the fields Column x and Row x and then press Enter to confirm the entry. You may not only enter absolute values for the size but also the number of tiles as part of 1, e.g. 1/3 for 3 equal tiles. Please note: the desired width and height may not be accurately represented.

5

3

2

Click on the tiles that are not to be inserted into the job. An “X” in a red square marks tiles that are not selected. The “X” (de-selection) can be removed by clicking again on the tiles. Click on Select All on the Options tab to insert all tiles into the job; de-selection is canceled. Click on Deselect All to deselect all tiles. This means that no tile is to be inserted. These buttons can be used to first select or deselect all tiles and then select or deselect certain tiles.

2 7

2 7

3

Image Editing

4 3 6

3

Mark Rotate tiles by turns on the Options tab when every second tile should be rotated by 180°. Some printers change the shade within one printed row. This causes color leaps when tiled images are put together. These color leaps can be avoided by rotating every second tile by 180°. An up arrow in a red square marks rotated tiles. Check Put each tile on a separate page to automatically spread the tiles over job pages. Having spread the tile over job pages helps in reprinting single tiles because then you just have to reprint job pages from the Print Client or JobCenter. Please note that the global setting is used as default when launching the tiling function – even when the image is already manually tiled. 4

The tiling line between two tiles can be moved. For that purpose, make the image window active and move the cutting line to the desired position by pressing the left mouse button. Use the four buttons in the toolbar of the image preview window to zoom in or out or to adjust the image to the window after having scaled it. Use the Hand tool to move the visible part of the image in the window. 5

The buttons Save… and Load… on the Options tab open a dialog box to save or load the current tiling settings. Please note that the loaded tiling settings are not adjusted automatically to a possibly different size of the image so that you have to control and adjust the tile sizes manually. 6

When the tiles should overlap, enter the Overlap width. The stripe that appears between the tiles will not be printed when a negative number is entered. With tiled images, adding the amount of overlap to the adjoining tiles may ease assembly into the large image. There are several overlap types available for positive overlap: symmetric, symmetric white, right white, left white, and half transparent. The following overlap characteristics are independent from the overlap type. it applies for every tile it has the same value for each column or row it affects the tile size tiles are measured from center of overlap to center of overlap at the same side of the next tile 7

Image Editing

4

Overlap Type "Symmetric" Overlap type "Symmetric" adds one-half of the indicated overlap to the border between each tile. The overlapping parts are printed with both tiles so that they can be cut off, if need. The sample at the right side shows the result of the tiling without (upper image) and with (lower image) dashed cut lines.

Image Editing

5

Overlap Type "Symmetric White" Overlap type "Symmetric white" adds white overlap instead of repeating a part of the image. The sample at the right side shows the result of the tiling without (upper image) and with (lower image) dashed cut lines.

Image Editing

6

Overlap Type "Right White / Bottom White" Overlap type "Right white / Bottom white" adds white overlap only at the right side / bottom of the tile. The sample at the right side shows the result of the tiling without (upper image) and with (lower image) dashed cut lines.

Image Editing

7

Overlap Type "Left White / Top White" Overlap type "Left white / Top white" adds white overlap only at the left side / top of the tile. The sample at the right side shows the result of the tiling without (upper image) and with (lower image) dashed cut lines.

Image Editing

8

Overlap Type "Half Transparent" Overlap type "Half transparent" is a symmetric overlap and repeats a part of the image in half transparent layout. The sample at the right side shows the result of the tiling without (upper image) and with (lower image) dashed cut lines.

Image Editing

9

Resizing Images Besides the direct scaling methods already described in the Reference Manual, images can be resized to customized formats including a position and/or scaling rule in case that the image side relation does not exactly match the format side relation. This function is implemented in the powerful Image Format preset. For a detailed description of this preset please refer to the manual part about presets (“Image Editing Automation”).

Printing Marks The ErgoSoft RIP offers a sophisticated function for printing marks with the image. Since the available settings are very complex, Print Marks presets can be created and used. We strongly recommend not configuring the marks manually for each image but to use those preset possibility. For a detailed description of this preset please refer to the manual part about presets (“Image Editing Automation”).

AddOns The ErgoSoft RIP offers several image AddOns, some of them being complex in the configuration. Thus, image AddOns presets can be created and used. We strongly recommend not configuring the AddOns manually for each image but to use those preset possibility. For a detailed description of this preset please refer to the manual part about presets (“Image Editing Automation”).

Image Editing

10

Using Automatic Elements Sometimes, it might be useful to be able to generate simple elements such as lines, rectangles and text elements directly in the RIP software without having to create EPS files in your image editing software. The ErgoSoft RIP offers the possibility to generate such simple elements. The automatic elements are generated using menu File > Add Job Element and selecting the element type. Modification of generated elements is possible using menu Image > Edit Parameters. The following chapters describe the element types that can be generated.

Generating Rectangles The element type “Gradient Rectangle” creates a rectangle filled with either a solid color or a gradient. When needing a solid rectangle, just uncheck Gradient and select the solid color as Color left. The Angle allows rotating the rectangle.

Generating Solid Black Lines The element type “Job Length Line” creates a vertical black line at the right or left side of the job. When using roll media the line is as long as the current job; when using sheet media the line is as long as the sheet. Use the size and rotation functions to scale and rotate the line. The color cannot be modified.

Generating Dashed Black Lines The element type “Separation Line” creates a horizontal black dashed line from the left border to the right border of the job. Use the size and rotation functions to scale and rotate the line. The color cannot be modified.

Image Editing

11

Generating Text Elements The element type “Variable Text” creates a customizable text element.

Image Editing

12

Application Notes Spot Color Printing

Spot Color Printing

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Spot Color Printing

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Basic Print Environment Configuration .............................................................................................................2 Printing Spot Color Channels ................................................................................................................................3 Preparing the Image ...........................................................................................................................................3 Importing the Image ..........................................................................................................................................3 Multi-Channel TIFF Files ..............................................................................................................................3 DCS Files (Multi-Channel PostScript Files) ...........................................................................................3 Special Settings in the Print Environment ..................................................................................................4 Automatic Spot Color Printing .............................................................................................................................5 Preparing the Image ...........................................................................................................................................5 Importing the Image ..........................................................................................................................................5 Special Settings in the Print Environment ..................................................................................................6 Automatic Spot Color Replacement ...................................................................................................................7 Named Colors Mixing with Spot Color Inks ..............................................................................................7 Special Settings in the Print Environment ..................................................................................................7 Manual Color Replacement and Spot Color Inks ..........................................................................................8 Color Picker with Spot Color Inks ..................................................................................................................8 Special Settings in the Print Environment ..................................................................................................9 Setting Printing Parameters for Certain Images ............................................................................................9 Examples for Setups .............................................................................................................................................. 10

Spot Color Printing

ii

Introduction Some ink type or colors, e.g. fluorescent or metallic inks cannot or should not be included in the color management workflow. But they can successfully be used for controlled effect printing. For this reason, the ErgoSoft RIP offers the possibility of Spot Color Printing. This allows using the special color, in the following called “spot color”, to be used in addition to the color management workflow. Spot color printing needs special setups in the print environment as well as special preparation of the image or special treatment of the image in the job depending on the selected workflow or image type. The ErgoSoft RIP offers the following possibilities: Printing Spot Color Channels in TIFF or DCS Files The image is created based on CMYK or RGB with additional spot color channels and saved as (CMYK or RGB) TIFF or DCS PostScript file. In this case, there is a separate color channel in the image for each spot color. Chapter “Printing Spot Color Channels” will explain the necessary settings for this method as well as the workflow for its usage. 1

Printing Palette Colors using Spot Color Inks The area in the image that is to be printed with a spot color ink is colored using a color with a name, e.g. a palette color or a customized swatch color. The image is saved as Encapsulated PostScript file. Chapter “Automatic Spot Color Printing” will explain the necessary settings for this method as well as the workflow for its usage. 2

Using Spot Color Inks for Automatic Palette Color Replacement The area in the image that is to be printed with (ink mixings containing) spot color inks is colored using a color with a name, e.g. a palette color or a customized swatch color. The image is saved as Encapsulated PostScript file. Chapter “Automatic Spot Color Replacement” will explain the necessary settings for this method as well as the workflow for its usage. 3

Using Spot Color Inks for Manual Color Replacement Any solid colored area in the image can be manually replaced by (ink mixings containing) spot color inks. Chapter “Manual Color Replacement and Spot Color Inks” will explain the necessary settings for this method as well as the workflow for its usage. 4

Setting Printing Parameters for Certain Images The global settings for the methods using spot color ink for automatic spot color replacement or for printing an extra color channel in the file (methods 2 and 3) can be overwritten for the currently selected image(s). These settings can be saved as image presets for easy re-use for certain images. This method works only in combination with one of the methods 2 and 3. Chapter “Setting Printing Parameters for Certain Images” will explain the necessary settings as well as its usage. 5

Spot Color Printing

1

Basic Print Environment Configuration In order to use spot color inks for printing, the print environment needs a certain configuration that is valid for all methods of spot color printing. Special configurations are described in the respective chapters. Please note that this documentation will not explain the print environment settings in detail but just those settings that concern spot color printing. For more information about the print environment settings please refer to the manual part about Print Environments. As basic requirement for spot color printing, the print driver (print environment) needs to offer enough slots for the four basic inks CMYK plus the needed spot color inks. In addition, it must allow full access to the ink selection for the slots. 1

1

2 2

2 For each slot select the color that is in the corresponding slot of the printer. Spot color inks 3 are not named in the ink color selection list but simply numbered Spot Color 1 (S1), Spot Color 2 (S2), etc. It is up to you to note somewhere which of your spot color inks is set up in the respective slot. The order of the spot colors does not matter; it is only important that the slot settings reflect the cartridge settings in your printer. 2

The settings for the spot colors allow excluding the respective ink from the printer linearization (Density) and use either the linearization for the black ink or the default density linearization (dot gain curve) instead. This is needed when using spot color inks that cannot be calibrated such as metallic or fluorescent inks. When not having excluded the spot color ink from the printer linearization, the printer linearization must be executed including the spot color inks. Please note that it might be necessary to save (close) the print environment after having configured the spot color settings before you are able to select a density linearization that does not include curves for the spot color inks when Exclude from Density is checked. Spot color inks are never used for printer profile creation. 3

Spot Color Printing

2

Printing Spot Color Channels Preparing the Image Create the image in CMYK, RGB or Lab. Add additional spot color channels. Some image editing software (e.g. CorelDraw) allows creating only 6-channel files by selecting 6 channel palette colors (such as Pantone Hexachrome….) and creating separations saved in DCS files. Save in TIFF with additional spot color channels or DCS format. Please check in your image editing software whether it is possible to create either TIFF files with additional spot color channels or DCS files.

Importing the Image Multi-Channel TIFF Files Multi-channel TIFF files are imported as usual. The color mode (RGB, CMYK, Lab) as well as the additional spot color channels are recognized automatically. Color Management is used: All color channels in the multi-channel TIFF file go through the density linearization as individual color channels; ink mixing and thus, the printer profile is considered for the basic (RGB, CMYK, Lab) channels. Since the specified color for the additional channel is not known to the ErgoSoft RIP, the preview is created using colors Red, Green, and Blue in diminishing saturation for the additional spot color channels. Thus, the preview will look different from the preview in the image editing program you might use to edit the image. The Image information function will also mention the additional spot color channels.

DCS Files (Multi-Channel PostScript Files) DCS files require that the field Tread DCS as separated file is checked in the settings of menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Image > PostScript/PDF Parameters when the image is imported. The color mode displayed in the status bar of the ErgoSoft RIP window must be “SEP”. Color Management is not used: All color channels in the DCS file only go through the density linearization as individual color channels; ink mixing is not considered.

Spot Color Printing

3

Previews may not be created for DCS files when all layers are saved in one file; for multi-file DSC files, previews may be created. The Image Information function will mention the additional spot color channels as CMYKCustomColors in the PostScript options. Because of the color management restrictions we strongly recommend not to use DCS files for spot color printing but using multi-channel TIFF files or the method described in chapter “Automatic Palette Color Replacement” instead.

Special Settings in the Print Environment There are no special settings needed in the print environment for printing multi-channel TIFF and DCS files. It does not matter whether a Name of separation color is entered or not.

Spot Color Printing

4

Automatic Spot Color Printing Preparing the Image Many image processing programs such as Adobe InDesign or Adobe Illustrator write spot color names into the PostScript file. In the ErgoSoft RIP, a spot color channel can be assigned for such a spot color. In e.g. Adobe Illustrator CS3, select the New Swatch option to create a new color swatch. Now define the name of the color area that should be replaced and make sure that the type of the color is set to Spot Color. Now color the area that should be replaced in the image with the color you just created and save the image in the EPS file format.

Importing the Image Import the image as usual. There is nothing special to be considered.

Spot Color Printing

5

Special Settings in the Print Environment This method requires that the Name of separated color is entered in the Spot Color Settings dialog. When the image is printed, the palette color is extracted into a (temporarily) spot color channel and printed with the ink that is in the slot which is assigned to the palette color. A printer profile for the non-palette colors may be used.

Hint: You can copy the palette color name from the image information by selecting the name, clicking again with the left mouse button on it to select the text, and displaying a context menu with the copy command by clicking with the right mouse button on the selected text.

Spot Color Printing

6

Automatic Spot Color Replacement This method simply uses the Named Colors function to automatically replace colors in PostScript/PDF files in which the color area that should be replaced is clearly named through a spot color (color swatch saved in the file). The following documentation does not describe the color replacement method in details but just the settings in the print environment needed when spot color inks are used. For a detailed description of the color replacement method please refer to the manual part about Color Replacement, chapter “Automatic Color Replacement in PostScript and PDF Files”.

Named Colors Mixing with Spot Color Inks The Named Colors function allows using spot color inks for the device dependent ink mixings.

1

The ink mixing list has 3 parts:

2

1

The basic inks cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K).

3

The additional profile channels orange/red (R), green (G), blue/violet (B) as well as 5 more profile channels (P8, P9, P10, P11, P12) 2

3

Additional spot color channels S1, S2, S3, … S6.

Special Settings in the Print Environment To avoid priority conflicts with the Automatic Spot Color Printing method, we strongly recommend not entering a Name of separated color in the Spot Color Settings dialog.

Spot Color Printing

7

Manual Color Replacement and Spot Color Inks This method simply uses the manual color replacement function to replace colors in any file type. The following documentation does not describe the color replacement method in details but just the settings in the print environment needed when spot color inks are used. For a detailed description of the color replacement method please refer to the manual part about Color Replacement, chapter “Manual Color Replacement”.

Color Picker with Spot Color Inks The Color Picker allows using spot color inks for the device dependent ink mixings. The ink mixing list has 3 parts: The basic inks cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K). 1

The additional profile channels orange/red (R), green (G), blue/violet (B) as well as 5 more profile channels (P8, P9, P10, P11, P12) 2

3

1 2 3

Additional spot color channels S1, S2, S3, … S6.

Spot Color Printing

8

Special Settings in the Print Environment To avoid priority conflicts with the Automatic Palette Color Printing method, we strongly recommend not entering a Name of separated color in the Spot Color Settings dialog.

Setting Printing Parameters for Certain Images Sometime, preparations for printing with spot color ink in the images do not correspond to the settings in the print environment because e.g. another name for the spot color swatch is used or another order for additional color channels than the ones set up in the print environment. Instead of modifying the image or print environment for these cases, the Extra Channels preset or configuration can be used to set special parameters for the selected images. Using the Extra Channels configuration also allows printing images with different spot color printing settings in the same job. For a detailed description of this method please refer to the application note about “Printing with White Ink or Finish”.

Spot Color Printing

9

Examples for Setups CMYK (calibrated) with 2 spot colors: Printing Ink Assignment tab: 6 slots with colors (CMYK plus 2 spot colors) st 1 spot color channel: printed with ink in slot “Spot Color 1” 2nd spot color channel: printed with ink in slot “Spot Color 2” Printer profile: for CMYK Density linearization: for CMYK plus all spot colors not excluded from density 1

CMYK with orange and green (calibrated) and 1 spot color: Printing Ink Assignment: 7 slots with colors (CMYKOG plus 1 spot color) st 1 spot color channel: printed with ink in slot “Spot Color 1” Printer profile: for CMYKOG Density linearization: for CMYKOG plus all spot colors not excluded from density 2

CMYK with light cyan and light magenta (calibrated) and 2 spot colors: Printing Ink Assignment: 8 slots with colors (CMYK + LCM + 2 spot colors) 1st spot color channel: printed with ink in slot “Spot Color 1” 2nd spot color channel: printed with ink in slot “Spot Color 2” Printer profile: for CMYK Density linearization: for CMYK plus all spot colors not excluded from density 3

Please note that DCS files do not use the color management (printer profile). Because of this restriction we strongly recommend not to use DCS files for spot color printing but using multi-channel TIFF files or the method described in chapter “Automatic Palette Color Replacement” instead.

Spot Color Printing

10

Application Notes Color Replacement

Color Replacement

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Color Replacement

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Color Replacement Methods ................................................................................................................................1 Global Color Replacement ...............................................................................................................................2 Pixel Value (CMYK or RGB) .........................................................................................................................2 Color Value (CMYK).......................................................................................................................................3 Defining Pixel Values (CMYK or RGB).....................................................................................................3 Defining Color Values (CMYK) ..................................................................................................................3 Selecting and Applying a Color Value ...................................................................................................4 Displaying Color Info ....................................................................................................................................4 Activating a Global Color Replacement ................................................................................................4 Global Color Replacement is Active........................................................................................................4 Deactivating Global Color Replacement ...............................................................................................4 Loading Global Color Replacement List ................................................................................................4 Manual Color Replacement .............................................................................................................................5 Launching the Replace Colors Function ................................................................................................6 Creating the Color List .................................................................................................................................6 Defining the Color to be Replaced..........................................................................................................6 Selecting a Color Source .............................................................................................................................6 Selecting a Replacement Color Value ....................................................................................................6 Preview...............................................................................................................................................................6 Automatic Color Replacement in PostScript and PDF Files .................................................................7 Creating the PostScript-File .......................................................................................................................7 Defining the CMYK-Replacement Value ...............................................................................................7 Activating Automatic Color Replacement in PostScript Files ........................................................8 Defining Replacement Colors ...............................................................................................................................8 Lists with Replacement Colors ........................................................................................................................9 Swatch Books ..................................................................................................................................................9 Named Colors .............................................................................................................................................. 11 Replacement Color Definition during Color Replacement ............................................................... 13 ColorPicker .................................................................................................................................................... 13 Measuring Colors ........................................................................................................................................ 14 Tools for Finding Replacement Colors ..................................................................................................... 16 Printing Similar Colors .............................................................................................................................. 16 Colorbooks .................................................................................................................................................... 17 Testing Color Accuracy ............................................................................................................................. 18

Color Replacement

ii

Introduction This documentation will explain the possibilities available in the ErgoSoft RIP to replace colors in an image ready to print. The first chapters will focus on the different possibilities of color replacement. The specific tools to define replacement colors will be explained in the second part of this documentation.

Color Replacement Methods The ErgoSoft RIP provides three different ways to replace colors: 1) Global color replacement The function Global Replace Colors allows the definition of a global color table for automatic color replacement. ‘When this function is used, a specified color value will automatically be replaced by another specified color value in any image that is imported. 2) Manual color replacement in an image The Replace Colors function makes it possible to conduct a color replacement for images individually. 3) Automatic color replacement in PostScript and PDF files The Named Colors function provides the possibility to have colors automatically replaced in PostScript and PDF files. This requires a PostScript or PDF file in which the color area that should be replaced is clearly named through a spot color (color patch saved in the file).

Color Replacement

1

Global Color Replacement As mentioned in the introduction, the purpose of global color replacement is to replace colors comprehensively across jobs and print environments. This means that if a global color replacement is active, the defined colors will be replaced in every image regardless of the print environment that is used. To open the dialog for global color replacement select menu Tools > Global Replace Colors. The Global Replace Colors function is basically a list which contains one or more entries for color replacement respectively allows adding such entries. Such an entry consists of the following parts: The pixel value that should be replaced (CMYK or RGB) and the color value with which it should be replaced (CMYK).

Pixel Value (CMYK or RGB) The pixel values can be defined in the CMYK color space or the RGB color space. It is important to keep in mind that these are pixel values, not color values. This means that pixel values from 0-255 can be used. The easiest way to get the corresponding pixel values is the Tune function in the image Properties window.

Color Replacement

2

Color Value (CMYK) To define a replacement color, the user has several tools at his disposal. The color value that should be used can be imported from these tools and then be assigned to a pixel value that it should replace. When the pixel value that is to be replaced as well as the color value that should replace it are defined, the color replacement list needs to be saved and activated. From now on as long as the global color replacement is active, every imported pixel value that is e.g. 255 Cyan will be replaced with the defined color. 2 5

1 4

2 3

1

Defining Pixel Values (CMYK or RGB)

In the example, we defined a pixel value of 255 cyan and 255 yellow. If you want to use an RGB value to define the color, simply click on RGB instead of CMYK 2

Defining Color Values (CMYK)

To define a color value, respectively a color that you want to be printed instead of the selected pixel value, the ErgoSoft RIP provides 4 tools: ColorPicker, Measure Color, Named Colors and Swatch Book. They can be accessed through their respective buttons.

Color Replacement

3

3

Selecting and Applying a Color Value

In the tools, a color value can be selected or defined. That color value can now be taken over into the Color Replacement dialog and assigned to the selected pixel value by pressing the Apply button. 4

Displaying Color Info

The color value defined in e.g. Swatch Books is now displayed in the Color Replacement dialog. The dialog shows the name, the Lab value as well as the CMYK-value of the color. The symbol shows from which tool the color value was taken. 5

Activating a Global Color Replacement

To activate the color replacement, respectively apply it to every imported image, check the Activate box. After the replacement was activated, the color replacement table can be saved. 6

Global Color Replacement is Active

In order to prevent you from unwanted surprises in the printout, above warning is displayed in the status bar of the program window whenever the global color replacement has been activated. 7

6

Deactivating Global Color Replacement

To deactivate the global color replacement, uncheck the Activate box in the Color Replacement dialog. 8

Loading Global Color Replacement List

You can create as many global color replacement lists as you like. Open your archive through the Load button and choose the list you want to use. To help identify the lists, a description of the list is displayed. Clicking the Open button opens the selected list and automatically activates the global color replacement.

Color Replacement

4

Manual Color Replacement Besides the possibility of global color replacement explained in the previous chapters, the ErgoSoft RIP also allows you to replace colors for a single image. Setting up this function is very similar to the global color replacement. The Replace Colors function is basically a list which contains the 30 colors that cover the largest area in the image. The dialog allows you to define a replacement color for each of these colors.

1

a

b

4

3 2

c

d

When the image is loaded in CMYK, RGB or Lab color mode, the Replace Colors function provides the possibility to display three different sets of previews: 1) One preview window showing the image with the replaced colors (b). 2) Two preview windows: The first showing the original image with the selected replacement area marked (a) and the second showing the image with the replaced colors (b). 3) Four preview windows: The original image (a), the image with the replaced colors (b), a printer simulation preview (c), and a printer simulation preview with out-of-gamut colors marked (d). Please note that previews cannot be displayed for PostScript images configured to use the PostScript interpreter color management (color mode “SEP”).

Color Replacement

5

1

Launching the Replace Colors Function

The Replace Colors function can be accessed by selecting the image in which you want to replace the colors and selecting Replace Colors in the Properties window. 2

Creating the Color List

Before colors in an image can be replaced, the list with the 30 colors covering the largest areas in the image must be created by clicking the button Show Colors. 3

Defining the Color to be Replaced

The Replace colors dialog shows a list of the different colors in the image. Select the color that you want to replace from the list or select the area that should be replaced using the ColorPicker tool in the original image window (a). The selected entry in the list is now marked in the list and highlighted in the original image window. 4

Selecting a Color Source

To define a replacement color value, you need to select the desired source of the color, respectively the desired tool. Available tools are ColorPicker, Swatch Book, Named Colors profiles, and Measure Color. Furthermore, an information window showing the pixel value of the currently selected original color and its replacement color is also available. 5

Selecting a Replacement Color Value

In the respective tool, you can now select or define a color value. Then, the color value can be assigned to the pixel value to be replaced in the Replace Colors list, using the Apply button. The color value can also be assigned to the pixel value by double-clicking it or through drag&drop. The selected value is now displayed in the right column of the Replace Colors list. The left column of the same line shows the original color. Select the rendering intent to be used for printing replacement colors that are not specified the in device dependent color space CMYK (plus additional profile colors) but in the Lab color space instead. 6

Preview

After a color has been replaced, the preview window (b) will display the replacement color value. When having done all color replacements you have to apply the changes to the image by clicking the Apply button below the Replace Colors list. Now, the change is also reflected in the preview of the image in the job. 7

Color Replacement

6

Automatic Color Replacement in PostScript and PDF Files The Named Colors function provides the possibility to have colors automatically replaced in PostScript and PDF files. This requires a PostScript or PDF file in which the color area that should be replaced is clearly named through a spot color (color swatch saved in the file). The PostScript file used in this example contains a color patch named MyColor. The replacement color that is used does not matter for the automatic color replacement.

Creating the PostScript-File In e.g. Adobe Illustrator CS3, select the New Swatch option to create a new color swatch. Now define the name of the color area that should be replaced and make sure that the type of the color is set to Spot Color. Now color the area that should be replaced in the image with the color you just created and save the image in the EPS file format.

Defining the CMYK-Replacement Value To use the automatic color replacement, a named color profile must be created or an already available profile needs to be expanded by adding an entry. Add an entry to the named color profile which uses the same name as you set for the color area you‘d like to replace. In this example, the entry is created using the name MyColor. The Lab-value here is only to display the color and has no influence on the output of the color tone. Now define the CMYK-value that you want to be printed instead of the color area defined in your DTP program. For more information please refer to the Named Colors part of this documentation.

Color Replacement

7

Activating Automatic Color Replacement in PostScript Files To activate the automatic color replacement, the checkbox Use “Named Colors Profile” for spot color replacement needs to be checked. You can find the checkbox in the menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Image > Color Management > PostScript/PDF or when editing the settings in the ColorManagement PS/PDF function in the Properties window. If a PostScript file is imported into the ErgoSoft RIP which contains a name for a color value that is identical to the one in the selected Named Color Profile, that value is automatically replaced.

Defining Replacement Colors To replace a color value, not only the pixel value that should be replaced, but also the color value that should replace it, needs to be defined. For this task, the ErgoSoft RIP provides the following tools: ColorPicker (replacement color defined in color replacement) Measure Color (replacement color defined in color replacement) Swatch Book (list with replacement colors) Named Colors (list with replacement colors) Furthermore, there are some tools that help in finding the replacement color and in testing the quality of replacement colors: Print Similar Colors Colorbooks Color Accuracy Test

Color Replacement

8

Lists with Replacement Colors Swatch Books The Swatch Book tool provides the possibility to manage colors in so called swatch books and selectively use them for color replacement. The replacement colors are defined in Lab values that are printed using the printer profile set in the print environment used when the color replacement is done. The rendering intent for replacement colors is set to Relative Colorimetric. Before a swatch can be used for color replacement, it needs to be defined in the Swatch Books dialog. The Swatch Books dialog can be accessed by clicking the displayed icon in the Color & Special Features list in the Standard toolbar or by selecting menu Tools > Color & Special Features > Swatch Books.

Managing Swatch Books A swatch book is defined to be a list of color names with the corresponding Lab values. A pair consisting of color name and corresponding Lab value is called “swatch”. The swatch book can hold an unlimited number of swatches. But since the ErgoSoft RIP allows defining an unlimited number of swatch books we recommend grouping the swatches in several swatch books. Before a swatch book can be filled with swatches it must be created. The ErgoSoft RIP offers the following possibilities: 1

2

1 2

3

4

5

Create a new, empty swatch book.

Create a new swatch book and fill it with swatches generated using Lch values.

Create a new swatch book and fill it with swatches that are imported from other sources such as another ErgoSoft RIP swatch book, Adobe color books, Color Exchange formats, and others. 3

Existing swatch books can be renamed or deleted as well as exported in various formats and write-protected so that they cannot be modified. 4

5

Color Replacement

6

9

To print complete swatch books, a job must be created first with the current swatch book added to it. Then, other swatch books may be added to the same job. The Print Options allow some settings to be specified such as the patch dimensions and font height as well as a fix subtitle while the title and patch labels are generated automatically using the swatch book name and the names of the swatches. Please note that the print option settings are shared with the Named Colors tool. 6

Managing Swatches In addition to the automatic swatch generation during the generation of the swatch book, swatches can be generated manually by a) selecting the color in the ColorPicker b) measuring the color with a measuring device allowing single patch measurement c) selecting a blend with white of the selected swatch by double-clicking the patch in the Blend with white dialog d) selecting a blend of the last two selected swatches and black by double-clicking the patch in the Blend with black dialog When selecting the new color in a blend window or when Automatic name generation is checked you do not need to enter a name for the new swatch. 7

Swatches can be re-named including modification of the color value using the ColorPicker or measuring the color as well as deleted. 8

7

8 9

7

10 10

7

The Print Similar Colors tool helps in finding the correct Lab values for the swatch. 9

Swatches can be searched by entering a part of the name into the Find Color Name field and clicking the Next button if necessary or by searching it visually in the Palette in which you can click on a sample to switch to its correspondent in the list of swatches and vice versa. 10

Color Replacement

10

Named Colors The Named Colors tool provides the possibility to manage colors in a so called Named Colors Profile and selectively use them for color replacement. The color values are defined in the respective device specific color space and are therefore described in CMYK plus additional colors. This means that similar to an ICC profile, a Named Colors Profile is specific to a combination of printer, ink and media. Thus, it is part of the print environment and should not be used for another print environment without carefully checking (and correcting) the color values. The Named Colors Profile respectively the contained list of named colors that are specifically defined for the device color space, are mostly used to ensure that certain color values are printed exactly as they are expected. E.g. in a perceptual ICC workflow, this allows to print certain colors very saturated without sacrificing the color fastness of the rest of the file by bypassing the actual ICC workflow.

Managing Named Colors Profiles Since the Named Colors Profile is part of the print environment it is managed in the print environment where it may be imported, exported and deleted. Before a Named Colors Profile can be used for color replacement, it needs to be defined in the Named Colors dialog. The Named Colors dialog can be accessed by clicking the displayed icon in the Color & Special Features list in the Standard toolbar or by selecting menu Tools > Color & Special Features > Named Colors. Before editing a Named Colors Profile be sure to have the print environment selected in which you want to use the colors.

Managing Named Colors Named Colors are pairs of color names and device-dependent recipes for ink mixings in CMYK plus additional colors. Furthermore, there is also a Lab value assigned to the Named Color defining the display color in the RIP to make an efficient management and further use of the Named Colors possible. In the Assign Named Colors dialog, the name, display color as well as the color recipe that should be printed can be defined.

Color Replacement

11

Adding Colors The Named Colors tool offers several ways to add colors to the list by doubleclicking the wanted color or clicking the Apply button: 1

1 2 3

Colors can be selected in the ColorPicker.

7

Colors from swatch books may be added to list including colors from the “Blend with white” and the “Blend with black” option of the swatch book tool. 2

Colors can be measured with a measuring device allowing single patch measurements.

5

4 6

10

8

3

9

4

Complete color lists in several formats including ErgoSoft RIP Swatch Books can be imported into the current Named Colors Profile.

Editing the Color Recipe When adding a color using the ColorPicker or measuring, the color values for the prin5 tout are suggested with help of the Lab value and the current printer profile. They can be modified any time by just entering the wanted values into the fields for CMYK and additional ink channels. Clicking By Profile re-assigns the CMYK values with help of the current Lab values (for visualization) and the printer profile so that the output values are adjusted to the (possibly dramatically changed) visualization of the Named Color. 6

The Print Similar Colors tool helps in finding the exact output values.

Editing the Name and Visualization The name of the Named Color as well as the color patch for the visualization can be 7 modified with the help of ColorPicker, measuring colors and Swatch Book. The output values are not affected by this modification; they can be adjusted to the new visualization by clicking the By Profile button (see above). When all Named Colors in the list should start and/or end with the same sequence, a name prefix and/or suffix can be attached and detached. Having manually removed the prefix and/or suffix from minimum one Named Color will prevent the prefix/suffix being detached from all other Named Colors. 8

Color Replacement

12

Printing the Named Colors List To print the Named Colors list, a job must be created first with the current Named Col9 ors added to it. The Print Options allow some settings to be specified such as the patch dimensions and font height as well as a fix subtitle while the title and patch labels are generated automatically using the names of the print environment and the Named Colors. Please note that the print option settings are shared with the Swatch Book. Searching a Named Color Named Colors can be searched by entering a part of the name into the Find Color 10 Name field and clicking the Next button if necessary.

Replacement Color Definition during Color Replacement ColorPicker You might remember the ColorPicker tool from programs such as Adobe Photoshop. It allows the user to define a Lab value visually. Depending on which color replacement function you use, the ColorPicker tool will also display the CMYK values for a color. When the CMYK value is displayed, the color replacement will be conducted without using a printer profile. If the CMYK value is not displayed, the Lab value is used for the color replacement, which will be converted through the printer profile into the machine‘s color space. Furthermore, replacement CMYK values can be entered directly after having checked the Device box. However this has no influence on the Lab or RBG values that are used. To import a color into the color replacement application currently in use, simply click the Apply button.

Color Replacement

13

Measuring Colors The Measure Colors tool allows you to measure colors with a measuring device supporting single patch measurement and use them for your color replacement. Additionally, this dialog provides the possibility to compare measured colors and automatically write measured values into Microsoft Excel.

Measuring a Color In order to measure a color, place the measuring device on the color that you want to measure and conduct the measurement. The measured color is automatically taken over into the color replacement or color definition application in use. To repeat the measuring process, you can simply start the measurement anew. To measure an additional color, you will need to select a new color to be replaced or defined in the dialog from where the Measure Colors tool was started. After having measured a color, the following information becomes available to you: 1

The Spectral segment shows the measured spectral values.

The Colorimetric section shows the Lab values calculated from the measured spectral values. 2

3

1

4 2

3

The Monitor section shows the calculated RGB values.

4

The Printer section shows the CMYK values calculated on the basis of the measured spectral values. However, this requires using an output profile.

Color Replacement

14

Measuring a Reference Color – Determining Delta E Value 6 In Advanced mode, the Measure 5 color sample dialog allows you to measure a reference color with which the color measured as a color sample is compared. Through the two measurements, a Delta E value is determined that describes the difference between the color sample and the reference color in the Lab color space. In other words the Delta E value (the color difference between sample and reference) in regards to the Lab color space is composed of differences in brightness, chroma and hue. 5

6

To measure a reference color, the advanced mode must be activated. If a color sample is measured afterwards, the Delta E value will be displayed automatically.

In general, it is assumed that the average viewer can spot differences in colors that are 56 Delta E apart from each other. A trained eye can spot differences of 3-4 Delta E. The most visible differences for the human eye are those in grayscales, which are already recognizable at a Delta E difference of 0.5.

Color Replacement

15

Tools for Finding Replacement Colors Printing Similar Colors The Print Similar Colors tool helps in finding the best output value for a wanted color. It is available both for the Swatch Book as well as for the Named Colors tool. To define a binding color recipe from an approximate color recipe, possible recipes can be evaluated using the Print Similar Colors tool. 1

1 1

This dialog lets you generate a color chart that contains colors similar to the initial “reference” color. When creating the chart, the following parameters can be set: 2

2

Variation in print colors Number of color patches Color distance Using the Create Job button, a job is generated in the ErgoSoft RIP which contains the color table with the similar colors. This job can then be printed like any other. Each printed color recipe is labeled with the percentage amount of each color used to print it. 3

The values assigned to each color tone can now be entered into the Named Colors or Swatch Books dialog. 4

3

3

3

4 4

This process can be repeated any number of times.

Color Replacement

16

Colorbooks The Colorbooks tool allows creating Lab or RGB colorbooks for printing. The colorbooks can be used for finding Lab or RGB values for certain color tones by visually checking the printed patches. The Colorbooks tool can be accessed by selecting menu Tools > Color & Special Features > Generate Colorbooks. 1

The colorbook can be generated for the Lab or the RGB color space.

The Lab colorbook can be created for either color tones or gray tones. When not printing all colors you have to specify the segment as angles of a full circle. The Distance field sets the color tone (hue) distance as vertical cuts within the specified angle range and allows the system to calculate the number of pages. 2

1 2

4

5

The RGB values are specified as a 3 range. The Step field sets the color tone (hue) distance as vertical cuts within the specified range and allows the system to calculate the number of pages.

6

1 3

To save media the colorbook can be printed as consecutive color patches instead of pages showing the cuts. Uncheck Print colors out of gamut to print only the colors that can be exactly reproduced using the current printer profile. 4

The Lines per pages specify the number of horizontal cuts in the segments.

4

5

5

6

Often, desired colors are not printed in the colorbook because they are between the colors representing the selected hue distance and number of lines. The smaller the distance and the more lines per page are printed in the colorbook the more different color tones are printed.

Color Replacement

17

6

The Options button allows specifying the layout of the colorbook: Select the font size for the Title (Hue …), the Info Field containing any text that is printed between the title and the color fields, and the color field Labels (LAB …). Specify the size and distance of the Color Fields and enter the Resolution for creating the text.

6

Testing Color Accuracy The Test Color Accuracy tool allows printing and measuring color patches to automatically check the difference between the printout and the theoretical color. You can either print a Swatch Book by selecting it in the list or the Named Colors saved in the current print environment. Specify, whether all colors are to be printed or only colors that are in the gamut of the current printer profile. 1

Select the geometry for the printout suitable to your measuring device and set desired print options.

5 1

2

2

Print the chart. When having 3 to wait some time for some after-treatment for the printout you can save the session and select and re-load it later. 4

3 4

6 5

Measure the chart.

5

Sessions can be saved in order to select and re-load them later to check the color accuracy.

6

Click the Next button to automatically compare the values used for the printout and the measurements and calculate the Delta E values.

Color Replacement

18

Application Notes Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Basics of Printing .......................................................................................................................................................2 Printing Directly to the Port...................................................................................................................................3 Printing Using a Print Client ..................................................................................................................................4 Printing Copies ...........................................................................................................................................................5 Other Print Options ..................................................................................................................................................6 Suspend RIP ...........................................................................................................................................................6 Suspend Printing..................................................................................................................................................7 Keep Rip Data after Printing ............................................................................................................................8 Preflight ...................................................................................................................................................................9 Reprinting Jobs ........................................................................................................................................................ 10 Preparing for Later Reprinting ..................................................................................................................... 10 Reprinting on the same Printer ................................................................................................................... 10 Reprinting on another Printer ...................................................................................................................... 10 Solution to Common Problems......................................................................................................................... 11 Changing Copies during Printing ............................................................................................................... 11 Print Client does not start Printing ............................................................................................................ 11 RIP Server Crash ................................................................................................................................................ 11

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

ii

Introduction This documentation explains the process that is started when you launch a print command. Depending on the options selected in the Print dialog, the job will follow different paths some of them needing user intervention. At the end, we will explain how you can use the available features for easy reproduction of already produced jobs and how you can solve some common problems.

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

1

Basics of Printing Preview Server

Creates previews of images during the import process.

[ Image Import ]

JobComposer

[

Preview Creation

]

Main module. Layouting and job make-ready interface.

JobCenter

[ Print Command ]

Display interface for JobQueueServer

JQ-Server [

Progress Report

Background task. Manages all communication between the different modules.

]

RIP Server Rip engine

[

Progress Report

Print/Cut Client

]

RIP Data

Hosts spool data and print queue for a specific printer. Sends all data to the printer.

]

[ Print ]

[ Print directly from RIP Server ]

Print Data

]

[

[

[ Print Command ]

[ RIP Command ]

Spool Folder

Common Windows folder containing ripped data for the Print Client.

Basically, the data flow when having launched the Print command is the same for all possibilities: The JobComposer (main program you are working with to create your jobs) forwards the print command including all necessary data and information to the JobQueueServer which shows its processes in the JobCenter parts of which are displayed in the JobComposer windows Waiting, Done, Preview, Details, and Journal. The JobQueueServer controls data ripping in the RIP Server and forwards the ripped data either directly to the printer or into a Print Client that controls the printer.

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

2

Printing Directly to the Port

[ Print Command ]

JobComposer

Main module. Layouting and job make-ready interface.

JobCenter [

Progress Report

Display interface for JobQueueServer

]

JQ-Server

[ RIP Command ]

Background task. Manages all communication between the different modules.

RIP Server

[ Print directly from RIP Server ]

Rip engine

To print directly to the port, the option Skip Print Client (Print directly to port) must be checked in the Print dialog. When having launched the print command, the JobQueueServer sends the job data to the RIP Server for ripping. The RIP Server returns the ripped data to the JobQueueServer that send the ripped data to the printer. Since the ripped data is sent directly to the printer, ripping can be just as fast as the printer is able to capture the data. To avoid problems with mixing two printouts we strongly recommend using just one RIP Server to rip jobs for the same printer.

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

3

Printing Using a Print Client JobComposer

[ Print Command ]

Main module. Layouting and job make-ready interface.

JobCenter [

Progress Report

Display interface for JobQueueServer

]

[

Progress Report

]

RIP Data

]

JQ-Server

Background task. Manages all communication between the different modules.

RIP Server

Rip engine

Print Data

]

[

[ Print ]

[

[ Print Command ]

[ RIP Command ]

Print/Cut Client

Hosts spool data and print queue for a specific printer. Sends data to the printer.

Spool Folder

Common Windows fol-der containing ripped data for the Print Client.

To print using a Print Client, the option Skip Print Client (Print directly to port) must not be checked in the Print dialog. Please note that Print Client usage requires also a spool folder being specified in the print environment. When having launched the print command, the JobQueueServer sends the job data to the RIP Server for ripping. The RIP Server returns the ripped data to the JobQueueServer that send the ripped data to the Print Client that sends the ripped data to the printer. Since the ripped data is captured in the Print Client, ripping can be faster than the printer is able to capture the data. The Print Client also controls which job is sent to the printer; thus you can rip several jobs simultaneously in several RIP Servers.

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

4

[

Progress Report

[ Print Command ]

[ Print Command ]

Printing Copies

]

[

Progress Report

[ RIP Command ]

]

[ RIP Command ] One copy

[ Print Command ]

[

Progress Report

]

RIP Data

]

One copy

[

One copy

Print Data

]

[

All copies

[ Print ]

All copies

[ Print directly from RIP Server ]

All copies

To print several copies of the same job, the number of Copies must be entered. The Total Length of the print job is calculated automatically. When printing directly to the port, the RIP Server has to rip the job for each copy needing a lot of time. When using the Print Client, the RIP Server has to rip just one copy of the job because the Print Client will send the same data as often to the printer as copies are requested. As long as the printing process is not finished, you may change the number of copies by selecting the job in the appropriate job (e.g. Waiting window in JobComposer) and select Properties from the Job context menu. The job Properties dialog allows changing the number of copies to be processed.

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

5

Other Print Options Suspend RIP

[ Print Command ]

JobComposer

Main module. Layouting and job make-ready interface.

JobCenter [

Progress Report

]

[ RIP Command ]

Waiting for user intervention before sending data

Display interface for JobQueueServer

JQ-Server

Background task. Manages all communication between the different modules.

RIP Server Rip engine

When Suspend RIP is checked in the Print dialog, the JobComposer just sends the job data to the JobQueueServer where it is put into the Suspended Queue waiting for user intervention. To start ripping for this job, it must be manually un-suspended in the Waiting window of the JobComposer or in the Suspended Queue in the JobCenter.

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

6

Suspend Printing JobComposer

[ Print Command ]

Main module. Layouting and job make-ready interface.

JobCenter [

Progress Report

[

RIP Command ]

Progress Report

]

RIP Data

]

JQ-Server

Background task. Manages all communication between the different modules.

RIP Server Rip engine

Print Data

]

[

Print/Cut Client

[

[ Print Command ]

[

Display interface for JobQueueServer

]

[ Print ]

Waiting for user intervention before sending data

Hosts spool data and print queue for a specific printer. Sends data to the printer.

Spool Folder

Common Windows fol-der containing ripped data for the Print Client.

When Suspend Printing is checked in the Print dialog, the print job is going through the normal process to the Print Client where the job has to wait for user intervention. To start printing this job, it must be manually un-suspended in the Waiting window of the JobComposer or in the Print queue in the JobCenter or in the Waiting for Print queue in the Print Client. Please note that Suspend Printing is only available when using the Print Client.

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

7

Keep Rip Data after Printing When Keep RIP data after Printing is checked in the Print dialog, the ripped data are not removed from the spool folder when printing is finished but kept until they are removed manually. Keeping the RIP data helps reprinting the same job later by saving ripping time and ensuring that the same data is sent to the printer as last time. Please note that the ripped data might need a lot of disk space.

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

8

Preflight

[ Print Command ]

JobComposer

Main module. Layouting and job make-ready interface.

JobCenter [

Progress Report

]

[ RIP Command ] Waiting for user intervention before sending data

Display interface for JobQueueServer

JQ-Server

Background task. Manages all communication between the different modules.

RIP Server Rip engine

Preflight When Preflight is checked in the Print dialog, the JobComposer sends the job data to the JobQueueServer where the Preflight is done according to the settings in the Job Processing Policies. Then, it is put into the Suspended Queue waiting for user intervention. To start ripping for this job, it must be manually un-suspended in the Waiting window of the JobComposer or in the Suspended Queue in the JobCenter.

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

9

Reprinting Jobs Preparing for Later Reprinting Sometimes, jobs have to be reprinted e.g. because the customer orders another printout some time later. When you know or expect that you might have to reprint a job some time later, you can prepare your production for easy reprinting: 1) 2)

Check Keep RIP data after Printing in the Print dialog. In the JobCenter, archive the printed and accepted job including print environment, images and ripped data as soon as possible. Save the archived job from the archive folder to your preferred user data storage.

Reprinting on the same Printer As long as the job still is available in the Done queue of the JobCenter or Print Client, you just have to select the job and launch the Reprint command from the Job context menu. When the needed job is saved somewhere on a data storage medium: Copy the job (*.pja file) to a location in which it is accessible by the system. In the JobCenter launch menu File > Restore and select the job to be reprinted. When clicking the Open button in the Restore jobs from archive dialog, the job is imported into the Done queue with status “Restored”. Reprint the restored job by launching the Reprint command from the Job context menu. When the archived jobs included the ripped data also, the job is immediately sent to the printer; the colors of the printout will be the same as before – except for changes because of ink changes, media changes, head usage, etc.

Reprinting on another Printer When you have to reprint a job on another printer, you cannot use the information in the archived job except the information about the job layout. Ripping including color management must be re-done according to the new printer. To reprint the archived job: Copy the job (*.pja file) to a location in which it is accessible by the system. In the JobComposer launch menu File –> Import Job from Archive and select the job to be imported. Enter a name that is used to save the extracted job. If you need to see the settings of the used print environment you can import it also. Now, the job can be printed like any other job in the JobComposer by selecting the correct print environment and launching the print command.

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

10

Solution to Common Problems Changing Copies during Printing As long as the printing process is not finished, you may change the number of copies by selecting the job in the appropriate job (e.g. Waiting window in JobComposer) and select Properties from the Job context menu. The job Properties dialog allows changing the number of copies to be processed.

Print Client does not start Printing There are several reasons why a job might not be printed though its status in the Waiting queue is “Waiting” or “Waiting for Print”: The Print Client is set to “offline” or “start manually”. The printer is not ready. The media check in the Print Client is activated and the media settings in the job are different from the media settings in the Print Client.

RIP Server Crash When the RIP Server crashed because of problems with a PostScript file you should proceed as follows: 1)

2) 3) 4) 5)

6)

Select the responsible job in the Waiting queue (it shows that it is ripping but nothing happens) and set it to “Suspend” in the Job context menu. Do not care that the “Suspend” status is not applied. Save the job in the JobComposer. Close all running RIP modules. Restart the computer or launch the Maintenance Tool from the ErgoSoft RIPs program group and select Shutdown ErgoSoft RIP. Start the JobComposer and verify that the responsible job really is set to “Suspend”. If it is not set to “Suspend” when launching the next print job, this job will first be ripped causing the RIP Server again to crash. Delete the job. Load the job saved in step 2 and check the PostScript parameters. Convert the image to another PostScript level or another file format if necessary.

Printing with ErgoSoft RIPs

11

Application Notes Printing Separations

Printing Separations

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Printing Separations

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Printing Separations on Film Media ...................................................................................................................1 Creating a Separation Job ................................................................................................................................1 Importing the Image ..........................................................................................................................................2 Configuring the Separations ...........................................................................................................................2 Editing the Image ................................................................................................................................................3 Printing the Separations....................................................................................................................................3 Creating Digital Separations..................................................................................................................................4 Creating the Print Environment......................................................................................................................4 Configuring the Print Environment ...............................................................................................................4 Importing and Editing the Image ..................................................................................................................6 Printing the Job ....................................................................................................................................................6

Printing Separations

ii

Introduction In addition to colored output, the large format inkjet printers may also be used for creating separations e.g. for usage in screen printing or offset printing. There are two possibilities to create the separations: When importing the image, separations can be automatically created and printed on special media (e.g. film) using special ink (e.g. artwork black ink) or special black ink settings. This method is described in chapter “Printing Separations on Film Media”. 1

In addition, there is a function available offering to import the image as usual and just use a special print driver for creating separated TIFF files that can be used for digital screen import in screen or offset printing. This method is described in chapter “Creating Digital Separations”. 2

Printing Separations on Film Media Automatically creating separations for imported images needs some special preparations of the job. The following describes step by step how to create separations and print those on film.

Creating a Separation Job Printing separation needs the image to be imported in a special job type. First, you have to create a separation job using menu File > New Separation Job. A new, empty job is opened that is labeled “Separation Job” at the right side of the status bar in the JobComposer window. 1

1

Please note that a separation job looks identical to a normal job except for the label in the status bar.

Printing Separations

1

Importing the Image 2

While importing, the image is automatically separated in default chan-

nels: 4 basic channels CMYK PostScript files: another separation for each spot color used in the file Multi-channel TIFF files: another separation for each spot color channel saved in the file

2

Please note that the previews for PostScript files with spot colors do not reflect the actual separations because the spot colors cannot be extracted for the preview creation.

Configuring the Separations After having imported the image, the separations can be configured: Select command Separations from the Image context menu. 3

Select the profile that is used to create the separations. Clicking the Import button allows copying a separation process profile into the folder in which the ErgoSoft RIP expects this profile type to be saved. This function allows using e.g. a CMYKOG printer profile you exported in your print environment. 4

3 6 3

5 8

7 4 9 8

All color channels are listed in which the image is separated. Check the separations you want to print. Please note that you can separate PostScript files into 7 channels maximum including all channels created by the separation process profile whether they are printed or not. When needing more separations, you have to duplicate the image and 5

Printing Separations

2

select the other channels; but keep in mind that the channels separated by the separation process profile are always created whether they are printed or not. The channel list includes: The basic channels CMYK. For PostScript files these channels count in the maximum number of channels whether they are checked or not. Additional channels created by the separation process profile labeled Profile Color 5, Profile Color 6, etc. For PostScript files these channels count in the maximum number of channels whether they are checked or not. Additional channels automatically created by separating spot colors used in PostScript files into color channels. Additional channels automatically created by separating spot color channels used in multi-channel TIFF files. 6

In order to include spot color channels into the CMYK separations you have to uncheck the channels to be included and check Render unused channels into CMYK.

When the options Apply same shape for all screens, Apply same frequency for all screens, and Apply same dot gain curves for all screens are checked, changes to the dot shape, frequency, and dot gain curve will not only affect the current separation but all others also. 7

Selecting a separation and clicking the Edit button allows modifying the separation settings. Enter the Angle and the Frequency, select the Shape and the Dot gain curve. Click on Edit to modify the dot gain curve in another dialog box which also allows saving the new dot gain curve. 8

9

The separation settings angle, shape, frequency, and dot gain curve for the individual channels can be saved in a set and loaded.

Editing the Image The image can be edited as usual. Please note the most image editing functions work on the complete image and not on the individual separations. The separations are linked together. Most image editing functions show the colored preview.

Printing the Separations Printing the separation job is done as usual. Please note that the settings in the print environment concerning the dithering method, density linearization, and printer profile are ignored. The settings for the individual image in the Separations dialog are used instead. Just the output resolution of the print environment is used.

Printing Separations

3

Creating Digital Separations Sometimes, the separated layers are not needed to be printed on film media but simply saved as monochrome TIFF files. For this purpose, the ErgoSoft RIP offers a special print driver.

Creating the Print Environment Open the Print Environment Manager by clicking the icon in the Print Environment toolbar. 1

1

Click the Add button to add a new print environment. 2

3

Open the Others entry and scroll down to FilmTiffOutput. Select the driver offering the number of channels you want to separate. When 3 you need more than 8 channels (including CMYK) you have to create another print environment for the other channels and print the same job twice (or more often) using the different print environments until you have all separations. 3

2

Configuring the Print Environment Most parts of the print environment are configured as usual. Since this documentation focuses on the special configurations for the TiffOutput driver please refer to the manual part about Print Environments for information on the settings not mentioned here. On the Quality tab, select the dithering method, density linearization and printer profile you want to use for creating the separations. We recommend using dithering method Screen Printing Applications.

Printing Separations

4

Since this print driver does not create output for a certain printer type, you cannot select a physical port for the printer settings after clicking the appropriate buttons on the Printer and Port tab. You can just enter or select a folder name. When printing, the ErgoSoft RIP will create sub-folders for each job holding the separations a individual monochrome TIFF files. The file names are created automatically. 4

The Device Options tab allows entering the resolution in which the separation files are created. You may also select a Compression method for the TIFF files. Checking Generate Preview creates a small RGB TIFF file holding a colored preview of the job.

4 4

4

5

Printing Separations

5

5

Importing and Editing the Image The image is imported and edited as usual. Since the separation is done during the printing process, all modifications are done on the colored image in the original color space.

Printing the Job When printing the job, a new sub-folder labeled with the job number and name (corresponding to the name in the JobCenter) is created in the spool folder specified in the print environment. The monochrome TIFF files are labeled according to the color for which the separation is created. All settings in the print environment are used to create the separations.

Printing Separations

6

Application Notes Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Requirements for Using White Ink or Finish/Varnish...................................................................................1 Possibilities to Print with White Ink or Finish/Varnish .................................................................................2 Automatic Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish...................................................................................3 Settings on the Device Options Tab in the Print Environment...........................................................3 Settings on the Printing Ink Assignment Tab in the Print Environment .........................................4 Summary .................................................................................................................................................................5 Using White Ink or Finish/Varnish like a Spot Color ....................................................................................6 Preparing the Image for White or Finish/Varnish Spot Color .............................................................6 Creating a PostScript-File ...........................................................................................................................6 Creating a Multi-Channel TIFF File or DCS File...................................................................................6 Settings on the Device Options Tab in the Print Environment...........................................................7 Settings on the Printing Ink Assignment Tab in the Print Environment .........................................7 Summary .................................................................................................................................................................8 Manually Replacing Image Colors by White Ink or Finish/Varnish.........................................................9 Settings on the Device Options Tab in the Print Environment...........................................................9 Settings on the Printing Ink Assignment Tab in the Print Environment .........................................9 Manual Color Replacement .......................................................................................................................... 10 Summary .............................................................................................................................................................. 11 Priorities ..................................................................................................................................................................... 12 Setting Printing Parameters for Certain Images ......................................................................................... 13 Printing Image Spot Color Channels ......................................................................................................... 15 Printing Custom Colors .................................................................................................................................. 15 Printing Image Background .......................................................................................................................... 16 Printing where Pixels are (not) Set ............................................................................................................. 17 Printing Depending on Coverage with Colored Ink ............................................................................ 18

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

ii

Introduction Nowadays, many printer manufacturer produce printers being able to automatically or halfautomatically print white ink or finish/varnish in a special way together with the colored inks or in a separate layer. The ErgoSoft RIP offers not only the possibility to control these printers but also a basic way of printing white ink or finish/varnish together with colored inks for many of the other printers. This documentation will explain the various possibilities of using white ink and finish/varnish as well as the necessary configurations in the ErgoSoft RIP.

Requirements for Using White Ink or Finish/Varnish In order to print with white ink or finish/varnish the following requirements must be met: In order to use white ink or finish/varnish in addition to the four basic ink colors CMYK, the printer must have more than 4 slots for ink cartridges and provide the possibility to configure minimum a 5-color ink setup for CMYK plus any additional ink colors. 1

2

When the white ink or finish/varnish and the colored ink should be printed in different layers, the printer must support this functionality.

3

When the printer does not provide the functionality to print white ink or finish/varnish, the print environment for the driver must allow full access to the ink selection for the

slots.

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

1

Possibilities to Print with White Ink or Finish/Varnish The ErgoSoft RIP offers the following possibilities to print with white ink or finish/varnish: Automatic Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish Automatic printing with white ink or finish/varnish means that the RIP software automatically creates the white or finish/varnish layer from the color image and sends the data to the printer. You have just restricted control over the areas that are printed with white ink or finish/varnish. Chapter “Automatic Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish” will explain the necessary settings as well as the restrictions for this method. 1

Using the Automatic Spot Color Replacement in PostScript/PDF Files Using the automatic PostScript/PDF spot color replacement of the ErgoSoft RIP allows absolute control over the locations where the white or finish/varnish pixels are set. This method treats the white ink or finish/varnish as any other spot color. Chapter “Using White Ink or Finish/Varnish like a Spot Color” will explain the necessary settings as well as the restrictions for this method. 2

Using an Extra Color Channel in TIFF or DCS Files Using and extra color channel (spot color channel) in TIFF or DCS files allows absolute control over the locations where the white or finish/varnish pixels are set. This method treats the white ink or finish/varnish channel in the image as any other spot color channel. Chapter “Using White Ink or Finish/Varnish like a Spot Color” will explain the necessary settings as well as the restrictions for this method. 3

Using the Manual Color Replacement Using the manual color replacement functionality of the ErgoSoft RIP allows selecting the white ink or finish/varnish for replacement of any color in any image without having to specially create or modify the image. This method treats the white ink or finish/varnish as any other available ink in the print environment. Chapter “Manually Replacing Image Colors by White Ink or Finish/Varnish” will explain the necessary settings as well as the restrictions for this method. 4

Setting Printing Parameters for Certain Images The global settings for the methods using white ink or finish/varnish for automatic spot color replacement or for printing an extra color channel in the file (methods 2 and 3) can be overwritten for the currently selected image(s). These settings can be saved as image presets for easy re-use for certain images. This method works only in combination with one of the methods 2 and 3. Chapter “Setting Printing Parameters for Certain Images” will explain the necessary settings as well as its usage. 5

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

2

Automatic Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish Automatic printing with white ink or finish/varnish means that the RIP software automatically creates the white or finish/varnish layer from the color image and sends the data to the printer. You have just restricted control over the areas that are printed with white ink or finish/varnish. The ErgoSoft RIP offers the automatic white or finish/varnish printing functionality for almost all printer drivers with access to more than 4 ink slots.

Settings on the Device Options Tab in the Print Environment When a printer offers a white or finish/varnish printing functionality the Device Options tab of the print environment also offers some white or finish/varnish printing options that must be enabled generally in order to activate printing with white ink or finish/varnish. The image shows the example for Roland LEC 3300 which allows specifying the ink order and some more settings for the white and finish/varnish layers. The ink order in general is: All (white, finish/varnish and colored) ink together in one pass Each ink type (white, finish/varnish, colored) in separate layers: The first ink type in one layer, then the next ink type in another layer, and so on. Some printers allow splitting the heads for using two ink types together in one step. When the printer allows more than one white or finish/varnish layer there might be several selections for the order of white and colored ink (e.g. Zuend UV-Jet allows more than one slot with white ink controlled in the Device Options) Some printers allow configuring the different ink types in relation to all or some device settings normally available for colored ink. Please note that when the Device Options tab does not show any white ink or finish/varnish option the printer does not support automatic white or finish/varnish printing or that you selected a print driver that is not appropriate to your needs.

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

3

Settings on the Printing Ink Assignment Tab in the Print Environment Whether your printer provides automatic white or finish/varnish printing or not you always have to specify some settings on the Printing Ink Assignment tab. Select the name Spot Color White ... for slots with white ink and Finish/Varnish … for slots with finish/varnish. 1

You may specify the density linearization option which is normally not needed and can be left in the default setting. 2

1

Activate the automatic white or finish/varnish printing 2 option by checking Generate pixels and specifying where the white 3 3 ink or finish/varnish should be printed: 4 On the complete image background Where something is printed (only for drivers creating rasterized output, i.e. dithering method must be selectable) Where nothing is printed (only for drivers creating rasterized output, i.e. dithering method must be selectable) The ErgoSoft RIP can use the transparency mask of the image to automatically print the white ink or finish/varnish only in not transparent areas. Please note that the colored ink and white ink or finish/varnish may be printed in the same pass possibly mixing the ink types when the print driver or printer does not offer white ink or finish/varnish functionality on the Device Options tab. 3

When the white ink or finish/varnish is excluded from Density, it is printed with maximum ink amount possible without the possibility of any limitation. The Generate Density value is used to reduce the optical density (maximum amount of ink used) and thus, works similar to the ink limitation in the density linearization. Select a (positive) Dot Reduction value to reduce the area covered by the white ink or finish/varnish elements by the selected value on all borders. E.g. the diameter of a circle will be reduced by double the selected value. To increase the covered area you may enter a negative value manually. Please note that only values between 1 and 4 can be selected; when needing higher values you have to enter them manually. Please note that these options are not available for Legacy print drivers (print drivers not using the new print environment format). For more information about legacy print drivers please refer to the manual part about Print Environments. 4

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

4

Summary When the printer offers an automatic white or finish/varnish printing function, you have to activate both the white ink or finish/varnish option on the Device Options tab as well as the pixel generation in the settings for the white spot color or finish/varnish on the Printing Ink Assignment tab to successfully use the automatic white or finish/varnish printing functionality of the ErgoSoft RIP. The white or finish/varnish printing functionality of the printer controls the physical output of the white ink or finish/varnish while the automatic white or finish/varnish printing functionality of the ErgoSoft RIP controls where the white ink or finish/varnish is to be printed. When the printer does not offer an automatic white or finish/varnish printing function, limited automatic white or finish/varnish printing is available by activating the pixel generation in the settings for the white spot color or finish/varnish on the Printing Ink Assignment tab. But the colored ink and white ink or finish/varnish may be printed in the same pass possibly mixing the ink types.

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

5

Using White Ink or Finish/Varnish like a Spot Color When you want to have absolute control over the locations where the white or finish/varnish pixels are set you have to use the spot color functionality. This also requires some special preparations in the image itself.

Preparing the Image for White or Finish/Varnish Spot Color Creating a PostScript-File In e.g. Adobe Illustrator CS3, select the New Swatch option to create a new color swatch. Now define the name of the color area that should be replaced and make sure that the type of the color is set to Spot Color. Now color the area that should be replaced in the image with the color you just created and save the image in the EPS file format.

Creating a Multi-Channel TIFF File or DCS File In e.g. Adobe Photoshop add a new Spot Color channel to the image channels. Fill the areas to be printed with white ink or finish/varnish with any color. When using white ink and finish/varnish and other spot colors, the spot color channels in the image are assigned to first to Spot Color…, then to Spot Color White…, and at last to Finish/Varnish…. The names for the spot color channels in the image do not matter; just the order of the channels controls the distribution of the image spot color channels on the different Spot Color…, Spot Color White… and Finish/Varnish channels in the print environment. Please note that before importing the DCS file you should verify that the option Treat DCS as separated file is checked in the ErgoSoft RIP (menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Image > PostScript/PDF > Parameters).

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

6

Settings on the Device Options Tab in the Print Environment The settings on the Device Options tab are the same as already described above for "Automatic Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish".

Settings on the Printing Ink Assignment Tab in the Print Environment When using the white ink or finish/varnish like a spot color you have to specify some settings on the Printing Ink Assignment tab. Select the name Spot Color White ... for slots with white ink and Finish/Varnish … for slots with finish/varnish. 1

When the white or finish/varnish area in the (PostScript) image is design using spot color swatches you have to enter the name of the spot color as Name of separation color. When using spot color channels in TIFF or DCS file, the name of separation color is ignored. 2

You may specify the density linearization option which is normally not needed and can be left in the default setting. 3

1

2 3 4

4 5

In order to use the white ink or finish/varnish like a spot color, do not check Generate pixels. Please note that the colored ink and white ink or finish/varnish may be printed in the same pass possibly mixing the ink types when the print driver or printer does not offer white ink or finish/varnish functionality on the Device Options tab. 4

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

7

When the white ink or finish/varnish is excluded from Density, it is printed with maximum ink amount possible without the possibility of any limitation. The Generate Density value is used to reduce the optical density (maximum amount of ink used) and thus, works similar to the ink limitation in the density linearization. Select a (positive) Dot Reduction value to reduce the area covered by the white ink or finish/varnish elements by the selected value on all borders. E.g. the diameter of a circle will be reduced by double the selected value. To increase the covered area you may enter a negative value manually. Please note that only values between 1 and 4 can be selected; when needing higher values you have to enter them manually. Please note that these options are not available for Legacy print drivers (print drivers not using the new print environment format). For more information about legacy print drivers please refer to the manual part about Print Environments. 5

Summary When the printer offers an automatic white or finish/varnish printing function, you have to activate the white ink or finish/varnish option on the Device Options tab but not the pixel generation in the settings for the white spot color or finish/varnish on the Printing Ink Assignment tab to successfully use the white ink or finish/varnish like a spot color. The white or finish/varnish printing functionality of the printer controls the physical output of the white ink or finish/varnish while the spot color (channel) settings in the image itself control where the white ink or finish/varnish is to be printed. When the printer does not offer an automatic white or finish/varnish printing function, the colored ink and white ink or finish/varnish may be printed in the same pass possibly mixing the ink types.

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

8

Manually Replacing Image Colors by White Ink or Finish/Varnish Using the manual color replacement functionality of the ErgoSoft RIP allows selecting the white ink or finish/varnish for replacement of any color in any image without having to specially create or modify the image. In addition to the settings in the print environment, this method needs manual intervention in the job by performing manual color replacement.

Settings on the Device Options Tab in the Print Environment The settings on the Device Options tab are the same as already described above for "Automatic Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish".

Settings on the Printing Ink Assignment Tab in the Print Environment When using the white ink or finish/varnish as a replacement color, you have to specify some settings on the Printing Ink Assignment tab. Select the name Spot Color White ... for slots with white ink and Finish/Varnish … for slots with finish/varnish. 1

When printing PostScript or PDF files, the automatic spot color replacement has priority over manual color replacement. Thus, do not enter a Name of separation color. 2

You may specify the density linearization option which is normally not needed and can be left in the default setting.

1

2 3

3

4

4 5

In order to use the white ink or finish/varnish like a spot color, do not check Generate pixels. Please note that the colored ink and white ink or finish/varnish may be printed in the same pass possibly mixing the ink types when the print driver or printer does not offer white ink or finish/varnish functionality on the Device Options tab. 4

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

9

When the white ink or finish/varnish is excluded from Density, it is printed with maximum ink amount possible without the possibility of any limitation. The Generate Density value is used to reduce the optical density (maximum amount of ink used) and thus, works similar to the ink limitation in the density linearization. Select a (positive) Dot Reduction value to reduce the area covered by the white ink or finish/varnish elements by the selected value on all borders. E.g. the diameter of a circle will be reduced by double the selected value. To increase the covered area you may enter a negative value manually. Please note that only values between 1 and 4 can be selected; when needing higher values you have to enter them manually. Please note that these options are not available for Legacy print drivers (print drivers not using the new print environment format). For more information about legacy print drivers please refer to the manual part about Print Environments. 5

Manual Color Replacement Select the image and launch the manual color replacement by selecting Replace Colors in the Image Properties window.

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

10

Select the color to be replaced, the replacement tool, and enter the value for the replacement color in the channels labeled W… for Spot Color White … and V… for Finish/Varnish … For more information about manual color replacement please refer to the manual part about Color Replacement.

Summary When the printer offers an automatic white or finish/varnish printing function, you have to activate the white ink or finish/varnish option on the Device Options tab but not the pixel generation nor enter a name for the separation color in the settings for the white spot color or finish/varnish on the Printing Ink Assignment tab to successfully use the white ink or finish/varnish as a replacement color. The white or finish/varnish printing functionality of the printer controls the physical output of the white ink or finish/varnish while the color replacement in the image itself control where the white ink or finish/varnish is to be printed. When the printer does not offer an automatic white or finish/varnish printing function, the colored ink and white ink or finish/varnish may be printed in the same pass possibly mixing the ink types.

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

11

Priorities Since the possibilities for (automatic) printing with white ink or finish/varnish need different settings in the Printing Ink Assignment tab, there are certain priorities to be considered. Highest Priority (Priority 1) Having checked Generate Pixel will activate the automatic white ink or finish/varnish printing and ignore all settings for using white ink or finish/varnish like a spot color or manual color replacement. 1

It depends on the used file type which of the remaining two white printing possibilities has priority over the other one: PostScript and PDF files: Having entered a Name of separation color has priority over manual color replacement of the area filled with the named spot color. That means: when e.g. having specified Name of separation color “MyColor” and manually replacing the area in the image filled with spot color “MyColor” will reject the manual color replacement and print the named area with Spot Color White … or Finish/Varnish … 2

TIFF files: Since TIFF files do not support color names in the file, it does not matter whether you entered a Name of separation color. TIFF files simply assign the additional spot color channels to color channels Spot Color…, Spot Color White… and Finish/Varnish… in the named order. Since manual color replacement can be executed for the basic color channels RGB or CMYK only and not for additional spot color channels, manual color replacement will work independently from using additional spot color channels for white ink or finish/varnish printing resulting in manual color replacement having priority over spot color channel usage. 3

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

12

Setting Printing Parameters for Certain Images Sometime, preparations for printing with white ink or finish/varnish in the images do not correspond to the settings in the print environment because e.g. another name for the spot color swatch is used or another order for additional color channels than the ones set up in the print environment. Instead of modifying the image or print environment for these cases, the Extra Channels preset or configuration can be used to set special parameters for the selected images. Using the Extra Channels configuration also allows printing images with different white or finish/varnish printing settings in the same job.

2 2 1 3 4

4

1

To create and select Extra Channels Presets use the Image Properties page Extra Channels.

2

Select the Extra Channels Preset you want to use with the selected image(s). Click the New button to create a new extra channels preset based on the selected one.

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

13

3

Check Specify Extra Channel Mapping to activate overwriting the white ink or finish/varnish settings in the print environment.

Click the New button to add a ink color. From the list of extra ink colors, select the one that you want to use for printing with the settings you will specify in the next step. Take care to select just the ink colors that are used in your print environment(s) with which you want to use the extra channel preset. 4

Select the filling method (Fill with) and the filling parameter that depend on the filling method. The possible settings are described below; available filling methods are: Image Spot Channel Custom Color Complete Background Lightness CMYK Median Complement CMYK Maximum Complement 5

Select a Gradation curve for using with the selected spot color ink or click the Edit button to modify the selected gradation curve. Specify the gradation curve for the current spot color ink. Check Spline interpolation to create a smooth curve instead of points that a connected by straight lines. Creating a falling curve from the upper left corner to the lower right corner will result in inversing the ink coverage. Enter a description in the field on top of the dialog and click the Save button to save the gradation curve. Please note that the gradation is not available for all filling methods. 6

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

5 6

6

14

Printing Image Spot Color Channels For TIFF files, additional spot color channels of the image may be assigned to the white ink or finish/varnish. Select Fill with method Image Spot Channel. Select the additional spot color channel in the Image Channel list of extra channels. When counting the channels, the basic channels CMYK or RGB are omitted so that the list starts with the first additional spot color channel. Select the Gradation you want to use for the ink channel. This method works similar to using white ink or finish/varnish like a spot color for multichannel TIFF files.

Printing Custom Colors For PostScript and PDF files supporting custom color names in the file, custom color names may be assigned to the white ink or finish/varnish. Select Fill with method Custom Color. Enter the name of the custom color into field Color Name or select it from the list that is displayed when configuring the Extra Channels functions not as preset but directly for the selected image. This method does not allow selecting a gradation. The intensity (coverage) is specified by the color intensity used when coloring the image with the spot color. When just needing a reduction of the end density, set a density value in the settings of the white ink or finish/varnish in the print environment. This method works similar to using white ink or finish/varnish like a spot color for PostScript files.

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

15

Printing Image Background

White ink or finish/varnish can be printed on the complete, not transparent image background: Select Fill with method Complete Background. Select the Gradation you want to use for the ink channel. The b&w image on the right side shows – colored in black – the parts of the image on the left side that will be printed with white ink. This method works similar to printing automatically with white ink or finish/varnish and selecting the image background for pixel generation in the white ink or finish/varnish settings in the print environment.

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

16

Printing where Pixels are (not) Set

White ink or finish/varnish can be printed depending on the lightness (L component of Lab value) of the image colors. In order to extract the lightness of the color values, an input profile must be assigned to the image. Select Fill with method Lightness. Select the Gradation you want to use for the ink channels. The &w images on the right side shows – colored in black – the parts of the image on the left side that will be printed with white ink. The upper b&w image shows the usage of the default (none) gradation so that white or finish/varnish pixels are printed where no other pixels are set. The lower b&w image shows the usage of the inverse gradation displayed at the right side so that white or finish/varnish pixels are printed where other pixels are set. This method is similar to printing automatically with white ink or finish/varnish and selecting methods Where nothing is printed (no special gradation) resp. Where something is printed (inverse gradation) for pixel generation in the white ink or finish/varnish settings in the print environment.

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

17

Printing Depending on Coverage with Colored Ink

White ink of finish/varnish can be printed depending on the CMYK part of the output values. Select Fill with methods CMYK Medium Complement or CMYK Maximum Complement depending on the method you want the white ink or finish/varnish values to be calculated. Select the Gradation you want to use for the ink channels. The different calculation methods are best explained using the sample: The original image (colored image above) is created with 4 rows of patches rising in 10% steps per color. The first row uses Magenta only; the second row adds Cyan with the same percentage values as Magenta; the third row adds Yellow with the same percentage values as Cyan and Magenta; and the fourth row adds Black with the same percentage values as Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow (400% ink maximum). The ink limit in the print environment used to create the sample output is set to 300%. The CMYK Median Complement method is shown in the upper b&w image. It uses different values for white ink or finish/varnish depending on the absolute values of CMYK. The values for white ink or finish/varnish are calculated using the difference between the ink limit used in the print environment and the sum of CMYK values used for output.

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

18

The CMYK Maximum Complement method is shown in the lower b&w image. It uses different values for white ink or finish/varnish depending on the relative values of CMYK. The values for white ink or finish/varnish are calculated using the relation of the relative part of used ink per color and the ink limit used in the print environment. The settings for white ink or finish/varnish in the print environment do not offer a configuration that is similar to this method of creating the white or finish/varnish pixels.

Printing with White Ink or Finish/Varnish

19

Application Notes Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Creating/Importing Cut Environment ................................................................................................................1 Cut Environments Dialog ..................................................................................................................................1 Cut Environments Settings ...............................................................................................................................2 Quality Tab .......................................................................................................................................................2 Cutter Device Tab ..........................................................................................................................................2 Extended Tab ...................................................................................................................................................3 Production Tab ...............................................................................................................................................4 Device Options Tab .......................................................................................................................................4 General Tab ......................................................................................................................................................4 Creating a Cut Job .....................................................................................................................................................5 Activating Contour Cutting ..............................................................................................................................5 Importing Image ..................................................................................................................................................5 Preparing the Image in the Design Program ......................................................................................5 Importing Image ............................................................................................................................................6 Editing Job ..............................................................................................................................................................6 Printing a Cut Job ......................................................................................................................................................6 Cutting Directly to the Port (no Spooling) .......................................................................................................7 Specifying the Cut Paths ...................................................................................................................................7 Selecting the Cut Paths .....................................................................................................................................8 Displaying the Cut Paths ...................................................................................................................................8 Starting the Contour Cutting ..........................................................................................................................9 Cutting a Cut Job using the Cut Client ..............................................................................................................9 Starting the Printing and Contour Cutting ................................................................................................9 Starting the Cut Client .......................................................................................................................................9 Selecting and Starting a Cut Job................................................................................................................. 10 Using Barcodes to Select a Cut Job ........................................................................................................... 10 Using Print & Cut Devices ................................................................................................................................... 11 Basics ..................................................................................................................................................................... 11 Creating the Print Environment................................................................................................................... 11 Creating the Cut Environment ..................................................................................................................... 12 Configuring a “Cut after Printing” or “Cut before Printing” Driver .......................................... 13 Configuring a “Using Marks” Driver..................................................................................................... 13 Print & Cut a Job on a Print & Cut Device .............................................................................................. 13

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

ii

Special Cutting Drivers and Functions ............................................................................................................ 14 Mimaki “repeat” / Graphtec “repeat” ........................................................................................................ 14 Summa Pharos and S-Class with OPOS ................................................................................................... 14 Summa Pharos and S-Class with Barcode ............................................................................................... 15 Mutoh Ultima, SC-Pro, Kona with Barcode ............................................................................................. 15 Eurosystems OptiSCOUT / Zuend Touch and Cut................................................................................ 16 MGE i-Cut ............................................................................................................................................................ 17 Cutting Stickers ................................................................................................................................................. 17 Preparing the Image .................................................................................................................................. 17 Configuring the Cut Paths ....................................................................................................................... 18 Cutting the Stickers .................................................................................................................................... 19 Special Automatic Cut Marks ....................................................................................................................... 19 Eurosystems OptiSCOUT / Zuend Touch and Cut .......................................................................... 19 MGE i-Cut Barcode ..................................................................................................................................... 19 Mutoh AL3 ..................................................................................................................................................... 20 Mutoh Barcode AL5/MF ........................................................................................................................... 20 Mutoh Barcode ............................................................................................................................................ 20 Summa OPOS XY ........................................................................................................................................ 21 Summa OPOS Barcode / Summa OPOS Barcode XY .................................................................... 21

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

iii

Introduction This document is meant to give you all needed information about the possibilities of the ErgoSoft Cut function. Please read this document carefully to make sure, that you can take the best possible benefit of using the ErgoSoft Cut function.

Creating/Importing Cut Environment For easier access on the cutting functions we recommend to activate the Cut Environment tool bar via menu View > Tools > Cut Environment. Please note that you should save the workspace in order to restore the changes next time the workspace is loaded after starting the ErgoSoft RIP or having switched to another workspace.

Cut Environments Dialog Open the Cut environments dialog by clicking on the Cut Environments Icon in the Cut Environment toolbar or by selecting menu Tools > Cut Environments. 1

1

1

2

Select Add to open the Add Contour Cut Environment 1 dialog. The list shown here contains all manufacturers of which a cutting device is supported. To select a specific device driver, please click on the 2 “+“ in front of the particular manufacturer to display the list of the devices. Select the device driver you want to use and enter a Name for the cut environment. Confirm the driver selection by clicking the OK button. 2

If however the selected driver supports different sizes of the selected device, please specify the size in the appearing dialog and confirm your selection by clicking the OK button.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

1

Cut Environments Settings Now the Quality tab of the new cut environment is displayed. Please find a description of the available and required settings in the following.

Quality Tab In the Quality tab you can set the Speed, Pressure and Accuracy for the cutter. If you uncheck the checkboxes for speed and pressure, these settings will be controlled by the device itself. The accuracy specifies the number of points a curve is build with. The higher the accuracy the more points and the smaller the steps will be with cost of speed; the lower the accuracy the less points and the longer the steps will be with cost of smoothness, curve may have unwanted edges. Please note that all settings can be changed for each cut path in the cut path settings while just speed and pressure can be changed in the Cut Client.

Cutter Device Tab The Cutter Device tab allows you to set up a configuration file which contains all the needed information to send data to your cutter. These settings can be loaded whenever you create a new cut environment for this cutter. Create Cutter Configuration File To specify the required information such as the port used as well as port settings, create a new configuration file by clicking the New button. Once you have created a cut environment, you can edit, delete or rename the configuration file using the respective buttons. 1

Specify Cutter Port 2 Click on Add to specify the port of your cutter. Select or specify the required port in the Add Port dialog. The available port types depend on the cutter type.

1 1

4

Specify Folder for Spool Files If your copy of the ErgoSoft RIP supports the usage of Cut Clients (spooling of cut jobs) you also need to set up a spool folder in which the spool files can be saved. 3

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

2 3

2

2

When having several systems to prepare cut files for the same cutter with automatic barcode support, assigning a different StationId to each system will prevent having accidentally printouts from 2 systems with the same barcode. Since the StationId is part of the barcode, barcodes from 2 systems with different StationIds will be different any time. 4

Extended Tab The Extended tab allows you to control several settings for the cutting and cutting marks configuration. The drivers provided by ErgoSoft do already contain the correct settings for the selected devices. Therefore these settings should be handled with caution. The Step Size defines the used scale unit for the sent commands. Most supported cutter drivers allow switching between “0.01 mm” and “0.025 mm” for the step size. Since “cm” and “inch” are supported by some certain cutters (e.g. MGE i-Cut) only we strongly recommend to ensure that it is supported by your cutter before selecting “cm” or “inch”. 1

The Border settings define the size of the borders used for a job which should also be cut. The drivers provided by ErgoSoft do already contain the correct settings for the selected devices. 2

3

1

2

3

4

5

Section Scale allows you to do a manual distortion correction. This option is only available for cutters which do not have an automatic distortion correction.

Section Marks allows you to specify the size of the cut marks and the distance between the cut marks and the image or job (when your cutter supports this configuration). When your cutter offers the possibility to frequently print cut marks in order to increase cutting accuracy, you may also enter the distance between the cut marks. 4

Section Barcode allows you to activate printing a barcode with the job as well as to specify the dimension of the barcode area, the alignment of the barcode in this area, and the vertical distance of this area to the job. 5

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

3

Production Tab The Production tab allows some settings useful for the production itself. By default, the cutter will cut the complete job in one step. This means that the media will be moved forwards and backwards over the complete job length. Checking Use Paneling and entering a Panel Size will split the job into panels so that the media must be moved forward and backward just over the panel size. When all lines in the first panel are cut, the media will be moved forward to cut the lines in the next panel. Paneling can also be set (but not deactivated) for each cut paths. Thus, when needing some cut paths with and some without paneling, we recommend to specify the paneling in the cut path settings. Check Cut in Reversed Order to start cutting at the end of a stack of printed jobs instead of at the beginning. This option might be useful for many jobs printed on media already rolled to avoid moving the media back at the beginning of the job (e.g. with Summa cutters supporting barcode).

Device Options Tab Some cut drivers offer additional options which can be found in the Device Options tab.

General Tab The General tab allows modifying the name or the description of the cut environment as well as the model if the cutter comes in several models. It also shows the basic cut driver the cut environment is based on.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

4

Creating a Cut Job Activating Contour Cutting In order to create a cut job and to use the selected cut environment, you have to activate contour cutting. You can do that by clicking the Contour Cut icon in the Cut Environment toolbar. The required borders for the cut marks are automatically added to the media borders so that the available job width might be less. Please note that the job width will be limited to the smaller value of maximum job width supported by the printer and the maximum job width supported by the cutter.

Importing Image Preparing the Image in the Design Program Use a suitable design program such as CorelDraw, Photoshop, Illustrator, or FreeHand to create the cutting paths in the original image, making sure the cutting curve will be able to cut the image later. You have several possibilities to define your cut path: Path in CMYK, Clipping Path, or Spot Color Path with the possibility to not print it. When designing a CMYK path please keep in mind that it will be also printed and thus, should have a color that is not visible in the printout.

CutSample 1: Photoshop Clippath

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

CutSample 2: rectangle with CMYK path in 100% black star with Spot Color outline “Star” polygon with Spot Color outline “Polygon”

5

When saving the file as EPS or PDF you have to take care that the cutting paths are not converted. The following example shows the settings for Illustrator CS3/CS4 when saving as EPS or PDF file. The relevant setting is hidden in the “Transparency” section of the EPS saving options as well as in the “Advanced” tab of the PDF (1.3) saving options:

Take care that “Convert All Strokes to Outlines” is not checked to prevent the contours being converted into fill paths.

Importing Image You can import the image to be cut as all other images.

Editing Job You can edit your images in the job as usual. You can rotate, tile, crop, duplicate, mirror etc. in the same way as for none cut jobs.

Printing a Cut Job Once you have finished the layout of your job, you can print the job on your printer. But before you print your job it is necessary to decide how the cutting of the job should be processed. There are basically two different ways to cut a cut job: Cut directly to a port or cut using a Cut Client. If the usage of the Cut Client is licensed, you can switch between these two options by activating or deactivating the Cut directly to Port (no spooling) option in the Cutter Device tab of the active cut environment.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

6

Cutting Directly to the Port (no Spooling) For cutting directly to the port, the cut process must be launched manually in the JobComposer after having fed the printed job into the cutter. Launch cutting by clicking the Cut icon in the Standard toolbar or by selecting menu File > Cut. In the appearing dialog you can specify which paths should be used as cut path.

Specifying the Cut Paths To set up the desired path click the New or Edit button. This opens the dialog in which you specify the cut path settings. Tabs Quality and Paneling (which is only available when paneling is not 1 a activated in the cut environment) allow overwriting the settings of the cut en2 vironment for the current cut path so that e.g. one cut path can be configured with paneling while all other cut paths do not use 1 c paneling. The devicedependent tab Cutting Tool allows selecting the cutting tool for the path. 4 The path settings for the samples shown above are as follows: 6 (a) CMYK path named “100% Black” (b) Clip path named “Photoshop Clip Path” (c) Spot color path named “Star” (d) Spot color path named “Polygon” 1

1

1

b

1

d

3

5

The color for the CMYK path can be selected using the color selection window opening when clicking the button at the right side. Checking Also cut fill paths will not only cut stroke paths with the specified color but also fill paths. To avoid problems this option should be checked (or unchecked) when the visual path check does not show the correct preview. 2

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

7

3

When having defined a clipping path (e.g. Photoshop Clipping Path) in your image, you have to select Clip paths.

When selecting All paths, all paths which can be found in the image will be cut. This option is meant to be used for finding out whether the ErgoSoft RIP can find any cut path in the image when the wanted path is not cut. 4

When having defined a cut path using a spot color, select Spot Color and enter the name of the spot color. Spot color paths is the only colored path type that must not be printed. 5

6

Activating Cut Image Borders will cut the image borders. This option is also available without any other cut path selection.

Selecting the Cut Paths After having specified the cut paths the paths to be actually cut must be selected. Paths can be added to the list and removed from the list. Use the arrow buttons to change the order in which the paths are cut.

Displaying the Cut Paths Before you send the cut command you can display the cut path. Therefore click on the View button in the Contour Cut dialog. In the appearing Display cut path dialog you can see the paths which will be used as cut paths. When having selected several cut paths clicking the View button while the preview window is open will scroll through the paths displaying the previews of the paths one after the other.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

8

Starting the Contour Cutting To start the cut process and send the cut command, click the Start button. Your job will now be cut according to the defined settings.

Cutting a Cut Job using the Cut Client Starting the Printing and Contour Cutting If you would like to cut a cut job using a Cut Client, you have to make sure that the usage of Cut Clients is licensed. Additionally you should assure that you have specified the usage of the Cut Client in the cut environment by un-checking Cut directly to Port (no spooling) on the Cutter Device tab. The procedure basically stays the same. Just the order of the steps is a bit different: The cutting command is not launched separately but combined with the printing command. This means that the cutting command itself is disabled. When launching the Print command, first the dialog for printing is displayed. After having adjusted all settings and sent the print command by clicking the OK button, the Contour Cut dialog is displayed for adjusting the cut settings. After having closed this dialog by clicking the Start button, ripping and printing is started. The complete printing and cutting command can be discarded by clicking the Cancel button in any dialog.

1 1

2

For a description of the cut path settings and selection please refer to chapter “Cutting Directly to the Port (no Spooling)” above.

Starting the Cut Client The Cut Client is automatically generated using the information from the cutter device tab of the cut environment. To start a Cut Client click the arrow at the right side of this icon in the Cut Environment toolbar and select the Cut Client from the list.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

9

Selecting and Starting a Cut Job To start a cut job you have to set the Cut Client from offline to start job manually. 1

4

The Cut Client will automatically select the first job in the queue window.

5

1

2

3

You can adjust the order by increasing or decreasing the priority of each job. 3

Speed and pressure can be changed for each cutting path in the job currently loaded.

2

4

5

If you would like to start the cut job, click the Start button in the Cut Client window.

Using Barcodes to Select a Cut Job When having activated the usage of barcodes in the Extended tab of your cut environment, you can identify a cut job by reading its barcode with a barcode reader. To select a specific cut job check specify and enter the CutId printed below the barcode or use the barcode reader. The Cut Client will automatically select the correct cut job in the cut queue.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

10

Using Print & Cut Devices Basics As it is mentioned in the name of these devices, they are able to perform both the printing and the cutting processes. For each of these processes, a device environment must be specified in the ErgoSoft RIP; a print environment handling the printing process, and a cut environment handling the cutting process. In general, there are 2 basic workflows for print&cut devices: 1) The media will be cut immediately before or after printing without having to be removed for drying, laminating, or other. 2) The media must be removed from the device after printing for another process such as several hours drying, laminating, etc. Cutting will be done any time later. The print environment is the same for both workflows. But the cut environment must be different.

Creating the Print Environment Create the print environment as usual. Make sure that a print&cut driver is selected. Define a printer in the Printer and Port tab. You can specify the port and the spool folder for the print files there. Please note that you have to create a print&cut print environment before you can create the related cut environment.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

11

Creating the Cut Environment Make sure that your print&cut print environment is selected as current print environment in the Print Environment toolbar. 1

Click the Print and cut in one device icon in the Cut Environment toolbar to limit the available cutter drivers to the ones suitable to the selected print driver.

1 3

2

3

2

2

2

Open the Cut Environments manager by clicking the Cut Environments icon in the Cut Environment toolbar. Click the Add button to add the cut environment. The box Print and cut in one device should be checked in the cut environments list as well as the Add Contour Cut Environment dialog. 3

Select the appropriate cut driver and click the OK button. The “Cut after printing” and “Cut before printing” drivers are designed for a workflow in which the job is printed and cut in succession without any user intervention. The “using marks” drivers are designed for a workflow in which the media is removed after printing and cutting is started later manually.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

12

Configuring a “Cut after Printing” or “Cut before Printing” Driver This type of cut environment does not contain any Cutter Device information like port or the spool folder since the print and cut information is sent at the same time using the device specifications of the active print environment. When selecting the “Cut after printing” or “Cut before printing” driver, no cut marks will be printed. The job will be cut automatically directly before printing or after the print job is finished.

Configuring a “Using Marks” Driver This type of cut environment needs Cutter Device information like port or the spool folder since printing and cutting are two independent steps. When selecting the “Using marks” driver, cut marks will be printed. The cut job must be started manually in the same way as for cut-only devices.

Print & Cut a Job on a Print & Cut Device To print and cut a job on a print&cut devices you simply have to make sure that the correct print environment as well as the correct cut environment is selected.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

13

Special Cutting Drivers and Functions Mimaki “repeat” / Graphtec “repeat” When having selected a Mimaki or Graphtec “repeat” driver printing several copies of a job works as follows: All copies of the job are combined in a huge job by duplicating the job including the cut marks horizontally and vertically. The result is not treated as a job with e.g. 6 copies of the jobs but as one job with 6 images. Thus, the number of copies cannot be changed in the Print Client or Cut Client.

Summa Pharos and S-Class with OPOS These cutter drivers allow configuring cut marks along the job length. The additional cut marks are also automatically detected by the device when reading the marks.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

14

Summa Pharos and S-Class with Barcode This type of cutter drivers does not use a port. This means that in the cut environment configuration, a physical port cannot be set but just a spool folder. The ErgoSoft RIP just create the plot data. Then, the CutServer provided by the cutter manufacturer must fetch the file and send it to the cutter. Since these cutters may roll the printed media and find the correct cut job using the barcode, checking the option Cut in Reversed Order on the Production tab is recommended when you want to cut the roll beginning with the last printed job and starting to cut from the bottom of the job to the top.

Mutoh Ultima, SC-Pro, Kona with Barcode All Mutoh “barcode” cutter drivers do not use a port. This means that in the cut environment configuration, a physical port cannot be set but just a spool folder. The ErgoSoft RIP just create the plot data. Then, the CutServer provided by the cutter manufacturer must fetch the file and send it to the cutter.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

15

Eurosystems OptiSCOUT / Zuend Touch and Cut Eurosystems OptiSCOUT and Zuend Touch and Cut cutters allow setting the cut marks manually. The ErgoSoft RIP offer this manual cut mark positioning as an option – in addition to automatic positioning of cut marks which is included in the basic cut option. Manual cut mark positioning can be done for the selected image by selecting Cut Mark Position from the image context menu that is displayed when you click the right mouse button on the image.

3

2

Set the marks by clicking the position in the 1 preview window. Remove a mark by clicking on it in the preview window.

1

2

To remove all cut marks you can click the Clear button instead of removing each mark manually.

3

The complete list of marks can be saved and loaded for another image needing the same marks.

Please note that defining the marks manually for one image in a job will discard automatic mark creation during printing; you have to set the marks manually for all other images in the job, too.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

16

MGE i-Cut MGE i-Cut cutters allow setting the cut marks manually. The ErgoSoft RIP offer this manual cut mark positioning as an option – in addition to automatic positioning of cut marks which is included in the basic cut option. It offers all functions described for OptiSCOUT and Zuend Touch and Cut above. The MGE i-Cut driver allows setting the marks auto3 matically related to a cut path. Therefore you have to define the 4 number of marks to be set and the path to be 2 used. Then, click the Generate button to add the marks to the image. Additional marks can be added manually. 4 3 2 1

1

Cutting Stickers Some cutters from Summa, Mutoh, and Mimaki offer the possibility to produce stickers very easily. They come with a cutting tool that does not cut the complete line but let some small parts non-cut so that the parts still stick together but can easily be separated.

Preparing the Image In order to cut the sticker itself as well as to perforate the sticker page you need to create 2 cut paths of different type: One for the sticker itself and the second where the perforation has to go. Since the ErgoSoft RIP offers the possibility to cut the image border, you might not need the second “perforation” cut path when you can use the image border instead. As long as the sticker itself does not have a printed border you can use a cut path we recommend to create a Spot Color cut path around the sticker (in the following named Sticker Cut Path colored with spot color Sticker) that is not printed. For the “perforation” cut path we recommend to either create another Spot Color cut path using a different spot color (in the following named Perforation Cut Path colored with spot color Perforation) or to use the image border a automatically created cut path.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

17

Configuring the Cut Paths Sticker Cut Path The Spot Color cut path is designed as usual. Take care that Do not print the spot color is checked when you do not want to print the border around the sticker itself. 1

Since stickers easily peel off when moving the media forward and backward during cutting, we strongly recommend activating the paneling for the sticker cut path. The other settings can be done as usual. 2

2

1

Perforation Cut Path When the perforation cut path is designed in the image as a spot color path, the cut path must be configured as a spot color cut path as described above. 1

When you want to use the image 2 1 border for the perforation cut path, make sure to uncheck Path from Image Data and to check Cut Image Border to just create a cut path from the image border information in the file (e.g. Bounding Box in EPS files). 3

2

The configuration of the special tool for creating the perforation depends on the used cutter type:

Mutoh Mimaki

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

Summa

18

Cutting the Stickers When cutting the stickers we recommend to first cut the perforation cut path and then the sticker cut path.

Special Automatic Cut Marks Eurosystems OptiSCOUT / Zuend Touch and Cut The dimension of the barcode can be configured on the Device Options tab in the cut environment. The automatic cut marks are configured on the Extended tab.

MGE i-Cut Barcode The dimension of the barcode as well as the number of the automatic cut marks can be configured on the Device Options tab in the cut environment.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

19

Mutoh AL3 There is no additional configuration to the standard cut mark configuration on the Extended tab in the cut environment available.

Mutoh Barcode AL5/MF There is no additional configuration to the standard cut mark configuration on the Extended tab in the cut environment available.

Please note that the sample above is rotated by 90°.

Mutoh Barcode There is no additional configuration to the standard cut mark configuration on the Extended tab in the cut environment available.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

20

Summa OPOS XY There is no additional configuration to the standard cut mark configuration on the Extended tab in the cut environment available. The line at the top of the job is meant to help adjusting the cutting when the media is distorted after printing.

Summa OPOS Barcode / Summa OPOS Barcode XY There is no additional configuration to the standard cut mark configuration on the Extended tab in the cut environment available. The line at the top of the job is needed for finding the barcode. The “XY” driver will also use it as help to adjust the cutting when the media is distorted after printing.

Contour Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs

21

Application Notes Hot Folders

Hot Folders

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Hot Folders

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Configuring the HotFolder .....................................................................................................................................2 General Settings ...................................................................................................................................................2 Job Settings............................................................................................................................................................3 Image Import.........................................................................................................................................................4 Contour Cut ...........................................................................................................................................................5 Additional Notes ..................................................................................................................................................5 Examples .......................................................................................................................................................................6 Example 1: Scaled Image, Several Identical Images per Job ...............................................................6 Example 2: Scaled Images, Minimum Job Length ...................................................................................7 Example 3: Scaled Images at Fix Positions .................................................................................................8 Example 4: Sticker Sheet including Contour Cutting .............................................................................9

Hot Folders

ii

Introduction In order to make batch printing of images easier the ErgoSoft RIP offers the HotFolder function. The usage of HotFolders makes printing standardized jobs a piece of a cake. You just have to create a folder that is linked to the appropriate HotFolder. The HotFolder (the module monitoring the output) is linked to a print environment as well as to some production specific settings. When the HotFolder is active, storing an image in the folder that is linked to the HotFolder will automatically start the print job and process it without the need of any user interaction. The number of HotFolders is not limited; you can create a HotFolder for each workflow you have and activate just the HotFolders currently needed. Copying or saving images in the disk folders linked to the HotFolders will automatically start the workflow from importing, image editing, ripping up to sending the ripped data to the Print Client. Even creating cut jobs and sending data to the Cut Client is offered. All you have to do is to configure the workflow (HotFolder) once and save the images in the specific folders on your hard disk(s). The program parts JobComposer and RIP Server do their jobs as background tasks and do not need to be started manually. All production modules such as JobCenter and Print Client are still available and can be used as usual.

1

Store the files to be printed in the appropriate folders.

Now, the files are automatically processed and printed according to the specifications set in the HotFolder. All production modules such as JobCenter and Print Client are still available and can be used as usual. 2

JobQueue Viewer RIP Server Hotfolder

Hot Folders

1

Configuring the HotFolder Start the HotFolder using the icon in the program group of the ErgoSoft RIP in the Windows program menu. You do not need to start any other application. But it requires that the used print environment is already configured correctly. To create a new Hot Folder select the HotFolder menu HotFolder > New. Then, the following configurations have to be done:

General Settings Specifying the Folder Specify the folder that is to be used as HotFolder. The files that have to be printed using the HotFolder have to be saved in this folder. The button Browse offers the possibility to create the desired folder. To be able to process the files, the HotFolder must be set to Online. We recommend setting the HotFolder to Offline during the configuration. 1

1 2 3 4

Specifying the Processing Part Processing lets you specify what should be done with processed files in the HotFolder. delete files always keep files always keep files only when the processing could not be completed 2

Selecting the Print Environment Use this part to select the print environment to be used. The selected print environment specifies the print settings to be used for printing the images. 3

Skip Print Client (Print directly to port) When checking this option, the Print Client is not used. The RIP Server will send the print data directly to the printer. 4

Hot Folders

2

Job Settings Specifying the Media Size Specify the media size and margins to be used as well as the job processing policy. 1

Use Position Template When using a Position Template, images are added to the current HotFolder job until all image positions in the template are filled. Then, the job is printed automatically. Please note that this image collection is not visible. To force printing a partly filled job, just click the Print button in the HotFolder program window. 2

1 2 3 4 5

Start Printing This option allows creating jobs with several images; the job has to reach a minimum length before the printing can be started. Thus, when entering e.g. 60 centimeters, the HotFolder will add images to the job until the job length has reached 60 centimeters and then, starts printing. Please note that this image collection is not visible. To force printing a partly filled job, just click the Print button in the HotFolder program window. 3

Use Fotoba Print Marks Instead of using the print marks configured in the ImagePreset used, Fotoba print marks can be printed. The Fotoba print marks must be configured in the JobComposer menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Job > Extras. 4

5

Options The part Options allows to specify further processing of the print job. Suspend RIP This option allows preventing the automatic processing of a print job in the RIP Server. You have to manually start these jobs in the Job Center for being processed in the RIP Server. Suspend Printing This option allows preventing the automatic processing of a print job in the Print Client. You have to manually start these jobs in the Job Center or in the Print Client for being processed in the Print Client. Keep Rip Data after Printing The ripped data are saved so that the job can be re-sent to the printer without having to be re-ripped. Generate Job Preview This option creates a preview which is displayed in the Job Center or in the Print Client.

Hot Folders

3

Image Import The Image Import tab allows specifying additional settings for the images to be printed such as number of copies to be printed per image, rotation, image scaling, color management settings, and others. Number of Copies Enter the number of copies that is to be printed for each image in the HotFolder. 1

ImagePreset Select the ImagePreset that is to used for formatting the images in the HotFolder. When a Positioning Template is used, the positioning and scaling in the Positioning Template will be used; just all other formatting including color management settings configured in the ImagePreset will apply.

1 2

2

3

Use Picture Package When already having created Picture Package templates in the JobComposer you can used them also in the HotFolder as an output option. Please note that the Picture Package cannot be combined with a Position Template or ImagePreset in the HotFolder configuration. To apply an ImagePreset please use the functionality already included in the Picture Package configuration. 3

Hot Folders

4

Contour Cut The Contour Cut tab allows specifying the settings for automatic cutting using the HotFolder. Check Activate Contour Cutting and select a Cut Environment when you want to also cut the jobs printed with the HotFolder. Depending on the selected print environment and cut environment the jobs can be cut immediately after printing (when using a print&cut device) or after replacing the media. In order to have control about the cutting we strongly recommend making sure that a cut client is activated in the cut environment when you do not cut immediately after or before printing on a print&cut device. 1

2

1

2

Select the cut paths for the HotFolder jobs. For more information please refer to the manual part about cutting.

Additional Notes There are some additional hints for working efficiently with HotFolders. 1 2 3

You can configure as many HotFolders as necessary. You can have as many active (online) HotFolders as necessary at a time. Several HotFolders can be linked to the same print environment.

Several HotFolders can print to the same printer or Print Client. When printing directly to the port you have to ensure yourself that only one HotFolder is sending data to the printer at a time. 4

5 6

Use a separate folder on the hard disk for each HotFolder. We recommend creating a separate HotFolder for each configuration needed.

Hot Folders

5

Examples Example 1: Scaled Image, Several Identical Images per Job Situation: The same image should be scaled to a certain size and printed ten times in the same job.

2 1

Configuration: This job needs an ImagePreset to be 1 created and selected that does all the scaling and additional formatting that is needed to configure one image. The number of identical images is 2 created by entering the number of copies.

Hot Folders

6

Example 2: Scaled Images, Minimum Job Length Situation: All images should be scaled to a certain size. The job should be filled with one row of (different) images to use the complete media width.

Configuration: Just as in example 1, an ImagePreset 1 must be created and selected. 2

Hot Folders

To fill the media width with images, a minimum job length must be entered.

7

Example 3: Scaled Images at Fix Positions Situation: Several images should be (scaled to a certain size and) printed at pre-defined positions in the job.

Configuration: This job needs a Position Template to be selected which is doing the scaling and positioning. Additional image formatting can be done using also an ImagePreset as in example 1.

Hot Folders

8

Example 4: Sticker Sheet including Contour Cutting Situation: Sticker sheets with one item, a star, should be printed on complete media width and cut.

1

2 1

Configuration: This job requires a Picture Package to 1 be created and selected holding one sticker sheet. Also, enter the number of sticker sheets (number of copies) you want to print and cut. 2

In order to also cut the sticker sheets, you have to activate contour cutting, select the appropriate cut environment as well as the cut path(s).

Hot Folders

9

Application Notes Picture Package

Picture Package

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Picture Package

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Designing a Picture Package .................................................................................................................................1 Using a Picture Package ..........................................................................................................................................3

Picture Package

ii

Introduction Often, photographers offer sets of portraits with the same photo in different sizes printed on one big sheet. The Picture Package function does exactly the same; it allows importing the image just once and positions it automatically to create a custom set of this image.

Designing a Picture Package Select menu Tools > Picture Package Template > New to create a new Picture Package template. A new, empty job with gray background and label “Picture Package Template” will be opened. 1

Select a media size reflecting the size of the picture package including borders (distance to other images or picture packages) when it is imported in a job. For instance, the media size for a portrait set is supposed to be ISO A4 landscape. To insert a placeholder that will later be replaced by an image, select Placeholder from the Job context menu.

1

2

Size and position the placeholder according to the needed settings. In the portrait set example, the placeholders are supposed to have different sizes all being parts of ISO A4 (including the white border that is added as margin).

Picture Package

1

Specify the rule used to scale and position the image that will replace the placeholder. Please refer to the description of Image Format Presets in the manual part about Presets (“Image Editing Automation”) for a detailed description of the Fit and Alignment settings. For the portrait set example, the pictures must fit into both Width and Height (check both). The fit position is the center. Images will be rotated when they fit better (Best fit). 2

3

When the placeholder is configured, it can be copied (duplicated) as often as needed. Or another placeholder with other settings and dimensions may be created.

When all settings are done, the Picture Package Template can be saved and closed.

Picture Package

2

Using a Picture Package Open a new job. From the Job context menu select Picture Package.

1

1

Select the image to be imported as usual. Please note that you cannot select several images at once. Then, select the Picture Package to be used to format the image and its duplicates. In the example, it is named “Picture Package Portrait Set A4”. 2

1

2

3

Clicking the Open button will import the Picture Package template and fill it with the image. 3

The imported structure is a group of images. Apply any other image formatting such as Color Management, etc. that is needed. Please note that the Picture Package is not intended to be used with Print Marks. 4

5

6

Print the job as usual.

Command Picture Package Template > Open allows opening and editing a Picture Package template.

Picture Package

3

Application Notes Position Template

Position Template

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Position Template

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Designing a Position Template ............................................................................................................................2 Using a Position Template .....................................................................................................................................3

Position Template

ii

Introduction Images can be manually positioned in a job wherever needed. But manually positioning images is a lot of work when your workflow always requires that the images are positioned at the same positions independently from the image itself. For instance, printing T-shirts using a specific printer that prints only at pre-defined positions requires such a pre-formatted job. Other examples for images needed in certain dimensions at certain positions are: Backgrounds for (paper) walls with holes at certain positions, which can be filled by background images of different styles Printing on tiles that are hold using a grid. Anything you can imagine that will need the images being printed at certain positions in certain sizes with the sizes being different in the dimensions and orientation. Creating such a job is some work. Doing it once can never be avoided. But it would be nice to be able to re-use this one job whenever the same patterned job each time it is needed. The Position Template function allows that. The following documentation will describe the Position Template function using the example of printing (different) pictures on T-shirts with a fix position for the base line of the picture.

Position Template

1

Designing a Position Template Select menu Tools > Position Template > New to create a new Position Template. A new, empty job with gray background and label “Position Template” will be opened. 1

Selecting a media size is not required but it helps in positioning. For the Tshirt example, the grid is supposed to be 1.5 x 3.5 m.

1

To insert a placeholder that will later be replaced by an image, select Placeholder from the Job context menu. Size and position the placeholder according to the needed settings. In the T-shirt example, the placeholder is supposed to be 25 x 30 cm. The position of the upper left corner is supposed to be 17.5 / 16 cm.

2

3

Specify the rule used to scale and position the image that will replace the placeholder. Please refer to the description of Image Format Presets in the manual part about Presets (“Image Editing Automation”) for a detailed description of the Fit and Alignment settings. For the T-shirt example, the picture must fit into both Width and Height (check both). The fit position is the upper center. Images must be rotated by 180°. 2

When the placeholder is configured, it can be copied (duplicated) as often as needed. Or another placeholder with other settings and dimensions may be created. In the Tshirt example, duplication is done using the “duplicate as grid” method as shown in the image above. 3

When all settings are done, the Position Template can be saved and closed.

Position Template

2

Using a Position Template Open a new job. From the Job context menu select Position Template and then the Position Template you want to use. In the example, it is named “Position Template T-shirt example”. 1

2

The placeholders are visualized as dashed rectangles.

Now, select the ImagePreset you want to use for the import and import the design for the T-shirt picture into the job as usual. The image is positioned automatically to replace the first placeholder and scaled and formatted according to the ImagePreset and the placeholder attributes. According to the settings in the T-shirt example, the image is rotated by 180° and positioned at the top line of the placeholder.

1

3

3

2

To fill the other placeholders with the same image, you can simply duplicate it as often as needed. Take care not to use the grid option in the Duplicate dialog box but just enter the number of copies you finally want to get. The copies are automatically positioned to replace the other placeholders. When all placeholders are filled, and there are still images to position, positioning will be done as usual. 4

5

Print the job as usual.

Position Template

3

You may also activate the Position Template while there are already images imported in a job. Then, you can use the Rearrange function or simply move the images into the placeholders to position and format them according to the placeholder attributes. 6

7

Command Position Template > Open allows opening and editing a Position Template.

Select the Position Template “None” to deactivate usage of a Position Template in the current job. You do not have to open a new job when needing to change the Position Template; you can simply select another one and rearrange the images. 8

Position Template

4

Application Notes Variable Data

Variable Data

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Variable Data

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Designing a Variable Data Template..................................................................................................................2 Using a Variable Data Template ..........................................................................................................................7 Creating the Data File ........................................................................................................................................7 Using the Data File ..............................................................................................................................................9

Variable Data

ii

Introduction Some jobs require printing the same design (image, background, object, etc.) with personalized text or (consecutive) numbering. For instance, mugs for different products of the same company with personalized background, company logo, product logo, and product slogan require the same company logo, different background images, different text, and different product logos. Such a job can be done by creating the complete mug as one image per product which would be a lot of work depending on the number of products you need the mugs for. Or you can create the basic mug and add the background image, product logo and the text using functions included in the RIP such as creating overlays and using AddOns. But this would require manual positioning and text editing when creating the job. The easiest possibility to deal with such a job would be to create the basic mug as an image and store the personalized data in a text file. When creating the RIP job, the basic image and the personalized data should be mixed. Such a workflow would also make it easy to replace broken mugs or to create new ones. This is exactly what the Variable Data function allows to do: Instead of creating a separate image for each combination you create a template with just the fix part of the object and let the variable text and images be automatically added when the template is used.

Variable Data

1

Designing a Variable Data Template Select menu Tools > Variable Data Template > New to create a new Variable Data template. A new, empty job with gray background and label “Variable Data Template” will be opened. 1

Selecting a media size is not required but it helps in positioning. For the mug example, ISO A4 landscape is selected to limit the available job size. The printed part on the mug is supposed to be 23x9 cm.

1

The mug example will use a main customizable background image (2), a customizable product logo (3), a company logo at two possible positions (4), a gradient with customizable colors for filling room (5), and a customizable text slogan (6). To create the element holding the background image, select Import Image from the Job context menu and import a sample image. Scale and position the image as you like. 2

To configure the 2a image attributes, select Attributes from the Image context menu and configure the image element: Select that the image is Variable. The image should fit into the rectangle created to hold the sample image. Thus, check all Fit options. For better layout, the Position of the image in the rectangle should be the upper left corner. Specify the Path in which the images will be stored and enter a Field name (“background”) for the image file. 2a

Variable Data

2

To create the element holding the product logo, select Import Image from the Job context menu and import a sample product logo. Scale and position the product logo as you like. 3

To configure the 3a image attributes, select Attributes from the Image context menu and configure the image element: Select that the image is Variable. The image should fit into the rectangle created to hold the sample image. Thus, check all Fit options. For better layout, the Position of the image in the rectangle should be the upper left corner. Specify the Path in which the images will be stored and enter a Field name (“Product logo”) for the image file. 3a

Variable Data

3

In order to print the company logo at one of two possible positions, both positions must be configured to hold the company logo. Just when using the template, only one of the fields will be filled with a file name while the other one will hold a blank only. To create the element holding the company logo, select Import Image from the Job context menu and import a sample image. Scale and position the image as you like. 4

4a

To configure the image attributes, select Attributes from the Image context menu and configure the image element. The configuration for both company logos is identical except for the field name: Select that the image is Variable. The image should fit into the rectangle created to hold the sample image. Thus, check all Fit options. For better layout, the Position of the image in the rectangle should be the upper left corner. Specify the Path in which the images will be stored and enter a Field name (“company_left” for the left company logo and “company_right” for the right one) for the image file. 4a

Variable Data

4

To create the filling gradient, select Generate and object type Gradient Rectangle from the Job context menu. 5

5a

5a

Enter the dimensions and layout of the gradient. Since the color is customizable, it does not matter which colors you select. To get a gradient from top to bottom instead of from left to right the gradient must be rotated by entering an angle. 5b

5b

Next, you have to specify the attributes for the gradient:

Select that there are Variable attributes for the gradient rectangle. Fit and Position do not matter because the gradient rectangle will have a fix size. Specify the configuration parts of the gradient rectangle that are customizable by entering a name in column Use in Template as. The used names are “grad_color_down” for Color left and “grad_color_up” for Color right. Since the other elements will not be variable, there is no need to enter a name for these items.

Variable Data

5

To create the element holding the product slogan, select Generate and object type Variable Text from the Job context menu. 6

Enter the dimensions and layout of the text element. Since the text and the font color are meant to be customizable, it does not matter which text you enter or which color you select.

6a

6a

6b

Next, you have to specify the attributes for the text element: Select that there are Variable attributes for the text element. The slogan should fit into the height of the rectangle created to hold the sample text. Thus, check Height in the Fit options but do not check Width. Since the text will be scaled to the height of the text element, the text should be positioned in the upper left corner of the rectangle. Specify the configuration parts of the text element that are customizable by entering a name in column Use in Template as. The used names are “Product slogan text” for Text and “Product slogan color” for Font Color. All other values are not meant to be variable. 6b

When all settings are done, the Variable Data template can be saved and closed. 7

To modify the attributes of the selected element, select Attributes from the Image context menu.

8

To modify the settings of a Generated element, select Edit Parameters from the Image context menu.

The elements in the Variable Data template are positioned layer-style. Use the Arrange Order functions from the Image context menu to arrange the elements in layer mode just as in design programs. 9

Variable Data

6

Using a Variable Data Template Creating the Data File There are two possibilities to create the data file: You can either create the data file yourself considering the require structure of your Variable Data template and save it as .txt file. The easier way to get the correct structure is to use the Variable Data function to create a basic data file and add more data to this file using e.g. spreadsheet software and save it as .txt or .csv file. The following description explains the usage of the Variable Data function to create the basic data file. 1

Open a new job. From the Job context menu select Variable Data. 1

Select the Variable Data template to be used. In the example, it is named “Variable Data Mug example”.

2

2

3 1

Enter one row of data into the displayed 4 columns. It does not matter whether you enter the correct information or just any data you can use for testing the entries. In the mug example, the columns must be filled as follows: “background” requires the name of the background image file without path but including the file extension (e.g. “pp01_web_0106.jpg”). “company_right” requires the name of the company logo image file to be printed at the right side of the mug, without path but including the file extension (e.g. “ErgoSoft_logo_main_ black_100601.pdf”). “grad_color_up” requires the color values of the color on top of the gradient. The entry is built by entering the CMYK values separated by a blank (e.g. “51 1 25 0” for 51%C, 1%M, 25%Y and 0%K). “grad_color_down” requires the color values of the color at the bottom of the gradient. The entry is built by entering the CMYK values separated by a blank (e.g. “78 2 35 0” for 78%C, 2%M, 35%Y and 0%K). “company_left” requires the name of the company logo image file to be printed at the left side of the mug, without path but including the file extension (e.g. “ErgoSoft_logo_main_ black_100601.pdf”). “Product slogan color” requires the color values for the product slogan. The entry is built by entering the CMYK values separated by a blank (“0 0 0 100” for 0%C, 0%M, 0%Y and 100%K). 3

Variable Data

7

“Product slogan text” requires the text of the product slogan to be entered (e.g. “the rip for digital graphic print production”). “Product logo” requires the name of the product logo image file without path but including the file extension (e.g. “PosterPrint14_S_Black_100528.pdf”). Additional hints for entering data: When using checkboxes as variables, entering “0” means that the box is not checked while “1” means that the box is checked. Not entering values into a field means that it is left empty and not used. Be careful to enter valid data into the fields in order to run the Variable Data function correctly. Invalid data will cause the rest of the data set to be ignored. 4

Click the Export button to save the entries in a data file. Enter a name for the file and note the path and name in order to locate it for editing in e.g. spreadsheet software.

5

If you like you can test the structure of the entries and create a job with the data by clicking the OK button. Otherwise, close the dialog by clicking the Cancel button.

6

Edit the data file in your favorite software. Take care not to destroy the file structure: The first line must be the header line holding the field names you specified in the Variable Data template in the elements attributes. All following lines hold the data. The data fields (columns) are separated by Tabs. Take care to save it in .txt or .csv format.

Variable Data

8

Using the Data File Open a new job. From the Job context menu select Variable Data.

1

1

Select the Variable Data template to be used. In the example, it is named “Variable Data Mug example”.

2

2

Click the Import button and select the file with the data. Then, the data is automatically filled into the table. 3

Click the OK button to create the job using the selected data. Each line of the data file (table) will create a separate object. The object is automatically created using the Overlay functionality of the ErgoSoft RIP.

1

3 4

4

4

Format the objects as any image overlay when needed. 5

6 7

Print the job as usual. Command Variable Data Template > Open allows opening and editing a Variable Data template.

Variable Data

9

Application Notes Image Editing Automation

Image Editing Automation

ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.

The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1

Image Editing Automation

i

Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Basic Image Presets ..................................................................................................................................................2 Image Format ........................................................................................................................................................2 Print Marks .............................................................................................................................................................5 Image AddOns ......................................................................................................................................................7 Company Logo ...............................................................................................................................................8 Seam Extension...............................................................................................................................................8 Canvas Mounting Extension ......................................................................................................................8 Dashed Cut Line .............................................................................................................................................9 Caption ..............................................................................................................................................................9 Eyelets ................................................................................................................................................................9 Gradient Frame ............................................................................................................................................ 10 Label................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Seam Margin ................................................................................................................................................ 10 Solid Frame ................................................................................................................................................... 10 Image Margins ................................................................................................................................................... 11 Tuning ................................................................................................................................................................... 12 Extra Channels.................................................................................................................................................... 13 Color Management for PostScript/PDF Images .................................................................................... 14 Composite Image Presets .................................................................................................................................... 15 Managing Image Presets ..................................................................................................................................... 16 Setting Default Image Presets ........................................................................................................................... 17 Global Image Settings..................................................................................................................................... 17 ImagePreset for Next Job .............................................................................................................................. 17 Examples for Presets.............................................................................................................................................. 18 Scaling to DIN A3 with White Border and Rotation when Needed ............................................... 18 Scaling Images by Factor 10 ......................................................................................................................... 19 Special Color Management Settings ......................................................................................................... 20

Image Editing Automation

ii

Introduction Image Editing Automation? Indeed, that is big thinking for RIP software. The following documentation will explain the idea that is behind the image editing automation functionality and how you can benefit from it. The input data (jobs to be printed) for large format printing can come from several sources. In the best case, you design all your print jobs yourself in your image processing software using always the same settings. In the worst case, each production order comes from another customer each with different settings in the image design and editing software. But to be true, none of the two extremes will occur in practice: No-one will limit himself to printing just his own designs and refuse printing a ready-to-print-design of a year-long customer he created a lot of designs for. And no-one will have only customers having just one order and never coming again with another order. All business is a mixing of the both extremes: You can handle a lot (or most) of your production with one setting but you will need additional settings for the rest of your production. Imaging that you have to print a huge bundle of images and each should fit in DIN A3 paper format. But the images have different size, some reflect the DIN A3 side length relation, some do not. Scaling the images manually to DIN A3 format and adding borders to fill the empty space between the image size and DIN A3 would be a lot of work – and mistakes might occur. Having a setting saved that will do the scaling and border adding automatically will make this job much easier – with the help of automation. How do you handle different color management settings that you just need for certain customers? Do you prefer noting the settings on a piece of paper and file it in your customers´ records? Or would you like to have the settings saved in the RIP software so that you just have to select them? No doubt, image editing automation will make your job easier – provided that you do not have to design the presets in advance but can create them whenever needed. And that is the basic idea behind the design of image editing automation in the ErgoSoft RIPs: You are working on combining the jobs and formatting and editing the images in the job while you find out that you repeat the same editing a lot of times. How nice would it be when you could just save the current settings and re-use them with the next image? You can: Image editing automation is designed exactly this way. You edit the image and save the settings in a preset within the current dialog without having to launch another function in the ErgoSoft RIP. Above mentioned image format rule (scaling to DIN A3) for example is created in the scaling dialog. Just managing (renaming, deleting, creating complex settings) all the presets is done in another part of the ErgoSoft RIP. The following chapters will explain the creation and usage of basic image presets, the usage of composite image presets, and the management of basic presets including the creation of composite image presets.

Image Editing Automation

1

Basic Image Presets Image Format The Image Format Preset helps in bringing the image into a certain layout shape. It includes proportional scaling to a certain width or height or in percentage, automatic border adding, automatic rotation, and mirroring. It combines actions that can be done manually using several image editing commands.

1

2 2

3

4

5

To create and select Image Format Presets use the Image Properties page Scale. Please keep in mind that all Image Format Presets are created and selected in this page, even those that are designed for rotation and mirroring only without explicit scaling. 1

Select the Image Format Preset you want to use with the selected image(s). Click the View button to check the settings of the selected image format preset. The New button allows creating a new image format preset based on the selected one. 2

Image Editing Automation

2

3

Select the Scale type you want to use for the scaling: Maximum Size scales the image to the maximum job width. % Original Size allows scaling in percentage of the original image size. Size allows specifying a size in the current unit. You can either enter the dimensions into the fields Width and/or Height or select a size from the list which can be managed by adding, deleting, and renaming sizes. When both Width and Height are checked, the image is scaled according to the setting in section Fit and Alignment. When only Width or Height is checked, the image is proportionally scaled to the dimension of the specified side; the length of the other side depends on the aspect ratio of the image. The Swap button swaps the width and height similar to swapping from landscape to portrait and vice versa.

Specifying both width and height of a format requires that you specify what should be done when the aspect ratio of the image, with which the setting will be used, does not equal the aspect ratio of the specified dimensions (when after proportional scaling only one side will have the specified value and the other not). Uncheck Maintain proportion to allow distorted scaling so that both sides will have the specified length. Otherwise you have to specify how the scaled image must fit into the specified format: Fit only will scale the image so that both sides are equal or smaller than the specified dimensions. Fit by margin will scale the image so that both sides are equal or smaller than the specified dimensions. Then, white border will be added according to the specified alignment: The image is positioned to where the arrow points, the white border is added on the opposite side(s). The arrows to the corners will always position the image in the corner and the white space is added to one of the opposite sides. The arrows to the centers of the sides will always Fit by margin – bottom right center the image in the selected side and add the white border either to the opposite side (when the selected side is filled with the image) or to both neighboring sides (when the selected side is larger than the corresponding image side). When the image is positioned in the center white border is added either to the top and bottom or to the left and right side of the image. 4

Image Editing Automation

3

Fit by crop will scale the image so that one side will match the specified size and the other one will be larger. Then, the image will be cropped according to the specified alignment: The image is positioned to where the arrow points and cropped at the opposite side(s). The arrows to the corners will always position the image in the corner and crop one of the opposite sides. The arrows to the centers of the sides will always Fit by crop – bottom right center the image in the selected side and crop either the opposite side (when the length of the selected side matches the corresponding image length) or both neighboring sides (when the selected side is smaller than the corresponding image side). When the image is positioned in the center, it is cropped either at the top and the bottom or at the left and right side of the image. Specify the rotation and mirroring of the image: Never, by certain degrees (90°, 180°, 270°), to a certain layout (landscape, portrait), or rotate when the image will better fit into the specified size after 90° rotation (best fit). 5

Image Format during Image Import To automate scaling, the image format can already be selected in the Image Import dialog. In addition, each image can be imported into a separate job creating new, tabbed jobs during import.

Image Editing Automation

4

Print Marks The Print Marks Preset helps in adding marks and automatic image/printing information to an image. There are two types of marks that can be printed around the image as well as some information text about the image and printout configuration: Crop marks that are printed as lines at the edges of the images Register marks that are printed as circles

1

2 2 3

4

5

3

To create and select Print Mark Presets use the Image Properties page Print Marks. 1

4

Select the Print Marks Preset you 5 want to use with the selected image(s). Click the View button to check the settings of the selected print marks preset. The New button allows creating a new print marks preset based on the selected one. 2

Image Editing Automation

5

Specify the Crop Marks that will be printed as lines close to the image borders to show where the image is to be cut. Set the Distance between a crop mark and the image. Enter the Thickness and Length of the crop marks. Specify the Color of the crop mark. Use a positive value for Cut Off to set the crop marks in a way that a part of the image will be beyond the crop marks; when a negative value is entered, a white border will be printed between the image and the crop marks. When the white border (cut off) is larger than the crop marks the marks will be automatically directed to the image. Mark directed to image to force the crop marks to be directed to the image and therefore extending them into the image when they are longer than the defined cutoff. 3

Register marks are round signs with a cross. Set the Distance between a register mark and the image. Enter the Thickness, Length, and Diameter of the register marks. Specify the Color of the register mark. Specify the position of the register mark. 4

Specify the Font, the Font Size, the Text Height, and the Color for the Image Label. The image label is constructed of several text lines above and below the image. Allow mirror allows the image label to be mirrored when the images are mirrored. An unlimited number of image labels can be saved in the form of schemes using the Save and Load …. buttons. Button Field>> helps to include system data like program information, image information, date, output data, etc. Fields are automatically set into braces and displayed in magenta as contrast against directly entered text that is displayed in black. 5

Examples for Crop Marks: Cross, so that part of the crop mark on the adjacent side is still visible after having cut one side: Distance: 0.40 cm; length: 0.70 cm (length must be larger than the sum of distance and cut off); thickness: does not matter; Cut Off: 0.10 cm (for a distance to the image); directed to the image (must be checked).

Frame edges that surround the image: Distance: 0.50 cm; length: 0.70 cm (length must be larger than distance); thickness: does not matter; Cut Off: -0.50 cm (for a distance to the image); directed to the image (must be checked).

Image Editing Automation

6

Image AddOns Image AddOns are customizable pre-defined supplements to the images. Some AddOns such as Company Logo and Dashed Cut Line are available from the beginning. Other AddOns such as Eyelets must be installed before they can be used. The Image AddOns Preset allows configuring AddOns and easily applying the configured AddOns to an image. Also, the same AddOn can be used with different configurations in several Image AddOns Presets. Image AddOns can be combined in a preset so that different AddOns with different settings may be assigned in one step. E.g. you can create a preset with the AddOns Company Logo, Caption and Label to add the company logo, the company address and custom text to any image you want to use to advertise your next show – without having to modify the images used as basis.

1

2

2

3

3

4

1

To create and select Image AddOns Presets use the Image Properties page AddOns.

Select the Image AddOns Preset you want to use with the selected image(s). Click the Settings button to check the settings of the selected image AddOns preset. The New button allows creating a new image AddOns preset based on the selected one. 2

Image Editing Automation

7

3

Select the image AddOn(s) to be used in the current image AddOns preset and configure each one by selecting it and clicking the Settings button.

Depending on your version of the ErgoSoft RIP, up to four AddOns are always available in the system: Company Logo, Seam Extension, Canvas Mounting Extension, and Dashed Cut Line. All other AddOns must first be installed before they can be used. AddOns that are not needed can be uninstalled and later re-installed when needed. 4

Company Logo An image file will be printed on top of each image. The file name and the position can be specified.

Seam Extension This optional AddOn mirrors the margins of the image on all four sides to get a seam.

Canvas Mounting Extension This optional AddOn extends the image on all sides for mounting canvas on a wooden frame.

Image Editing Automation

8

Dashed Cut Line A dashed line will be printed on the image where the crop marks indicate. Please note that this AddOn will only be active (Print Marks) are also acti-

when the vated.

crop

marks

Caption This AddOn adds text that is centered and wrapped below the image. The text can be entered manually or automatically captured from the image information field. “” and “<Comment>” refer to the name and the field “Comment” of the image information function.<br /> <br /> Eyelets This AddOn creates circles close to the edge of the image.<br /> <br /> Image Editing Automation<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> Gradient Frame This AddOn creates a frame around the image. The gradient is from the inner color to the outer color.<br /> <br /> Label This AddOn adds variable text that the user is prompted to enter.<br /> <br /> Seam Margin This AddOn creates a margin on all four sides to get a seam.<br /> <br /> Solid Frame This AddOn creates a frame of a given solid color around the image.<br /> <br /> Image Editing Automation<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> Image Margins The image margin is white space between the image and the printer marks. It enlarges the image the ErgoSoft RIP is working with. The Image Margin Preset allows configuring image margins and easily applying the configured image margins to an image.<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> To create and select Image Margin Presets use the Image Properties page Image Margin.<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Select the Image Margin Preset you want to use with the selected image(s). Click the New button to create a new image margin preset based on the selected one.<br /> <br /> Image Editing Automation<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> Tuning The Tuning Preset helps in making color corrections to the current image. Please note that this function is not intended to replace an image editing program; it is only meant to be a tool for global changes in the image.<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> d<br /> <br /> a<br /> <br /> c<br /> <br /> b<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> d<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> To create and select Tuning Presets use the Image Properties page Tune.<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Select the Tuning Preset you want to use with the selected image(s). Click the New button to create a new tuning preset based on the selected one. 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> Image Editing Automation<br /> <br /> 12<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> The available color corrections are: The Saturation of the image can be changed. The Brightness and Contrast of the image can be changed. The color Balance (gamma values of the color curves) can be changed. Thus, unwanted colors can be removed from the image and dull or muted colors can be enhanced. Custom Gradations (color curves) can be created. Thus, the color arrangement of an image can be totally changed.<br /> <br /> The following tools help to visualize and manage the color corrections: 4<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> Open/hide the info window displaying color information about the point in the image that is touched with the tip of the color picker pen. Three different sets of previews can be displayed: One preview window showing the image with the modified colors (b). Two preview windows: The first showing the original image (a) and the second showing the image with the modified colors (b). Four preview windows: The original image (a), the image with the modified colors (b), a printer simulation preview (c), and a printer simulation preview with out-of-gamut colors marked (d). The color for marking the out-of-gamut parts can be customized.<br /> <br /> Extra Channels The Extra Channels Preset helps in assigning spot color channels saved in the image with the spot color slots configured in the print environment. This image based assignment might be different from the basic settings in the print environment. For more information please refer to the manual part about Spot Color Printing.<br /> <br /> Image Editing Automation<br /> <br /> 13<br /> <br /> Color Management for PostScript/PDF Images The PS/PDF Color Management Preset helps in using a certain input color management setting for certain files. This way, you can easily create different color management settings for PostScript or PDF images delivered by certain customers and re-use them whenever needed.<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 1 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> To create and select PS/PDF Color Management Presets use the Image Properties page Color Management.<br /> <br /> Select the PS/PDF Color Management Preset you want to use with the selected image(s). Click the Edit button to check and modify the settings of the selected print marks preset. The New button allows creating a new print marks preset based on the selected one. 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> For a detailed description of the available settings please refer to the manual part about Image Color Control.<br /> <br /> Image Editing Automation<br /> <br /> 14<br /> <br /> Composite Image Presets Often, you might not need only one of the basic image presets but several of them for easy and fast image editing. For this reason, the ErgoSoft RIPs offer the possibility to create Composite Image Presets combining the basic image presets and include some basic settings for PostScript file treatment.<br /> <br /> 1 2<br /> <br /> 1 2<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> To select Composite Image Presets select ImagePreset from the Image Context Menu (right-click on the image).<br /> <br /> Click the New button in the ImagePreset toolbar to create a new Composite Image Preset based on the selected one. Scroll through the list of basic image presets and PostScript parameters and configure the Composite Image Preset: Check Activate to overwrite the current image settings with the Composite Image Preset. When this box is not checked, just the current setting of the image in the job is used. Select the basic image preset you want to use (after having activated this kind of setting) or manually enter a configuration. 2<br /> <br /> Image Editing Automation<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> When closing this dialog by clicking the OK button you are prompted for a name for the new Composite Image Preset.<br /> <br /> Managing Image Presets In order to prevent you from making unwanted changes in the hurry of production preparation, image presets can only be created in the image editing functions. For renaming, deleting, and editing them you need to use the preset management tool. To manage Basic Image Presets, start the preset management tool by launching menu Tools > Edit Presets > Image Presets. 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> To manage Composite Image Presets, start the preset management tool by launching menu Tools > Edit Presets > Composite Presets and select the preset ImagePreset. 2<br /> <br /> The presets can be edited, created, deleted, and renamed. Since the presets are only managed here, it does not matter which ones are selected when closing this dialog. For setting the default image presets please refer to chapter “Setting Default Image Presets” below.<br /> <br /> 2 2<br /> <br /> For a description of the settings please refer to the chapters “Basic Image Presets” and “Composite Image Presets” above and the manual part about Image Color Control.<br /> <br /> Image Editing Automation<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> Setting Default Image Presets Default image presets are automatically applied whenever an image is imported. The Global default settings will be overwritten by an ImagePreset selected in the ImagePreset toolbar. Thus, you can set a global configuration for most of your workflow and replace it by special automatic settings when needed without having to modify the global settings.<br /> <br /> Global Image Settings The global settings for image configuration are part of the overall global settings. They do not affect images that are already put into a job but only images imported after having made the changes. Thus, also when opening a job, the global settings are never applied. To specify the global image settings, select menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Image<br /> <br /> a<br /> <br /> Scroll through the list of image settings and PostScript parameters and specify the default settings: Select the basic image preset you want to use When needed, modify the displayed configuration and save it using the New button (a) to create a new basic image preset. Please note that the Image Format configuration specified in the global image settings will be the default image format setting in the image import dialog in which it can be changed for the current import when needed.<br /> <br /> ImagePreset for Next Job In addition to selecting an Image Format in the image import dialog, an ImagePreset can be selected in the ImagePreset toolbar whenever needed. These settings are applied to all images being imported until another ImagePreset is selected.<br /> <br /> Image Editing Automation<br /> <br /> 17<br /> <br /> Examples for Presets Scaling to DIN A3 with White Border and Rotation when Needed Situation: All images of a certain customers have to be scaled to fit on DIN A3. A white frame of minimum 1 cm must be between the image itself and the paper edges. The image is to be rotated when it fits better. Since the printout is on roll media, crossed cut marks are also needed. Configuration: This complex configuration needs a composite image preset made up of the basic image presets Image Format and Print Marks. Image Format Check Activate and select a pre-defined image format. Since the image including white border must fit into DIN A3, the image itself must be scaled to less than DIN A3. Thus, enter the dimensions 27.7cm x 40 cm, select Fit by Margin and Best Fit.<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Print Marks Check Activate and select pre-defined print marks. To get a cross, the crop marks must be directed to the image. To implement the white border, the crop mark must be moved away from the image by setting a negative Cut Off having the size of the border (-1.0 cm). When marks are directed to the image, the length starts far from the image and go in direction to the image. Thus, the Distance must be larger than the absolute value of the Cut Off (1.1 cm in the example). Length must be larger than the sum of Distance and Cut Off (1.1 cm + -1 cm = 0.1 cm which is less than 0.9 cm). Thickness does not matter. 2<br /> <br /> Note: When you need other print marks or do not want to use print marks at all or when you need to have a border with different sizes for the sides, you must use the Image AddOn “Solid Frame” to implement the border (with color settings for white). Then, the print marks must be closer to the image (smaller Distance).<br /> <br /> Image Editing Automation<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> Scaling Images by Factor 10 Situation: All (vector) images are created just 1/10 of the size for the printout, e.g. 10 cm when 1 m should be printed. Configuration: This configuration needs an Image Format preset. Check % Original Size and enter the percentage for the scaling. Factor 10 equals 1000%.<br /> <br /> Image Editing Automation<br /> <br /> 19<br /> <br /> Special Color Management Settings Situation: All raster images from a certain customer are taken with a special camera with AdobeRGB1998 color setting. But they might be viewed in Photoshop and saved with embedded profile AppleRGB. This customer also creates PDF files with these images and adds CMYK elements using his own color settings (he already provided you with these settings exported in an ICC profile). His CMYK raster data are also created using this setting. You already know that the gamut of your customer´s ICC profile is smaller than your printer gamut. Configuration: Since this color setting should include settings for raster files and PostScript/PDF files a composite image preset is needed made up of both Color Management presets. Color Management > Input profiles Check Activate and select a color management preset. Select the color management settings needed for RGB and CMYK raster data: Do not check Use profile embedded in image data files for RGB files because always the specified external input profile should be used. Select your customer´s ICC profile for CMYK data.<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Color Management > PostScript/PDF Check Activate and select a preset. Specify the color management settings needed for the different object types available. 2<br /> <br /> Image Editing Automation<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> Application Notes Textile Functions<br /> <br /> Textile Functions<br /> <br /> ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.<br /> <br /> The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1<br /> <br /> Textile Functions<br /> <br /> i<br /> <br /> Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Textile Repetition (Step and Repeat)..................................................................................................................2 Examples .................................................................................................................................................................3 Honeycomb pattern......................................................................................................................................3 Jagged pattern ................................................................................................................................................3 Coloring Separations (Color Combine) .............................................................................................................4 Coloration Tab ......................................................................................................................................................5 Step and Repeat Tab ..........................................................................................................................................6 Halftone Screening Tab .....................................................................................................................................7 Options Tab ...........................................................................................................................................................8 Coloring Tools.............................................................................................................................................................9 Named Colors .......................................................................................................................................................9 Swatch Books ........................................................................................................................................................9 ColorPicker .............................................................................................................................................................9 Measuring Colors.................................................................................................................................................9 Colorbooks .......................................................................................................................................................... 10 Additional Tools ...................................................................................................................................................... 10 Image AddOns ................................................................................................................................................... 10 Shrinking Compensation ............................................................................................................................... 10 “Repeat” Printing .............................................................................................................................................. 10<br /> <br /> Textile Functions<br /> <br /> ii<br /> <br /> Introduction This documentation describes some features especially developed for textile printing. The first two chapters deal with some special functions for importing images while the last chapter mentions some other features useful for textile printing. The image import function for textile repetition is a powerful feature for creating patterned designs in which the pattern is repeated such as wallpapers, fabrics, etc. The image import function for separation coloring is a mighty feature for re-combining and coloring images consisting of separations in digital format already created e.g. for textile cylinder printing. The additional tools help in adding extensions to the created design, compensate media shrinkage due to after-treatment as well as printing several copies of a job without gap.<br /> <br /> Textile Functions<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Textile Repetition (Step and Repeat) This command allows importing a pattern to repeat it several times in both horizontal and vertical direction. Mirroring and shifting the pattern are also included. The pattern must be saved as a TIFF or BMP image. Alpha channels in the image are used as masks so that the covered part of the image will be treated as if it would not exist. To import an image for textile repetition select menu Tools > Color & Special Features > Step and Repeat. Please note that you have to select the file type Step&RepeatMono to import grayscale Tiffs when you want to print them in black&white only. 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Enter the number of repetitions or the final image size both Width and Height. 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> The shift of the image can be determined vertically and horizontally, related to a row or column.<br /> <br /> Specify the size of a pattern repetition vertically and horizontally. Please note that the size of a pattern repetition may be larger or smaller than the width and/or length of the original pattern file.<br /> <br /> in<br /> <br /> 1 7<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Mark whether the pattern is to be mirrored verti5 cally and/or horizontally. Watch the sample with the “F”s for the effect of your selections. 6<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> The sizes can be entered in the current unit or in pixels when Length in pixel is checked. The settings can be saved and later selected from the list on the top of the dialog box.<br /> <br /> 2 3<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 5 6<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> Settings that were specified during the import can be modified by using the command Edit Parameters in the image context menu.<br /> <br /> Textile Functions<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Examples Honeycomb pattern The honeycomb pattern has been created from the single honeycomb. This honeycomb was created in Photoshop as a rectangular TIFF file. The honeycomb itself is separated from the white background with the help of the mask function. When combining the honeycombs without the white border is desired, the following specifications are needed: Dialog part Offset: Vertical: 0% Horizontal: 50% Dialog part Grid width: Horizontal: not checked (100%) Vertical: 75%<br /> <br /> Jagged pattern The jagged pattern has been created from the single jag at the right side. This time, the image has not been moved but has been mirrored: First line of dialog part Mirror: Horizontal: checked Vertical: not checked Second line of dialog part Mirror: Horizontal: not checked Vertical: checked<br /> <br /> Textile Functions<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> Coloring Separations (Color Combine) This function allows an image built by layers/separations to be imported and colored. The layers can be of format “Bitmap TIFF” (only black and white) and “Grayscale TIFF”. To import a separated image for coloring select menu Tools > Color & Special Features > Color Combine. 1<br /> <br /> Select all layers that are to be combined to one image using the mouse and the Shift / Ctrl key. All layers must have the same resolution and dimensions in pixels. The layers can be colored in any color and not only in CMYK or RGB. Thus, this option can be used to import the already existing textile screens that have been created for specially mixed textile colors and color the layers in the correct original color. This allows simulating traditional textile printing on inkjet printers without having to recreate the designs.<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> The dialog box for the parameters for function Color Combine consists of four tabs Coloration, Step and Repeat, Halftone Screening, and Options. They are described in the next chapters. Settings that were specified during the import can be modified by using the command Edit Parameters in the image context menu.<br /> <br /> Textile Functions<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Coloration Tab The Coloration tab holds the main functions for Color Combine such as adding/removing layers and coloring the layers. Use the buttons to change the order of the layers, to remove the selected layers from the list, and to 2 add a new layer to the list. 1<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> The information tools help to colorize the layers. From left to right: Preview: Opens a preview window to display a preview of the current coloration. Show ColorInfo: Opens a window with some color information for the selected layer. Show RasterInfo: Opens a window with some raster information for the selected layer. Please note that this button is only available when screening is enabled.<br /> <br /> 1 7 8<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> The coloration tools help to select the color for the 5 coloration. From left to right: ColorPicker: Opens another dialog box to select the color visually. Click on Apply to assign the selected color to the selected layer. When having specified the CMYK color mode on the Options tab you may enter device colors after having checked Device. Swatch Books: Opens another dialog box to choose the color for the selected layer from a Swatch Book. Named Colors: Opens another dialog box to choose the color for the selected layer from the current Named Colors Profiles. Measure: Opens another dialog box to directly measure the color and assign the values to the selected layer. Please note that this function requires a spectrophotometer which can not only measure color strips, but any color from any source.<br /> <br /> Set the Opacity of the layers to control the mixing with the colors of the other layers. A value of 100% means that the color is not mixed with the colors of other layers. Please note that this function requires the color mode being set to Lab or Spectral on the Options tab. 4<br /> <br /> When the layers are Bitmap TIFF files (only black or white pixels), or when screening is enabled on the tab Screening, special color values can be assigned to mixed colors. First, mark select mixed colors. Then, select the layers (2 or more) to specify a special value. Last, mark define and select the desired color. This color is used whenever the colors of all selected layers have to be printed. Use the button define next to scroll through the already defined mixed colors. Please note that this function is only available when the definition of mixed color is enabled on the tab Options and when the rasterization is enabled on the tab Screening. 5<br /> <br /> Textile Functions<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> You can enter a Colorway Name that is automatically entered into the image information when the layers are combined. This information can be printed in the label of the print marks. 6<br /> <br /> The complete coloration can be saved as a new Swatch Book. The Colorway Name is used to propose a Swatch Book name. After having entered the name of the Swatch Book, all used colors are available when selecting this automatically created Swatch Book in the list of Swatch Books. Please note that the Swatch Book is not saved automatically; you have to confirm saving when closing the Swatch Books dialog or the Color Combine function. 7<br /> <br /> The coloration can be exported to a file, e.g. for use in other applications. The file can also be imported like an image into a job in the ErgoSoft RIP or processed automatically using the HotFolder function. 8<br /> <br /> Step and Repeat Tab The Step and Repeat tab allows using the textile repetition directly on the combined image. For information about the settings in this dialog box please refer to the manual part about Textile Repetition.<br /> <br /> Textile Functions<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> Halftone Screening Tab The Halftone Screening tab allows specifying the raster that is used for the rasterization when the layers are combined. Please note that Bitmap TIFF files (black & white pixels only) are always rasterized; grayscale TIFF files may be rasterized but can also be combined without rasterization. Activates the screening for the layers. The screening can only be activated for grayscale TIFF files; screening is not available for BITMAP TIFF files. 1<br /> <br /> Activates the dot gain curve that is configured in the screening for the output. This function can be used together with the activated screening function or standalone. 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> a<br /> <br /> The screening scheme can be selected from the list (as long as modification for the screening is not activated). Please note that the screening scheme is only used when the screening is activated. 3<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> c b<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Save the current screening scheme in order to re-use it for another Color Combine image. Activates the modification of the screening. a<br /> <br /> b<br /> <br /> c<br /> <br /> The buttons allow moving the current setting up and down, adding a new setting, and deleting the current setting. When the options Apply same shape for all screens, Apply same frequency for all screens, and Apply same dot gain curves for all screens are checked, changes to the dot shape, frequency, and dot gain curve will not only affect the current screen but all others also. This button opens another dialog box to modify the current screen. Enter the Angle and the Frequency, select the Shape and the Dot gain curve. Click on Edit to modify the dot gain curve in another dialog box which also allows saving the new dot gain curve.<br /> <br /> c<br /> <br /> The functions for moving, adding, and deleting screens are used to manually re-assign the screens to the layers when the layers are manipulated on the tab Coloration.<br /> <br /> Textile Functions<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> Options Tab The Options tab allows doing some configuration as well as saving and loading configurations as presets. 1<br /> <br /> Color samples with the color values that were used to color the layers can be printed.<br /> <br /> Enable editing the device values when using the color picker for the coloration so that you can enter device values (CMYK plus additional colors) for the selected color. 2<br /> <br /> 1 2 5<br /> <br /> 3 4<br /> <br /> When having selected Combine as Lab the combi6 nation of the layers is converted into a Lab image. When having selected Combine as CMYK and the current printer profile supports CMYK only the combination of the layers is converted into a CMYK image. 7 When having selected Combine as CMYK and the current printer profile supports CMYK and additional color channels the combination of the layers is converted into a separated image. When having selected Combine as Spectral the layers are combined to a Lab image using a new algorithm that considers the spectral values of measured colors. If the coloration colors do not have spectral values, the Lab values are used to calculate reasonable spectral values. 3<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Set the number of pixels used to enlarge the dots. Please note that this function is only available when the rasterization is enabled on the Screening tab.<br /> <br /> When the layers are Bitmap TIFF files (only black or white pixels) or when the specified layers are to be rasterized during the import (activate screening on the tab Screening), special color values can be assigned to mixed colors. Checking Allow definition of mixed colors allows specifying color values also to combination of layers on the tab Coloration. 5<br /> <br /> Use the Color absorption to consider that the color absorption increases or decreases with the layers. That means that e.g. the first printed layer may absorb more color than the second printed layer which itself may absorb more color than the third printed layer etc. Specify whether the first printed color has the highest absorption or whether the last printed color has the highest absorption. 6<br /> <br /> The current settings – except the coloration and the screening parameters – can be saved as presets. When loading a preset, these settings will become the default settings for the Color Combine function. 7<br /> <br /> Textile Functions<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> Coloring Tools All available coloring tools are also used for color replacement and described in this manual part. This documentation just holds some short information about the tools. For more information please refer to the manual part “Color Replacement”.<br /> <br /> Named Colors The Named Colors tool provides the possibility to manage colors in a so called Named Colors Profile and selectively use them for color replacement. The color values are defined in the respective device specific color space and are therefore described in CMYK plus additional colors. This means that similar to an ICC profile, a Named Colors Profile is specific to a combination of printer, ink and media. Thus, it is part of the print environment and should not be used for another print environment without carefully checking (and correcting) the color values. The Named Colors Profile respectively the contained list of named colors that are specifically defined for the device color space, are mostly used to ensure that certain color values are printed exactly as they are expected. E.g. in a perceptual ICC workflow, this allows to print certain colors very saturated without sacrificing the color fastness of the rest of the file by bypassing the actual ICC workflow.<br /> <br /> Swatch Books The Swatch Book tool provides the possibility to manage colors in so called swatch books and selectively use them for color replacement. The replacement colors are defined in Lab values that are printed using the printer profile set in the print environment used when the color replacement is done. The rendering intent for replacement colors is set to Relative Colorimetric.<br /> <br /> ColorPicker The ColorPicker allows defining a Lab value visually.<br /> <br /> Measuring Colors The measure tool allows you to measure colors with a measuring device supporting single patch measurement and use them for your coloration.<br /> <br /> Textile Functions<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> Colorbooks The Colorbooks tool allows creating Lab or RGB colorbooks for printing. The colorbooks can be used for finding Lab or RGB values for certain color tones by visually checking the printed patches.<br /> <br /> Additional Tools In addition to the powerful textile functions Step and Repeat and Color Combine there are some other functions available in the ErgoSoft RIP that might be useful for textile printing.<br /> <br /> Image AddOns The image AddOn SeamExtension has been especially created for textile printing. It mirrors the margins of the image on all four sides to get a seam. For more information about the image AddOns please refer to the manual part about image presets (“Image Editing Automation”).<br /> <br /> Shrinking Compensation To automatically consider changes in the media dimensions caused by after-treatment such as washing, drying, etc. a value for Size changes caused by additional processing can be specified in the print environment on the Extras tab.<br /> <br /> “Repeat” Printing In order to reduce ripping time for long jobs with repeated patterns (such as wallpapers, fabrics, etc.) that could be realized by printing several copies of a shorter job, the function Printing without gap is available on the Print dialog when specifying several copies or entering an absolute print length.<br /> <br /> Textile Functions<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> - Step and Repeat The Requirment: Duplicating an image to create a flawless pattern with no indication of where the individual images begin and end. The Challange: Complicated editing of the image and manual positioning of the duplicated images. The ErgoSoft RIP Solution: A TexPrint feature that simplifies the layout of all-over prints with vertical and horizontal repeat and mirroring options which can be applied to an image as it is imported for a seamless layout. The ErgoSoft RIP TexPrint offers this tool for the simple duplication and layout of any repeating patterns, only confined by the data format of the images- either TIFF or BMP. Follow the Application Note „Textile Printing Functions“to learn how to apply the „Step and Repeat“function. This feature is particularly useful for textile and wallpaper printing and other large format applications. For successful application it is critical that data has been correctly prepared and that the image edges have been carefully checked by the designer to ensure that no unseen hairlines will appear between the repeats in the print. This will ensure a seamless appearance. For example:<br /> <br /> Manual placement of the images<br /> <br /> ErgoSoft RIP Step & Repeat Function<br /> <br /> While importing images „Step and Repeat“ settings should be used for all necessary layout; these settings will then be applied to the image, including number of repeats in the length and width, mirroring and other settings. These settings can be made in cm or in pixels.<br /> <br /> „Spiegeln“ Einstellungen der ErgoSoft „Step and Repeat“ Funktion<br /> <br /> Specific settings made in the „Step and Repeat“dialog can also be saved for consistent application to many images. Summary of the benefits of the „Step and Repeat“function: • • •<br /> <br /> Create and layout flawless repeating patterns from single images without lines or gaps Develop creative all-over patterns from any image using the mirror and repeat functions Save and reuse your „Step and Repeat“ settings<br /> <br /> Follow the Application Note „Textile Printing Functions“ to apply the „Step and Repeat“ function to your textile creation and printing processes. Application Notes can be found in the user area of our Website<br /> <br /> www.ergosoft.net<br /> <br /> Or you can contact us at<br /> <br /> www.ergosoft.net<br /> <br /> Notes on ColorCombine Version 14<br /> <br />  <br /> <br />  <br /> <br /> General Notes on Traditional Textile Printing General Notes on Traditional Textile Printing 1) Traditional textile printing prints layers wet‐in‐wet resulting in certain color mixing when 2  colors are printed one on top of the other. Simulating this effect needs special consideration  which is explained in the next chapters.  2) When ColorCombine is used for sampling, colors must be reproduced exactly. This means  that the Absolute Colorimetric rendering intent must be selected for the ColorCombine  image. In order to avoid media background simulation (resulting in yellow, magenta, cyan  dots everywhere where white color is specified in the image), use the Pure Colors function  with White being checked.  3) Color books for sampling traditional textile printing must also be printed and used with  Absolute Colorimetric rendering intent.   <br /> <br /> General Notes on ColorCombine All layers must have same dimension and same file type. Available file types are grayscale Tiff (8 bit)  and bitmap Tiff (1 bit).   <br /> <br /> Tab “Coloration” Sort layers according to instructions of designer. Move up and  down, if necessary.  Set “Opacity” for certain layers in order to simulate different ink  types. Example: Reactive ink is used for complete design expect  one layer, which is printed with pigment ink to set details or  highlights. To simulate this, the “pigment ink” layer is set to  opacity of 80%. This function is primarily used for sampling  (simulating traditional textile printing).       <br /> <br />  <br /> <br /> ErgoSoft Version 14 - Notes on Color Combine © 2010 ErgoSoft, AG. | Tel: +41 71 694 66 66 | E-mail: es.info@ergosoft.net | web: www.ergosoft.net<br /> <br /> P a g e |1<br /> <br />  <br /> <br />  <br /> <br /> Tab “Step and Repeat” “Size/Count” allows in combination with “Print without Gap” in  the Print dialog creating and printing huge repetitions of  repeated patterns.  Normally, the design is full with so that it counts “1” for  “Width”. Or it must be repeated to fill the complete media  width so that a “Width” is entered while the “Count” is  calculated automatically.  “Count” for “Height” can be “1” when the pattern is repeated  without horizontal shifting. When horizontal shifting by a half is  used, minimum 2 rows of patterns (Count 2 for Height) must be  used.     <br /> <br /> pattern  pattern  pattern  pattern <br /> <br />    <br /> <br /> Tab “Halftone Screening” Purpose: To simulate raster of traditional textile machines, e.g.  rotary machines.  When activating the simulation, check both “Activate halftone  screening” and “Activate  curve”; otherwise the  raster of the traditional  textile machine is not  simulated.  ErgoSoft provides  settings and a dot gain  curve that are adjusted  to rotary machines.       <br /> <br />  <br /> <br /> ErgoSoft Version 14 - Notes on Color Combine © 2010 ErgoSoft, AG. | Tel: +41 71 694 66 66 | E-mail: es.info@ergosoft.net | web: www.ergosoft.net<br /> <br /> P a g e |2<br /> <br />  <br /> <br />  <br /> <br /> Tab “Options” ErgoSoft provides settings for rotary machines that can be  loaded.  “Overprint Parameter”: Often, 2 colors are specified for  overprint in traditional textile printing, sometimes 3. More are  really seldom used because it is almost impossible to predict the  result of 4 or more overprinting colors.  1 – 100%, 2 – 70%, mixing: 70% of color 1, 30%  of color 2. <br /> <br />    1   2<br /> <br />    <br /> <br /> Specify whether the first or last printed color has the highest  absorption. Traditional textile printing: When using Acid inks,  normally the lightest screen is printed at first and the darkest at  last. When using Reactive or Dye inks, normally the darkest screen is printed at first and the darkest  at last.  Always, print color samples (on top of dialog). Minimum width: 2 cm to make sure that the labels  with the color values are printed completely and not cut.  “Combine as”: Select type according to source of colors used for coloring; “Lab” when using a source  holding Lab values (e.g. Swatch Books); “Spectral” when measuring the colors during coloring;  “CMYK” when selecting the colors using device values (e.g. Named Colors).   <br /> <br /> ErgoSoft Version 14 - Notes on Color Combine © 2010 ErgoSoft, AG. | Tel: +41 71 694 66 66 | E-mail: es.info@ergosoft.net | web: www.ergosoft.net<br /> <br /> P a g e |3<br /> <br /> Application Notes Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.<br /> <br /> The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> i<br /> <br /> Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 JobCenter......................................................................................................................................................................2 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................................2 The JobCenter Window .....................................................................................................................................2 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................4 Configuring the Layout................................................................................................................................4 Automatically Deleting and Archiving Done Jobs .............................................................................4 Default Settings for Dispatching Jobs....................................................................................................5 Job Managing Functions...................................................................................................................................6 Cancel Printing ................................................................................................................................................6 Deleting Job .....................................................................................................................................................6 Pausing Job ......................................................................................................................................................6 Reprinting Job .................................................................................................................................................6 Changing the Job Order..............................................................................................................................7 Checking Production Data .........................................................................................................................7 Modifying Job Properties ...........................................................................................................................8 Printing Job Information .............................................................................................................................9 Archiving Jobs .................................................................................................................................................9 Reloading Archived Jobs .............................................................................................................................9 Searching for Production Information ................................................................................................ 10 Controlling Devices .................................................................................................................................... 10 Solving Problems with Devices .................................................................................................................... 11 Reprinting Defective Copies ................................................................................................................... 11 RIP Server Crash While Ripping............................................................................................................. 12 Print and Cut Clients.............................................................................................................................................. 13 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 13 Setting up a Print Client / Cut Client ......................................................................................................... 13 Configuring a Print Client / Cut Client ...................................................................................................... 14 Sending Data to a Print Client / Cut Client ............................................................................................. 15 Controlling the Print Client / Cut Client ................................................................................................... 16 Printing Jobs Automatically .................................................................................................................... 17 Starting Jobs Manually ............................................................................................................................. 18 Cutting Jobs .................................................................................................................................................. 18 Configuring the Total Ink Consumption .................................................................................................. 19 Sending Maintenance Jobs ........................................................................................................................... 20 Running the Print Client / Cut Client without JobQueueServer ...................................................... 21<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> ii<br /> <br /> Introduction Besides the JobComposer, the ErgoSoft RIP system includes some tools to manage and control the production: JobCenter The JobCenter is used to monitor and manage all already printed (cut) jobs as well as all jobs that are still waiting for being printed (cut). 1<br /> <br /> Print and Cut Clients When you do not print or cut directly to the port the Print Client resp. Cut Client manages all jobs of a certain printer or cutter (configuration). 2<br /> <br /> This documentation will describe the JobCenter as well as the Print Clients and Cut Clients. For a description of the necessary configuration when running Print and Cut Clients on another computer as the JobComposer please refer to the manual part about Configuring Remote Clients.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> JobCenter Introduction The JobCenter is used to monitor and manage all already printed (cut) jobs as well as all jobs that are still waiting for being printed (cut). The JobCenter is launched by pressing this icon in the modules list of the Standard toolbar in the JobComposer, by selecting menu Tools > Modules > JobCenter in the JobComposer, or by selecting JobCenter from the ErgoSoft RIP program group in the Windows program menu.<br /> <br /> The JobCenter Window The JobCenter window has the following components:<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2 c<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> b<br /> <br /> 4 10<br /> <br /> 5 a 6 c<br /> <br /> b 7<br /> <br /> c<br /> <br /> b 8<br /> <br /> a<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Toolbar The toolbar holds icons for fast access to job managing functions.<br /> <br /> Print and Cut Clients List The Print and Cut Clients list shows all active Print Clients and Cut Clients and allows setting them online and offline as well as loading the status monitor (when available) for checking the remaining ink. 2<br /> <br /> RIP Station List The RIP station list shows all active RIP Servers and allows setting them online and offline. 3<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Error Queue The error queue shows all jobs that could not be processed for any reason.<br /> <br /> Done Queue The done queue (job archive) shows all printed and cut jobs. The jobs can be archived automatically or manually to the hard disk or handled using the job managing functions (see below). 5<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting Queue The contour cutting queue shows all jobs that are waiting for a Cut Client to send them to a cutting plotter for contour cutting. The jobs can be handled using the job managing functions (see below). 6<br /> <br /> Printing Queue The printing queue shows all jobs that are waiting for a Print Client to send them to a printer. The jobs can be handled using the job managing functions (see below). 7<br /> <br /> Ripping Queue The ripping queue shows all jobs that are waiting to be rasterized and ripped. The jobs can be handled using the job managing functions (see below). 8<br /> <br /> Suspended Jobs Queue The suspended jobs queue shows all jobs that are waiting to be rasterized and ripped and have been set to be suspended. As soon as the suspension is removed the job is moved to the ripping queue. Jobs in the Suspended Jobs Queue can be re-loaded into the JobComposer and modified before they are sent to the RIP Server. This is done by using the command Edit Job from the Job context menu. 9<br /> <br /> Job Information The job information window lists some information about the job such as the job size, the used print environment, the number of copies, the creation date and more. 10<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> Job Preview<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> a b c<br /> <br /> Section Divider List Header Column Divider<br /> <br /> Configuration Configuring the Layout 1) Sizes of the window sections: The dividers between the different sections can be moved using the mouse. This allows you to design the JobCenter window according to your preferences. 2) Designing the lists: The width of the columns can be changed for each list separately by moving the column dividers with the mouse. Columns can be removed by clicking with the right mouse button on the column name and selecting Remove Column. Columns can be added by clicking with the right mouse button on an empty space in the list header and selecting Add Column. Then, select the appropriate column from the list.<br /> <br /> Automatically Deleting and Archiving Done Jobs The automatic job deletion and archiving function is started each time the JobCenter is loaded. It automatically deletes processed jobs or moves them to the archive folder. Launch the function by selecting menu File > Settings > Delete Done Jobs. 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2 3<br /> <br /> The automatic job 4 deletion should not be activated when you want to archive just a few jobs. In this case, the needed jobs can be archived manually (see below) before the jobs are removed manually from the JobCenter. 2<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Instead of just deleting done jobs they can be archived in the archive for later re-use: they can be imported in the JobComposer (command File > Import from Archive) or restored in the JobCenter (see below). Ripped data are only available for being archived when the ripped data are kept after printing (see the manual part about printing) or when the job has been ripped to a Print Client and not yet been sent to the printer. Please note that archiving including images and especially ripped data requires a lot of disk space. 3<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> The default archive folder can be changed to any folder you might want to include in your standard backup procedure.<br /> <br /> Default Settings for Dispatching Jobs The JobCenter allows specifying the default configuration for Print Clients for dispatching jobs. Launch the function by selecting menu File > Settings > Dispatch Print Jobs. 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1 2<br /> <br /> The Print Client offers the possibility to check whether the media size and/or the media type of the print jobs match the settings in the Print Client in order to prevent jobs being printed on the wrong media (size). The default setting for all Print Clients can be changed in the Print Client itself. 2<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> Job Managing Functions The following functions allow managing the jobs. Please note that with active Print Clients and/or Cut Clients the jobs in the corresponding queues should be controlled in the Print Clients resp. Cut Clients and not in the JobCenter.<br /> <br /> Cancel Printing When the current printing process is being canceled, the job is marked as suspended so that the complete printing process can be restarted by removing the suspension. The function is available in the Contour Cutting Queue, the Printing Queue, and the Ripping Queue.<br /> <br /> Deleting Job Jobs are logged in the JobCenter until they are automatically deleted/archived or deleted manually. Delete a job when you do not use it any more in the JobCenter. The function is available in the Job Archive, the Contour Cutting Queue, the Printing Queue, the Ripping Queue, and the Suspended Jobs Queue.<br /> <br /> Pausing Job Jobs can be paused so that they are not ripped, printed, or cut immediately but can be started manually after some time. To restart a paused (suspended) job, just remove the suspension. The function is available in the Job Archive, the Contour Cutting Queue, the Printing Queue, the Ripping Queue, and the Suspended Jobs Queue.<br /> <br /> Reprinting Job When a job is reprinted it is ripped again using the original settings – except when the ripped data are available. Please note that the images as well as the print environment still must exist and must not be changed after the creation of the job. The function is available in the Job Archive.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> Changing the Job Order The priority for jobs that wait to be ripped, printed, or cut can be raised or lowered. That means that the selected job is moved up or down in the list and thus, processed sooner or later. The functions are available in the Contour Cutting Queue, the Printing Queue, and the Ripping Queue.<br /> <br /> Checking Production Data This function allows obtaining and exporting the information about used media, ink, and time as well as to obtain the production costs. The prices for media and ink are entered in the print environment on the General resp. Ink Cost tab. The costs of the ripping and printing time is entered in the printer setup (e.g. on the Printer tab in the print environment). For more information on production costs please refer to the manual part about Special Production Tools. The function is launched by selecting Production Data from the Job context menu. It is available in the Job Archive, the Contour Cutting Queue, the Printing Queue, and the Ripping Queue.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> Modifying Job Properties The job properties allow checking some information about the job, changing some settings for later reprint as well as offering two different log files. Dialog part Job holds some basic information about the job and allows entering some information about the job. When the Print Client is used for printing, the number of Copies can be changed as long as the printing process is not finished. 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2 3<br /> <br /> For jobs in the Job Archive, the media 4 field shows the selected 5 media for printing. For jobs in the Queues the media field allows selecting a media. 2<br /> <br /> Keeping the RIP data allows archiving the job with the RIP data and reprinting the job without having to re-rip it. To save disk space the ripped data can be deleted when they are no longer used. 3<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> The Exception button offers some functions that help in solving problems with devices (see chapter “Solving Problems with Devices”).<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> The Journal logs all information that has been shown in the RIP Server for the selected job. The Production buttons shows dialog with information about production data.<br /> <br /> The function is available in the Job Archive, the Contour Cutting Queue, the Printing Queue, the Ripping Queue, and the Suspended Jobs Queue.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> Printing Job Information Often, detailed information about a job is not only needed in the JobCenter but should be printed with a standard office printer or saved for the administration. The Job Ticket allows displaying detailed information about the current job in the default web browser in which it can be printed. Job Tickets are launched by selecting JobTicket from the Job context menu. They are saved automatically in the folder that is specified in the menu File > Settings > JobTickets. The function is available in the Job Archive, the Contour Cutting Queue, and the Printing Queue.<br /> <br /> Archiving Jobs In addition to or instead of the automatic archiving of jobs, jobs may be archived manually. For more information about the available options please refer to chapter “Automatically Deleting and Archiving Done Jobs”. The function is launched by selecting Archive from the Job context menu. It is available in the Job Archive, the Contour Cutting Queue, the Printing Queue, the Ripping Queue, and the Suspended Jobs Queue.<br /> <br /> Reloading Archived Jobs Archived jobs cannot be only imported into the JobComposer but also just reloaded into the JobCenter in order to manage them just like any other job. The function is launched by selecting menu File > Restore.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> Searching for Production Information The production data for all jobs are saved in the production database. Thus, this information is available no matter whether the job is still in the Job Archive of the JobCenter, archived, or deleted. Launch the function by selecting menu File > Production Database. 1<br /> <br /> Specify the parameters for the search. View Result lists all jobs that meet the entered requirements as a list of production data. 2<br /> <br /> 1 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Controlling Devices The JobComposer and the RIP Server can be started in the JobCenter. The Print Clients and Cut Clients can be started as well as new Print Clients and Cut Clients can be set up. Please note that the icon for the Job Composer may look different depending on the product you are using. The RIP Server as well as all active Print Clients and Cut Clients can be set to online and offline in the JobCenter. This function is available in the Print and Cut Client List and the RIP Server List.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> Solving Problems with Devices Reprinting Defective Copies Copies of a job can be reprinted without influencing the production data of this job. This is necessary when e.g. the printer run out of ink and the correct production data is needed. The Exception button in the job properties dialog offers the needed function: Reduce the number of printed copies by the number of the copies you have to reprint and close the dialog with OK. The function is available in the Job Archive, the Contour Cutting Queue, the Printing Queue, the Ripping Queue, and the Suspended Jobs Queue.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> RIP Server Crash While Ripping When the RIP Server should crash during ripping (e.g. because of a printer problem) the currently processed job in the Ripping Queue is still waiting that ripping will be continued. The Exception button in the job properties dialog offers the needed function to reset this job: Click on the Reset to Waiting button. After having prompted to acknowledge the reset the ripping process is aborted and the job is paused. It can be restarted any time later.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 12<br /> <br /> Print and Cut Clients Introduction When you do not print or cut directly to the port the Print Client resp. Cut Client is used to capture the ripped data for easier control of the printer or cutter. It communicates with the Job Server that is visualized in the JobCenter. Using the Print Client resp. Cut Client, several workstations may send print (or cut) jobs to a central network printer (or cutter) at the same time. The Print Client resp. Cut Client will print (or cut) the jobs one after the other. When printing several copies of a job, time is saved by using the Print Client: The ErgoSoft RIP needs only to rip and print a single copy of the job; the Print Client prints the other copies independently. The Print Client resp. Cut Client is launched by selecting the wanted Print Client / Cut Client from the list in the Standard toolbar in the JobComposer, by selecting the wanted Print Client / Cut Client from the list after having selected menu Tools > Print Clients resp. Tools > Cut Clients in the JobComposer, or by selecting the wanted Print Client / Cut Client in the JobCenter.<br /> <br /> Setting up a Print Client / Cut Client Before a Print Client or Cut Client can be used it has to be set up. Launch the Print/Cut Client setup launched by pressing the displayed icon in the Print Environment reps. Cut Environment toolbar in the JobComposer, by selecting menu Tools > Print Clients resp. Tools > Cut Clients in the JobComposer, or by selecting Setup in the Print & Cut Client list in the JobCenter. 1<br /> <br /> Specify whether you want to create a Print Client or a Cut Client.<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Select the printer or cutter for which you want to create a Print Client / Cut Client. Click on the Edit button to edit the printer/cutter configuration. For more information please refer to the description of the Printer and Port tab in the manual part about Print Environments. 2<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> Closing the dialog box with OK will create 3 (or modify) a shortcut for the Print Client / Cut Client in the Print/Cut Client-List in the JobCenter as well as launch the Print Client / Cut Client. Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 13<br /> <br /> Configuring a Print Client / Cut Client When the Print Client / Cut Client is set up and launched it can be configured. The available options depend on the state in which the Print Client / Cut Client is: The Print Client / Cut Client can be set to Online, Manual Start, and Offline. These commands are also available in the Operation menu items Start manually and Offline which toggles between online and offline. 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1 3<br /> <br /> As long as the Print Client / Cut Client is set to offline, the port can be modified for the current Print/Cut Client task without having any effect on the printer or cutter settings. In addition, the status monitor can be selected and its update interval can be set. 2<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> As long as the Print Client / Cut Client is set to offline, the media can be selected and the size of the media can be entered. Please note that only jobs are printed that are smaller than the selected media size. Also the pre-settings for the media size/type checking that are configured in the JobCenter can be changed for the current Print Client / Cut Client. 3<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> As long as the Print Client / Cut Client is set to offline, maintenance jobs can be set up. For more information please refer to chapter “Sending Maintenance Jobs” below.<br /> <br /> As long as the Print Client / Cut Client is set to offline, menu Operation > Options offer some settings for automatic startup. 5<br /> <br /> 5 5<br /> <br /> The View menu offers to 6 show the status monitor when one have been configured in the port configuration dialog in the Print Client / Cut Client or in the printer settings.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 14<br /> <br /> Sending Data to a Print Client / Cut Client 1<br /> <br /> 1) 2)<br /> <br /> Printing or cutting to a Print Client / Cut Client is done automatically when the following requirements are met: There is a spool folder set in the printer/cutter configuration (see the description of the Printer and Port tab in the manual part about Print Environments). The box Skip PrintClient (Print directly to port) is not checked in the printing dialog (see the manual part about Printing).<br /> <br /> When Operation > Check Printer Status is activated, the Print Client / Cut Client will not send data to the printer / cutter before the printer / cutter requests for new data. This function can be used to e.g. avoid problems in printing several copies when the printer cannot handle data of the next copy until the current one is completely printed. Please note that this functionality must also be supported by the printer / cutter in order to work properly. 2<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> Controlling the Print Client / Cut Client The Print Client / Cut Client window has the following components:<br /> <br /> 2 3 4 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> a b<br /> <br /> c<br /> <br /> f<br /> <br /> d g e<br /> <br /> h<br /> <br /> Operation mode These buttons allow setting the Print Client / Cut Client to online, start manually, or offline. 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Operation state Shows what the Print Client / Cut Client is currently doing.<br /> <br /> Port settings In offline mode, this button allows checking the port settings and activating or deactivating a status monitor. 3<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> Cancel printing The printing of the current job can be canceled. Maintenance Jobs<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> In offline mode, maintenance jobs can be configured. Job information / Media settings In offline mode, the media check of the Print Client can be configured. In manual mode or online mode, (progress) information on the currently loaded / produced job is displayed. 6<br /> <br /> a<br /> <br /> b c d e f g h<br /> <br /> Print Queue Monitor The available functions are described in chapter “The JobCenter Window” above. Error Queue Job Archive Printing Queue Ripping Queue Job Information Job Preview Status Monitor<br /> <br /> Printing Jobs Automatically When the Print Client is set to online, the next job waiting in the Printing Queue is automatically sent to the printer when it meets the media requirements set in the Print Client.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 17<br /> <br /> Starting Jobs Manually Using the Print Client in manual start mode is useful when e.g. the printer has to be checked before each print job or some job settings need modification before printing. When the Print Client is set to start manually, the next job to be printed is loaded. Information about this job is displayed below as well as in the Job Information and Preview windows. 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Clicking the Start button will start sending the job to the prin-<br /> <br /> ter. Depending on the used print driver (basic print environment), the button Change is activated allowing you to modify some printer settings configured in the print environment tab Device Options (such as print quality, print speed, heater settings, etc.) before the printout is started. 3<br /> <br /> Cutting Jobs For special information about cutting jobs using Cut Clients please refer to the manual part about Cutting with ErgoSoft RIPs.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> Configuring the Total Ink Consumption This function allows correcting the amount of the used ink by the pro rata amount of ink needed for cleaning, changing cartridges, etc. Launch menu Operation > Ink Consumption. Please note that you have to set up the Print Client with an appropriate status monitor before you can launch this function. When changing the cartridge or refilling the ink system enter the Start ink level for each ink. This is written automatically into the database. The observation period is started. To end the observation period and calculate the correction factor, enter the End ink level (e.g. remaining ink in your cartridge or ink system). The correction factor is automatically calculated from the ink consumption information in the jobs during the observation period and the information about the spent ink in this dialog. The correction factor can also be entered manually when it is known. When a correction factor is available it is automatically used to correct the production data of new jobs. It is not used for jobs printed before. Please note that the procedure for retrieving the correction factor (or manually entering the correction factor) must be done for each ink.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 19<br /> <br /> Sending Maintenance Jobs Some workflow requires that at certain intervals special maintenance jobs are sent to the printer. The ErgoSoft RIPs offer the possibility to load and configure maintenance jobs. 1<br /> <br /> Set the Print Client to Offline.<br /> <br /> Click the Maintenance Job button to load a list with already configured maintenance jobs.<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Use the buttons to manage already set up maintenance jobs as well as to create new maintenance jobs. Configure the interval for automatic processing according to your needs.<br /> <br /> 2 4 3<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> job<br /> <br /> 4 3<br /> <br /> Click the Send Now button to manually launch the selected maintenance job and process it immediately. 4<br /> <br /> There are some maintenance jobs delivered with the ErgoSoft RIP. Please contact your printer dealer for more maintenance jobs.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> Running the Print Client / Cut Client without JobQueueServer Normally, the JobQueueServer captures the print job from the JobComposer and communicates with the JobCenter and the Print Client / Cut Client. When the JobQueueServer is not available for any reason, the Print Client / Cut Client offers the possibility to send jobs from the spool folder to the printer/cutter: 1<br /> <br /> Set the Print Client / Cut Client to No-Server-Mode.<br /> <br /> The Print Queue offers limited access to jobs still waiting to be printed/cut. The buttons for managing jobs in the toolbar are disabled but some functions are available in the Job context menu. Reprinting a job is done by selecting Reprint from the Job context menu and selecting the number of copies. When closing the dialog with OK, the job is automatically sent to the Print Queue. 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 3 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> The Print Client / Cut Client works in all modes as described above; there is no different on the basic operating functions between Server-Mode and No-Server-Mode.<br /> <br /> Production Managing Tools<br /> <br /> 21<br /> <br /> Application Notes Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.<br /> <br /> The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> i<br /> <br /> Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Job Processing Policies ............................................................................................................................................2 Creating and Selecting Job Processing Policies .......................................................................................2 Setting the Global Job Processing Policy ...................................................................................................3 Preflight .........................................................................................................................................................................4 Preflight Settings..................................................................................................................................................4 Automatic Preflight .............................................................................................................................................5 Manual Preflight ...................................................................................................................................................6 Production Cost Calculation ..................................................................................................................................7 Entering the Ink Costs ........................................................................................................................................7 Entering a Correction for the Ink Consumption.......................................................................................8 Entering the Media Costs .................................................................................................................................8 Entering the Printer Time Costs .....................................................................................................................9 Configuring the Print Client .......................................................................................................................... 10 Estimating the Costs before Printing ........................................................................................................ 11 Cost Calculation... ............................................................................................................................................. 12 ... When using the Print Client................................................................................................................ 12 ... When Printing Directly to the Port................................................................................................... 12 Target Printer Simulation..................................................................................................................................... 13 Configuring the Print Environment ............................................................................................................ 13 Configuring the Job ......................................................................................................................................... 14 Printing the Proof ............................................................................................................................................. 15<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> ii<br /> <br /> Introduction In order to increase the efficiency of your workflow and production, the ErgoSoft RIP offers some additional production tools: Job Processing Policies Job Processing Policies hold rules and settings for preflight, job printing, and job archiving. They allow creating rules for certain workflows or customers that can be assigned to jobs before printing. All settings and rules in a Job Processing Policy are performed automatically. 1<br /> <br /> Preflight The Preflight function allows creating a printed or digital preview of the job. It allows checking the layout before printing. 2<br /> <br /> Production Cost Calculation The Production Cost Calculation function allows automatically calculating the production costs of a job. 3<br /> <br /> Target Printer Simulation The Target Printer Simulation allows simulating any other production machine such as an offset printing press or screen printing machine or another inkjet printer when the profile for this production machine is available. 4<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Job Processing Policies The Job Center allows specifying global rules for deleting and archiving done jobs. Job Processing Policies hold rules and settings for preflight, job printing, and job archiving. They allow creating rules for certain workflows or customers that can be assigned to jobs before printing. All settings and rules in a Job Processing Policy are performed automatically.<br /> <br /> Creating and Selecting Job Processing Policies To create and select Job Processing Policies use the Job Properties page Job Processing Policy. 1<br /> <br /> Select the Job Processing Policy you want to use with the current job. Click the View button to check the settings of the selected job processing policy. The New button allows creating a new job processing policy based on the selected one.<br /> <br /> 1 2<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 2 3 4<br /> <br /> The General tab allows entering a description of the job processing policy that is displayed on selection. The settings on the Archive tab concern the deleting and archiving rules of processed jobs. They are described in the manual part about the JobCenter (Production Managing Tools). The settings on the Preflight tab concern the rules for preflight. They are described in the manual part about Preflight below. The settings on the Workflow tab concern the printing process and are described below. 3<br /> <br /> Configure the default settings in the print dialog concerning suspensions and keeping ripped data. Check Force to deactivate the possibility of changing these settings in the print dialog. 4<br /> <br /> All jobs with the Job Processing Policy “-Default Settings-” use the archiving and deleting rules specified in the Job Center. All other rules overwrite the default rule and e.g. allow saving the archived jobs on a different folder than the default archive folder.<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Setting the Global Job Processing Policy The default job processing policy is set in the global settings of menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Job > Job Default Settings. Use the buttons to manage job processing policies by editing, creating, deleting, and renaming them.<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> Preflight The Preflight function allows creating a printed or digital preview of the job. It allows checking the layout before printing. Please note that the Preflight functionality is not available for Legacy print drivers. Preflight can be launched automatically before printing or manually.<br /> <br /> Preflight Settings The preflight settings are independent from the method the preflight is launched. This chapter simply describes the settings without considering the method of preflight launching. Select the preflight mode you want to use: RGB Jpeg and RGB Tiff create RGB files simulating a printout; Device Tiff creates a CMYK Tiff file with additional color channels simulating the color channels of the print environment; and Print creates a printout. 1<br /> <br /> 1 2 4 5<br /> <br /> When using the RGB Jpeg or RGB Tiff mode, you have to select a monitor profile that is used to create the RGB file from the print data. 2<br /> <br /> When using the Print mode, you can select a print environment to output the preflight e.g. on another smaller printer than the production. 3<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 4 5<br /> <br /> Check Simulate Target Printer in order to use the calibration settings of the current print environment in addition to the preflight settings. 4<br /> <br /> Select the dimensions in which the preflight is created. When using the RGB Jpeg, RGB Tiff or Device Tiff mode, you have to enter the dimensions in pixels while the Print mode requires the dimensions to be entered in the current unit. 5<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Entering “0” for width or height means that this dimension does not matter and just the other one counts. When entering width and height, the job is scaled proportionally so that it will fit into both values. When using the Device Tiff mode, PostScript files can be rasterized to the size and resolution of the final printout instead of size and resolution of the preflight. Use this option to check in advance, whether you might run into the limits for PostScript files later in production. 6<br /> <br /> Automatic Preflight In order to use preflight automatically, it must be configured and activated in the current Job Processing Policy. Then, the option Preflight in the Print dialog is automatically checked. When printing a job with the preflight option checked, just the preflight is created and the job is sent to the Waiting Queue waiting for you to manually start it for further processing. The preflight files are saved in the subfolder \Data\Preflight of the current user data folder; the printout is done according to the port settings in the used print environment. The preflight option in the Print dialog will only create a preflight when it is configured and activated in the current job processing policy.<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> Manual Preflight Sometimes, you might want to do a preflight just for the current job without needing to create a job processing policy for automatic preflight. Or you might want to do the preflight immediately for testing the job layout without needing the possibility of continuing the printing process. The ErgoSoft RIP offers the possibility to manually configure and launch a preflight. 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> To manually launch a preflight use the Job Properties page Job Production.<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Click the Render button in the Job Preflight part of the page. 2<br /> <br /> When all settings are done according to the description above, click the OK button to immediately start the preflight process. 3<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> The preflight files are saved in the subfolder \Data\Preflight of the current user data folder; the printout is done according to the port settings in the used print environment. When using the RGB Jpeg mode, the preflight ticket is automatically launched.<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> Production Cost Calculation The ErgoSoft RIP offers the possibility to automatically calculate the production cost in advance and/or as part of the production process. The requirements and settings needed for the production cost calculation are: The license must include the option for calculating the production costs. The costs of the ink must be entered. A correction for the ink consumption may be entered. The costs of the media must be entered. The costs for the printer time needed for (ripping and) printing must be entered. When the Print Client is used it must be configured correctly for the media usage.<br /> <br /> Entering the Ink Costs The ink costs are entered in the print environment on the Ink Cost tab. 1<br /> <br /> Enter the size of the dot in pl. The default values are not necessarily correct. Please get the correct values from the printer manufacturer. 2<br /> <br /> Select the ink type and use the buttons to edit, create, delete and rename ink types. Make sure that there is a value entered for each ink color. When having more than one ink type specified, be sure to select the ink type for which the current print environment is created. 3<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 3 3<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> Entering a Correction for the Ink Consumption Start the Print Client and set it to OFFLINE. 1<br /> <br /> Launch the menu Operation > Ink Consumption.<br /> <br /> 1 1<br /> <br /> 2 To calculate the correction factor: 2 For each ink that is loaded in your printer: Enter the current ink level in ml into 3 the Start ink level field and close the dialog with OK. Print some time (e.g. some days). Take care that all operations that must be done in certain intervals (e.g. head cleaning) are performed several times. Launch this function again and for each ink that is loaded in your printer, enter the current ink level into the End ink level field which now is enabled. When closing the dialog with OK the Consumption factor is calculated and automatically entered. 3<br /> <br /> To manually enter the consumption factor: Check Set manually and enter the Consumption factor.<br /> <br /> Entering the Media Costs The media costs are entered in the print environment on the General tab. It does not matter in which print environment you modify the media list; it is always the global list for the system.<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> Entering the Printer Time Costs The costs for the printer time are entered in the Printer and Port configuration of the print environment. When using the Print Client, the cost calculation does not include the ripping time. Only the time is used for the calculation that is needed for the Print Client to send all data to the printer. The printer might need some more time to finish the printout. When the job is printed directly to the port (Print Client is skipped), the cost calculation includes both the ripping time and the time needed to send the data to the printer. The printer might need some more time to finish the printout.<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> Configuring the Print Client When the Print Client is used, the media cost is calculated using the information set in the Print Client. 1<br /> <br /> Set the Print Client to OFFLINE.<br /> <br /> Select the media 2 Type that is loaded in the printer.<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> Enter the media Width or press Refresh to automatically get the media width from the printer. Please note that getting the media from the printer requires that the printer is online and that the printer already has detected the media width and that the Print Client is configured to allow the usage of a status monitor. 3<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> Estimating the Costs before Printing The production costs can be estimated before printing. To estimate the production costs use the Job Properties page Job Production. 1<br /> <br /> Set the number of copies of the job to be produced. 2<br /> <br /> 2 1<br /> <br /> 3 4<br /> <br /> Select the media on which you intend to print this job. 3<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Press Calculate to let the ErgoSoft RIP estimate the production costs as follows: The media costs are calculated from the dimensions of the job. The ink costs are calculated from the previews in the job. The printer costs are calculated from other jobs that are already printed. The more jobs are already printed the more precise this value can be.<br /> <br /> Since this function is just an estimation of the costs the actual costs may be quite different from this estimation. The more jobs are already printed the more precise this estimation can be.<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> Cost Calculation...<br /> <br /> ... When using the Print Client When using the Print Client the cost calculation is done as follows: Media Costs: The media costs are calculated from the information in the Print Client. The media selected in the Print Client is used for getting the media price. The area used is calculated from the job length and the media width entered in the Print Client. (See "Configuring the Print Client" for more information.) Ink Costs: The ink costs are calculated from the needed dots for the image and the number of dots per ml (see "Entering the Ink Costs" for more information). Printer Costs: The printer costs (Time) are calculated from the time the Print Client needs to send the data to the printer and the costs per hour that is specified for the printer. The time needed for ripping the job does not influence the calculation.<br /> <br /> ... When Printing Directly to the Port When printing directly to the port the cost calculation is done as follows: Media Costs: The media costs are calculated from the media type selected in the Print dialog and the area of the job filled with data. Please note that the media width is not known and thus, cannot be used for calculating the media costs. Ink Costs: The ink costs are calculated from the needed dots for the image and the number of dots per ml (see "Entering the Ink Costs" for more information). Printer Costs: The printer costs (Time) are calculated from the time the RIP Server needs to rip and send the data to the printer and the costs per hour that is specified for the printer.<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 12<br /> <br /> Target Printer Simulation The Target Printer Simulation allows simulating any other production machine such as an offset printing press or screen printing machine or another inkjet printer when the profile for this production machine is available. The ErgoSoft RIP may e.g. be used to create a proof for offset or screen printing. To simulate another production system you need to … You need to know which how the image color space will be converted into the Lab color space. This means that you need to know the color management settings and that you have the input profile(s). You need to know how the Lab color space will be converted into the production color space. This means that you need to have the output profile and that you know which rendering intent should be used. You need to have a calibrated workflow in the ErgoSoft RIP. This means that you have a density linearization and printer profile for your inkjet printer you want to use for the target printer simulation. With this information and files you can configure the print environment and set up your workflow.<br /> <br /> Configuring the Print Environment Select the output profile for the output device you want to simulate. Use the Import button to let the ErgoSoft RIP copy the profile to the folder it is expected to be saved. 1<br /> <br /> Select the rendering intent that the output device to be simulated uses to convert the Lab color space into the output color space. 2<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 13<br /> <br /> Configuring the Job Create and design your job as usual. Select the image color management settings in the Image Properties window according to the color management settings for images that the output device to be simulated uses. These settings might be different from the color management settings you normally use. When the gamut of your printer is larger than the gamut of the output device to be simulated you might want to use the absolute colorimetric rendering intent.<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 14<br /> <br /> Printing the Proof When printing the following color conversions are done automatically: The image is converted into Lab using the specified input profile(s). The resulting Lab values are converted into the Proof color space using the profile and rendering intent specified for target printer simulation on the Extras tab in the print environment. At last, the Proof color space values are converted into the printer color space using the density linearization and printer profile specified on the Quality tab in the print environment as well as the rendering intent specified in the color management settings in the Image Properties window.<br /> <br /> Special Production Tools<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> Application Notes %PVCMF4JEFE1SJOUJOH PO)1-BUFY1SJOUFST<br /> <br /> Double-Sided Printing on HP Latex Printers<br /> <br /> ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2012 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.<br /> <br /> The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1<br /> <br /> Double-Sided Printing on HP Latex Printers<br /> <br /> i<br /> <br /> Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Basics on Double-Sided Printing .........................................................................................................................1 Modes for Double-Sided Printing .......................................................................................................................2 Common Features ...............................................................................................................................................2 Differences of the Modes .................................................................................................................................2 Examples for Preparing and Printing Jobs .......................................................................................................3 Automatic B Side Generation ..........................................................................................................................3 Step 1: Import 3 Images ..............................................................................................................................3 Step 2: Create Job with 3 Pages ...............................................................................................................3 Step 3: Send Job for Ripping .....................................................................................................................4 Step 4: Print Side A Pages ..........................................................................................................................5 Step 5: Print Side B Pages ...........................................................................................................................5 Manual B Side Creation .....................................................................................................................................6<br /> <br /> Double-Sided Printing on HP Latex Printers<br /> <br /> ii<br /> <br /> Introduction This document explains the usage of double-sided control in the ErgoSoft RIP software for printing on HP Designjet L26500 Printer Series and HP Designjet L28500 Printer Series. It is meant as an extension to the standard application notes about printing with the ErgoSoft RIP and configuring the print environment. Thus, it does not explain all possibilities and steps in detail but focuses on the special settings for double-sided printing using the mentioned HP Designjet Latex printer series.<br /> <br /> Basics on Double-Sided Printing Since the Ergosoft RIP does not really have a concept of double-sided printing another feature of the software can be used that is very similar to the double-sided printing function. The concept of multi-page print jobs in the ErgoSoft RIP, which has been established mainly for reprinting single tiles of huge tiled jobs using the Print Client, can be used for doublesided printing. When using this feature, each tile is printed on a separate page of the job and the Print Client allows the user to select the page(s) to be reprinted when needed. In the case of double-sided printing, the job is prepared similar to multi-page printing of tiled jobs: First, all side A pages (front pages) of a job are printed followed by all side B pages (back pages) of the job.<br /> <br /> Double-Sided Printing on HP Latex Printers<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Modes for Double-Sided Printing Double-sided printing is activated in the Advanced options on the Device Options tab of the print environment. There are 2 different modes available having some common features as well as some differences: Automatic B side generation Manual B side creation<br /> <br /> Common Features Side B pages can be rotated and mirrored automatically. Side B pages will be printed in reverse order to reflect the position on the reverse loaded media.<br /> <br /> Differences of the Modes Automatic B Side Generation A matching side B page is automatically created Page in Job Used Side Print Sequence 1 A and B 1 Side A for each side A page without needing any user 2 A and B 2 Side A interaction. 3 A and B 3 Side A The number of pages to be printed will be double 3 Side B the number of pages in the job. 2 Side B 1 Side B<br /> <br /> Manual B Side Creation 2 consecutive pages are treated as a side A page Page in Job Used Side Print Sequence 1 A 1 which is followed by a side B page 2 B 6 Side A page and side B page can have a different 3 A 2 image. But the images need to have the same 4 B 5 output dimensions. 5 A 3 If necessary, only some side B pages may be 6 B 4 (manually) mirrored and/or rotated instead of all.<br /> <br /> Double-Sided Printing on HP Latex Printers<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Examples for Preparing and Printing Jobs Automatic B Side Generation This mode automatically copies the images of side A (front) to side B (back) of the pages. You have to import only the images for side A.<br /> <br /> Step 1: Import 3 Images Import the images as usual. They will all be automatically positioned in the job.<br /> <br /> Step 2: Create Job with 3 Pages To create a separate page for each image: Select all images Right-click on one image to open the image context menu. Select Page per Image A job with 3 pages will be created.<br /> <br /> Double-Sided Printing on HP Latex Printers<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> Step 3: Send Job for Ripping Since the print job needs some manual intervention after ripping before it is send to the printer, you have to use the Print Client for printing and hold the job after ripping. This can be done as follows: Make sure that the Print Client is open and OFF-LINE or Check Suspend Printing in the Print dialog. Print the job. The job now has 6 pages.<br /> <br /> Double-Sided Printing on HP Latex Printers<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Step 4: Print Side A Pages The side A pages in the current example are the first 3 pages. To print only pages 1-3, open the Print Client and select the job. Right-click on the job to open the context menu. Select Properties. Click the Pages to Print button. Select the following: and enter the number of the pages to be printed (“1-3”). Close the dialogs with OK. Print the pages (set the Print Client to ON-LINE and/or toggle the Suspended status.<br /> <br /> Step 5: Print Side B Pages The side B pages in the current example are pages 4-6. To print these pages, open the Print Client and select the (printed) job. Right-click on the job to open the context menu. Select Reprint. Click the Pages button. Select the following and enter the number of the pages to be printed (“4-6”). Close the dialogs with OK. When you are sure that the media is loaded with the correct side B, confirm the message with OK. Clicking Cancel will cancel printing the job.<br /> <br /> Double-Sided Printing on HP Latex Printers<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> Manual B Side Creation When using this mode, you have to create a job with side A and side B images that follows a pre-defined order. IM 1a will be printed on page 1, side A IM 1b will be printed on page 1, side B IM 2a will be printed on page 2, side A IM 1a IM 2b will be printed on page 2, side B IM 3a will be printed on page 3, side A IM 3b will be printed on page 3, side B When automatic mirroring and/or rotation is activated in the print environment, the image must not be mirrored or rotated manually. IM 1b When you want to print only some images mirrored and/or rotated, you may deactivate the option in the print environment and mirror and/or rotate the side B images (IM 1b, IM 2b, IM 3b) manually. For printing, follow the description of steps 3 to 5 in chapter Automatic B Side Generation. For your convenience, the ErgoSoft RIP automatically re-sorts the pages of your job for printing as follows: IM 1a will be page 1 of the print job IM 2a will be page 2 of the print job IM 3a will be page 3 of the print job IM 3b will be page 4 of the print job IM 2b will be page 5 of the print job IM 1b will be page 6 of the print job Thus, you can select the same range for printing as for automatic B side generation; pages 1-3 for the A sides and pages 4-6 for the B sides.<br /> <br /> IM 2a<br /> <br /> IM 2b<br /> <br /> IM 3a<br /> <br /> IM 3b<br /> <br /> Double-Sided Printing on HP Latex Printers<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> Application Notes Mimaki Printers Notes on Settings<br /> <br /> Mimaki Printers Notes on Settings<br /> <br /> ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2012 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.<br /> <br /> The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1<br /> <br /> Mimaki Printers - Notes on Settings<br /> <br /> i<br /> <br /> Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 “HS” Resolution Setting...........................................................................................................................................2 Basics ........................................................................................................................................................................2 Summary .................................................................................................................................................................3 “High Speed Transfer” Device Option ...............................................................................................................4 Basics ........................................................................................................................................................................4 Summary .................................................................................................................................................................4 “Mimaki JV5 8C Special” Print Driver .................................................................................................................5<br /> <br /> Mimaki Printers - Notes on Settings<br /> <br /> ii<br /> <br /> Introduction Some Mimaki print drivers offer specific options that might need some explanation: “HS” Resolution settings “High Speed Transfer” device option “Mimaki JV5 8C Special” print driver This document will discuss the special settings in detail, explain the relation to Mimaki High Speed Carriage movement of the printer and list some consequences of the settings for the output quality. It does not explain the print environment in detail; it focuses on these special options that are available for some Mimaki printers. Please read the standard application note about print environment configuration for information about settings that are not explained in this document. Check your printer manual for information about device options that are not explained in this document.<br /> <br /> Mimaki Printers - Notes on Settings<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> “HS” Resolution Setting Basics Some Mimaki print drivers, e.g. Mimaki JV33, JV34, JV5, come with resolutions that end with “HS”. These resolutions are added to the standard resolutions in the print environment. The “HS” resolutions are available in the print environment tab Quality. They have been developed to improve the speed of the raster calculation. When the job is ripped for an “HS” resolution type, the ripping speed is almost twice as fast as with the same resolution without “HS”. This is done by halving the optical resolution. In most cases, you will not see the difference in print quality. This option is very useful when the ErgoSoft RIP is installed on a computer that is not fast enough to keep up with the printing speed of the printer. If the printer is printing faster than the ripping process in the RIP Server the printer will have to wait (while printing or between jobs depending on the settings in the printer port, Print Client or print environment for creating the spool data for the Print Client). Please note that the “HS” resolution will not increase the printing speed of the machine but only the decrease the ripping time needed in the RIP Server.<br /> <br /> Mimaki Printers - Notes on Settings<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Summary Normal resolutions + Best optical resolution + Advised for fine printing - Needs a fast computer - Calculation of images will take more time This resolution should be used if the RIP computer is fast enough “HS” resolutions - Half optical resolution + Usually the decrease in optical resolution is not noticeable + Can be used on slower computers + Calculation of images will be faster This resolution should be used if the RIP computer is not fast enough for normal resolutions<br /> <br /> Mimaki Printers - Notes on Settings<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> “High Speed Transfer” Device Option Basics For most Mimaki print drivers, the “High Speed Transfer” option is available on the Device Options tab in the print environment. When High Speed Transfer is activated, the printer carriage speed or so-called Y direction speed will increase. This option will effectively increase the production speed of the machine. The disadvantage of this option is that the accuracy of the dot placement will decrease. Since the carriage is moving faster more air turbulence is created between the print head and the media, and ink drops (especially small dots) will be deviated from their normal path. The printed image will have more noise; small lines will be printed less fine.<br /> <br /> Summary High Speed Transfer OFF Desired option for quality printing Printing speed will still be acceptable High Speed Transfer ON Desired option for production and low quality printing Printing speed will be around 50% faster<br /> <br /> Mimaki Printers - Notes on Settings<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> “Mimaki JV5 8C Special” Print Driver The ErgoSoft RIP offers two drivers for printing with 8 colors on Mimaki JV5. Both drivers are available when Adding a new print environment: Depending on the firmware version that is installed on a Mimaki JV5 printer, it is possible to set the machine into 8 color mode or just into 4 color mode. In case the 8 color mode is not available on your machine, you can use the 8C Special driver. This driver will allow you to print with 8 ink channels on a Mimaki JV5 that is set up in 4 color mode. For technical reasons, only half the amount of dots can be printed. The maximum amount of ink available per channel will be 50%. Thus, the 8C Special driver should only be used if you cannot set up your Mimaki JV5 in 8 color mode.<br /> <br /> Mimaki Printers - Notes on Settings<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> Application Notes Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2011-2012 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.<br /> <br /> The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.2<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> i<br /> <br /> Contents Recommended Settings for Device Options / Roland IPC.........................................................................1 Empfohlene Einstellungen für Geräteoptionen / Roland IPC ...................................................................2 Roland FP-740.............................................................................................................................................................3 Roland LEC 300...........................................................................................................................................................4 Roland LEC 330 Eco-UV Ink (CMYKWGL) .........................................................................................................5 Roland LEC 330 Eco-UV Ink (CMYKGLGL) ........................................................................................................6 Roland LEC 330 Eco-UV Ink (CMYKWW) ..........................................................................................................7 Roland PRO II (FJ-SC-SJ Series 6 Color mode) ...............................................................................................8 Roland RS Series (540, 640) ................................................................................................................................ 12 Roland SJ-1000 1045............................................................................................................................................. 13 Roland SP300 540 EcoSol Ink............................................................................................................................. 14 Roland SP300 540 EcoSol Max Ink ................................................................................................................... 14 Roland VP-300 / VP-540 ...................................................................................................................................... 15 Roland VS 640 CMYK Mode ............................................................................................................................... 16 Roland VS 640 CMYKLcLm / CMYKLcLmWMt Mode ................................................................................ 17 Roland XC (540)....................................................................................................................................................... 18 Roland XJ-540 640 740......................................................................................................................................... 19<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> ii<br /> <br /> Recommended Settings for Device Options / Roland IPC With all the available settings and combinations in a Print Environment, it’s easy to lose track of the settings and their effect. Some settings work better together than others, but finding the best possible combination can be time consuming. Intelligent Pass Control (IPC) is a printer function originally developed by Roland for the XJseries of printers to reduce banding in printouts, bleeding of inks and hence improve the output image through intelligent use of the printer’s nozzles. Due to its success, IPC has later been implemented into many of Roland’s other printer models. To help users save time, Roland gives out recommendations which combinations of device settings including IPC should be used to achieve the best possible results with their printers. This document is meant to provide a listing of these settings for certain printer models that are currently supported in the ErgoSoft RIP programs. Apart from the resolution, all important settings are made in the Print Settings > Device Options dialog. The resolution can be set in the Print Settings > Quality dialog. IPC can be activated in the Device Options dialog of the print settings under the title IPC.<br /> <br /> We advise users explicitly to set the listed print settings according to the following tables for the respective printer.<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Empfohlene Einstellungen für Geräteoptionen / Roland IPC Bei allen möglichen Einstellungen und Kombinationen in einer Druckumgebung ist es schnell möglich, den Überblick zu verlieren. Manche Einstellungen funktionieren besser miteinander als andere, doch die optimale Kombination zu finden braucht viel Zeit. Beim Intelligent Pass Control (IPC) handelt es sich um eine von Roland ursprünglich für die XJ Reihe von Druckern entwickelte Druckerfunktion, die durch intelligente Verwendung der einzelnen Nozzles Banding in Ausdrucken reduziert, “Bluten” der Farben verhindern soll und so das Druckbild verbessert. IPC wurde später in viele andere Roland-Drucker implementiert. Roland gibt klare Empfehlungen mit, welche Einstellungen mit welcher Auflösung verwendet werden sollten, um die besten Ergebnisse zu erzielen. Dieses Dokument enthält eine Auflistung dieser empfohlenen Einstellungen für einige Druckermodelle, die momentan vom ErgoSoft RIP unterstützt werden. Bis auf die Auflösung werden alle wichtigen Einstellungen im Dialog Druckeinstellungen > Geräteoptionen vorgenommen. Die Auflösung wird im Dialog Druckeinstellungen > Qualität eingestellt. Das IPC wird in den Druckeinstellungen im Reiter Geräteoptionen unter dem Titel IPC eingestellt.<br /> <br /> Wir empfehlen ausdrücklich, die aufgeführten Druckumgebungseinstellungen entsprechend der folgenden Tabellen einzustellen. Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Roland FP-740 Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern<br /> <br /> Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x360 (2bit 1p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x360 (1bit 2p)<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x360 (2bit 2p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 930<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x360 +PASS (2p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 172<br /> <br /> 360x360 +PASS (3p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 930<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 115<br /> <br /> 540x360 +PASS (2p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 172<br /> <br /> 540x360 +PASS (3p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 115<br /> <br /> 540x360 +PASSv2 (4p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 172<br /> <br /> 360x720 (1bit 4p)<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x720 (1bit 8p)<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x720 (2bit 4p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 750<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x720 +PASS (4p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 910<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x720 (2bit 8p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x720 +PASS (5p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 910<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 69<br /> <br /> 540x720 (6p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 720<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 540x720 +PASS (7p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> 49<br /> <br /> 720x720 (1bit 8p)<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x720 (2bit 8p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 670<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720x720 +PASS (9p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 740<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 39<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> Roland LEC 300 Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize DotType Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x720 9P<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 360x720 16P (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 129<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 360x720 9P (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 360x720 (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 360x720 (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720x720 17p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 720x720 32p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 129<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 32p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 129<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 32p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 129<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 17p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> 720x720 17p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> 720x720 17p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 17p<br /> <br /> Fix L<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 720x1440 17p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 720x1440 32p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 129<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x1440 32p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 129<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x1440 32p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 17p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> 720x1440 17p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> 720x1440 17p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 720x1440 (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 720x1440 (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Roland LEC 330 Eco-UV Ink (CMYKWGL) Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize DotType Headspeed Feedspeed Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x720 5P<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 8P (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 257<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p (CMYK->MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p (MatteVarnish->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360x720 5p (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p (CMYK>MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p (MatteVarnish->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 8p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (CMYK>MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 700<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (MatteVarnish>CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 700<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p (CMYK>MatteVarnish) Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p (MatteVarnish>CMYK) Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> Roland LEC 330 Eco-UV Ink (CMYKGLGL) Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize DotType Headspeed Feedspeed Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x720 5P<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p (CMYK->MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p (MatteVarnish->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360x720 5p (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p (CMYK>MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p (MatteVarnish->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 8p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (CMYK>MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (MatteVarnish>CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p (CMYK>MatteVarnish) Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p (MatteVarnish>CMYK) Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> Roland LEC 330 Eco-UV Ink (CMYKWW) Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize DotType Headspeed Feedspeed Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x720 5P<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 8P (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 257<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 360x720 8P (High Opacity White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 257<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (High Opacity White>CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (High Opacity CMYK>White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (High Opacity White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 8p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (High Opacity White>CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (High Opacity CMYK>White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (High Opacity White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (High Opacity White>CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (High Opacity CMYK>White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (High Opacity White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> Roland LEJ-640 CMYKGIW Printmode<br /> <br /> DotSize<br /> <br /> DotType Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360 x 720 5p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360 x 720 8p (White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 257<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 320 x 720 6p (CMYK -> MV)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360 x 720 6p (MV->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360 x 720 5p (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360 x 720 5p (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720 x 720 8p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 9p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 18p (W->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 18p (CMYK->W)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 18p (W)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 9p (CMYK->MV)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 9p (MV->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 12p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 24p (W->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 24p (CMYK->W)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 24p (W)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 12p (CMYK->MV)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 12p (MV->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 12p (GlossVarnish) Small<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 12p (MatteVarnish) Small<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 16p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 32p (W->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 32p (CMYK->W)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 32p (W)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 16p (CMYK->MV) Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 16p (MV->CMYK) Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> Roland LEJ-640 CMYKGIGI Printmode<br /> <br /> DotSize<br /> <br /> DotType Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360 x 720 5p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360 x 720 6p (CMYK->MV)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360 x 720 6p (MV->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360 x 720 5p (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360 x 720 5p (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 9p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 12p (CMYK->MV)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 12p (MV->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 12p (GlossVarnish) Small<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 12p (MatteVarnish) Small<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 16p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 16p (CMYK->MV) Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 16p (MV-CMYK)<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> Roland LEJ-640 CMYKWW Printmode<br /> <br /> DotSize<br /> <br /> DotType Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360 x 720 5p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360 x 720 8p (White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 257<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 360 x 720 8p (High Opacity White) Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 257<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720 x 720 1bit 8p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 9p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 18p (W->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 18p (W)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 18p (White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 12p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x 1440 24p (W->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 16p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 32p (W->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 18p (High Opacity White ->CMYK)<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 18p (CMYK->White) 720 x 1080 18p (High Opacity CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> 720 x 1080 18p (High Opacity White)<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 24p (High Opacity White ->CMYK)<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 24p (CMYK->W) 720 x 1440 24p (High Opacity CMYK ->White)<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440 24p (W) 720 x 1440 24p (High Opacity White)<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 32p (High Opacity White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 32p (CMYK->W)<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 32p (High Opacity CMYK ->White)<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440 32p (W) 1440 x 1440 32p (High Opacity White)<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> Roland PRO II (FJ-SC-SJ Series 6 Color mode) Printmode<br /> <br /> Pass<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> 360x360<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 450x360<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 950<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360x720<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360x720<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x720<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720x1440<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 620<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720x1440<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1080x1080<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 520<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1440x1440<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Normal/Small<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> Roland RS Series (540, 640) Printmode<br /> <br /> DotSize<br /> <br /> DotType<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 540x360 3p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 540x360 4p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 540x720 5p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540x720 9p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 360x720 5p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 9p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 360x720 10p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 720x720 5p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 720x720 9p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720x720 6p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x720 10p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 5p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 6p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 9p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 10p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 1bit 10p<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 1bit 11p<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 33<br /> <br /> 1440x720 9p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 17p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 1440x720 18p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 1bit 17p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 1bit 18p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 12<br /> <br /> Roland SJ-1000 1045 Printmode<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern<br /> <br /> Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x360 1p<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x360<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 450x360<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 950<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x720 5p<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 4p<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x720 8p<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x720 9p<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x720 W-PASS<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x1440 9p<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 620<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 720x1440 8p<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 620<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x1440 W-PASS<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1080x1080<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 520<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 W-PASS<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 520<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 13<br /> <br /> Roland SP300 540 EcoSol Ink Printmode<br /> <br /> Pass<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> 360x720<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 360x720<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 720x720<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 720x720<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 720x1440<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 720x1440<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 1080x1080<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 1080x1080<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> Roland SP300 540 EcoSol Max Ink Printmode<br /> <br /> Pass<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> 360x720<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 720<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 360x720<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 720<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 720x720<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 500<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 720x720<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 720<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 720x1440<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 500<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 720x1440<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 720<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 1080x1080<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 500<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 1080x1080<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 720<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 14<br /> <br /> Roland VP-300 / VP-540 Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern<br /> <br /> Offset<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 540x360 3p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 540x360 4p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 540x720 5p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 540x720 9p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 360x720 5p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 360x720 9p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 360x720 6p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 360x720 10p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 720x720 6p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 720x720 10p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 720x720 1bit 6p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 720x720 1bit 10p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1080x1080 1bit 10p<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1080x1080 1bit 11p<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 33<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1440x720 16p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1440x720 17p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1440x720 18p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1440x1440 1bit 17p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1440x1440 1bit 18p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 540x360 2p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 540x720 4p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x720 4p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x720 8p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x1440 8p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x1440 16<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 9p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 18p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1440x720 8p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> Roland VS 640 CMYK Mode Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> DotType<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern<br /> <br /> Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x720 2p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 790<br /> <br /> 32<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x720 3p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 790<br /> <br /> 26<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 360x720 5p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540x720 5p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540x720 6p (A)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 540x720 6p (B)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 50<br /> <br /> 540x720 8p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 6p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p (A)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p (B)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 6p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x720 8p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 10p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 720x1440 16p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 20p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 720720 8p 1bit<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 9p 1bit<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p 1bit<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> Roland VS 640 CMYKLcLm / CMYKLcLmWMt Mode Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize DotType Headspeed Feedspeed Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p<br /> <br /> Variable 1<br /> <br /> 790<br /> <br /> 13<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 360x720 10p<br /> <br /> Variable 7<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540x720 10p<br /> <br /> Variable 7<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540x720 12p<br /> <br /> Variable 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 540x720 11p<br /> <br /> Variable 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 50<br /> <br /> 540x720 16p<br /> <br /> Variable 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p<br /> <br /> Variable 3<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (A)<br /> <br /> Variable 3<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (B)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (A)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (B)<br /> <br /> Variable 5<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 16p<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p (CMYKLcLmMt)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p (MetallicSilver)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (CMYKLcLmMt) (A)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (CMYKLcLmMt) (B)<br /> <br /> Variable 5<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (MetallicSilver)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p (White->CMYKLcLm) (A) Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 27<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p (White->CMYKLcLm) (B) Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p (CMYKLcLm->White)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 27<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (CMYKLcLm->White)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p (White)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (White->CMYKMt) (A)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (White->CMYKMt) (B)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (CMYKMt->White)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 1440x720 32p (CMYKMt->White)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720720 16p 1bit<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 18p 1bit<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p 1bit<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 17<br /> <br /> Roland XC (540) Printmode<br /> <br /> DotSize<br /> <br /> DotType Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x360 1bit 1p (A)<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x360 1bit 1p (B)<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> 360x360 2bit 1p (A)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x360 2bit 1p (B)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> 540x360 2p (A)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 28<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 540x360 2p (B)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 28<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> 540x360 2p+PASS<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 540x360 3P<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> 360x720 4p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x720 4P+PASS<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540x720 6p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 540x720 6P+PASS<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 26<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 8p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 8p+PASS<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p+PASS<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720x1440 8p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720x1440 8p+PASS<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 1bit 9p<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 1bit 9p+PASS<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 9p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 9p+PASS<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p+PASS<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> Roland XJ-540 640 740 Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> IPC<br /> <br /> Pattern<br /> <br /> Offset<br /> <br /> 360 x 360<br /> <br /> Fix large<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360 x 360<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 540 x 360<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 28<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 540 x 360<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 360 x 720<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360 x 720<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540 x 720<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 540 x 720<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 26<br /> <br /> 720 x 720<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720 x 720<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440<br /> <br /> Fix small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 19<br /> <br /> Application Notes Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> Recommended Print  Modes for Roland  Printers <br /> <br /> ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2011 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.<br /> <br /> The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> i<br /> <br /> Contents  Recommended Settings for Device Options / Roland IPC.........................................................................1  Empfohlene Einstellungen für Geräteoptionen / Roland IPC ...................................................................2  Roland FP-740.............................................................................................................................................................3  Roland LEC 300...........................................................................................................................................................4  Roland LEC 330 Eco-UV Ink (CMYKWGL) .........................................................................................................5  Roland LEC 330 Eco-UV Ink (CMYKGLGL) ........................................................................................................6  Roland LEC 330 Eco-UV Ink (CMYKWW) ..........................................................................................................7  Roland PRO II (FJ-SC-SJ Series 6 Color mode) ...............................................................................................8  Roland RS Series (540, 640) ...................................................................................................................................9  Roland SJ-1000 1045............................................................................................................................................. 10  Roland SP300 540 EcoSol Ink............................................................................................................................. 11  Roland SP300 540 EcoSol Max Ink ................................................................................................................... 11  Roland VP-300 / VP-540 ...................................................................................................................................... 12  Roland VS 640 CMYK Mode ............................................................................................................................... 13  Roland VS 640 CMYKLcLm / CMYKLcLmWMt Mode ................................................................................ 14  Roland XC (540)....................................................................................................................................................... 15  Roland XJ-540 640 740......................................................................................................................................... 16 <br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> ii<br /> <br /> Recommended Settings for Device Options / Roland IPC  With all the available settings and combinations in a Print Environment, it’s easy to lose track of the settings and their effect. Some settings work better together than others, but finding the best possible combination can be time consuming. Intelligent Pass Control (IPC) is a printer function originally developed by Roland for the XJseries of printers to reduce banding in printouts, bleeding of inks and hence improve the output image through intelligent use of the printer’s nozzles. Due to its success, IPC has later been implemented into many of Roland’s other printer models. To help users save time, Roland gives out recommendations which combinations of device settings including IPC should be used to achieve the best possible results with their printers. This document is meant to provide a listing of these settings for certain printer models that are currently supported in the ErgoSoft RIP programs. Apart from the resolution, all important settings are made in the Print Settings > Device Options dialog. The resolution can be set in the Print Settings > Quality dialog. IPC can be activated in the Device Options dialog of the print settings under the title IPC.<br /> <br /> We advise users explicitly to set the listed print settings according to the following tables for the respective printer.<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Empfohlene Einstellungen für Geräteoptionen / Roland IPC  Bei allen möglichen Einstellungen und Kombinationen in einer Druckumgebung ist es schnell möglich, den Überblick zu verlieren. Manche Einstellungen funktionieren besser miteinander als andere, doch die optimale Kombination zu finden braucht viel Zeit. Beim Intelligent Pass Control (IPC) handelt es sich um eine von Roland ursprünglich für die XJ Reihe von Druckern entwickelte Druckerfunktion, die durch intelligente Verwendung der einzelnen Nozzles Banding in Ausdrucken reduziert, “Bluten” der Farben verhindern soll und so das Druckbild verbessert. IPC wurde später in viele andere Roland-Drucker implementiert. Roland gibt klare Empfehlungen mit, welche Einstellungen mit welcher Auflösung verwendet werden sollten, um die besten Ergebnisse zu erzielen. Dieses Dokument enthält eine Auflistung dieser empfohlenen Einstellungen für einige Druckermodelle, die momentan vom ErgoSoft RIP unterstützt werden. Bis auf die Auflösung werden alle wichtigen Einstellungen im Dialog Druckeinstellungen > Geräteoptionen vorgenommen. Die Auflösung wird im Dialog Druckeinstellungen > Qualität eingestellt. Das IPC wird in den Druckeinstellungen im Reiter Geräteoptionen unter dem Titel IPC eingestellt.<br /> <br /> Wir empfehlen ausdrücklich, die aufgeführten Druckumgebungseinstellungen entsprechend der folgenden Tabellen einzustellen. Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Roland FP‐740  Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern<br /> <br /> Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x360 (2bit 1p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x360 (1bit 2p)<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x360 (2bit 2p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 930<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x360 +PASS (2p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 172<br /> <br /> 360x360 +PASS (3p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 930<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 115<br /> <br /> 540x360 +PASS (2p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 172<br /> <br /> 540x360 +PASS (3p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 115<br /> <br /> 540x360 +PASSv2 (4p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 172<br /> <br /> 360x720 (1bit 4p)<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x720 (1bit 8p)<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x720 (2bit 4p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 750<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x720 +PASS (4p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 910<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x720 (2bit 8p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x720 +PASS (5p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 910<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 69<br /> <br /> 540x720 (6p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 720<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 540x720 +PASS (7p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> 49<br /> <br /> 720x720 (1bit 8p)<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x720 (2bit 8p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 670<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720x720 +PASS (9p)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 740<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 39<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> Roland LEC 300  Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize DotType Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x720 9P<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 360x720 16P (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 129<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 360x720 9P (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 360x720 (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 360x720 (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720x720 17p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 720x720 32p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 129<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 32p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 129<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 32p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 129<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 17p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> 720x720 17p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> 720x720 17p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 17p<br /> <br /> Fix L<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 720x1440 17p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 720x1440 32p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 129<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x1440 32p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 129<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x1440 32p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 17p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> 720x1440 17p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> 720x1440 17p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 720x1440 (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 720x1440 (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Roland LEC 330 Eco‐UV Ink (CMYKWGL)  Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize DotType Headspeed Feedspeed Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x720 5P<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 8P (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 257<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p (CMYK->MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p (MatteVarnish->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360x720 5p (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p (CMYK>MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p (MatteVarnish->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 8p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (CMYK>MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 700<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (MatteVarnish>CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 700<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p (CMYK>MatteVarnish) Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p (MatteVarnish>CMYK) Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> Roland LEC 330 Eco‐UV Ink (CMYKGLGL)  Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize DotType Headspeed Feedspeed Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x720 5P<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p (CMYK->MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p (MatteVarnish->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360x720 5p (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p (CMYK>MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p (MatteVarnish->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 8p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (CMYK>MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (MatteVarnish>CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (GlossVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p (MatteVarnish)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p (CMYK>MatteVarnish) Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p (MatteVarnish>CMYK) Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> Roland LEC 330 Eco‐UV Ink (CMYKWW)  Printmode<br /> <br /> DotsizeDotType Headspeed Feedspeed Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x720 5P<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 8P (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 257<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 360x720 8P (High Opacity White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 257<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (High Opacity White>CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (High Opacity CMYK>White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (High Opacity White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 513<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 8p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 12p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (High Opacity White>CMYK)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (High Opacity CMYK>White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x1440 24p (High Opacity White)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 380<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (White->CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (High Opacity White>CMYK)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (CMYK->White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (High Opacity CMYK>White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 45<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p (High Opacity White)<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> Roland PRO II (FJ‐SC‐SJ Series 6 Color mode)  Printmode<br /> <br /> Pass<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> 360x360<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 450x360<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 950<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360x720<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 360x720<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720x720<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720x1440<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 620<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720x1440<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1080x1080<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 520<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1440x1440<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Normal/Small<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> Roland RS Series (540, 640)  Printmode<br /> <br /> DotSize<br /> <br /> DotType<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 540x360 3p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 540x360 4p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 540x720 5p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540x720 9p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 360x720 5p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 9p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 360x720 10p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 720x720 5p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 720x720 9p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720x720 6p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x720 10p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 5p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 6p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 9p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 10p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 1bit 10p<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 1bit 11p<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 33<br /> <br /> 1440x720 9p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 17p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 1440x720 18p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 1bit 17p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 1bit 18p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> Roland SJ‐1000 1045  Printmode<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern<br /> <br /> Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x360 1p<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x360<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 450x360<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 950<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x720 5p<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 360x720 4p<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x720 8p<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x720 9p<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x720 W-PASS<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x1440 9p<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 620<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 720x1440 8p<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 620<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x1440 W-PASS<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1080x1080<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 520<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 W-PASS<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 520<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> Roland SP300 540 EcoSol Ink  Printmode<br /> <br /> Pass<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> 360x720<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 360x720<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 720x720<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 720x720<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 720x1440<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 720x1440<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 1080x1080<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 1080x1080<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> Roland SP300 540 EcoSol Max Ink  Printmode<br /> <br /> Pass<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> 360x720<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 720<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 360x720<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 720<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> 720x720<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 500<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 720x720<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 720<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 720x1440<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 500<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 720x1440<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 720<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 1080x1080<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 500<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 1080x1080<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 720<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> Roland VP‐300 / VP‐540  Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern<br /> <br /> Offset<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 540x360 3p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 540x360 4p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 540x720 5p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 540x720 9p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 360x720 5p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 360x720 9p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 360x720 6p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 360x720 10p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 720x720 6p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 720x720 10p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 720x720 1bit 6p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 720x720 1bit 10p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1080x1080 1bit 10p<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1080x1080 1bit 11p<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 33<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1440x720 16p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1440x720 17p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1440x720 18p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1440x1440 1bit 17p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> [RIPC] 1440x1440 1bit 18p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 540x360 2p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 540x720 4p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x720 4p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x720 8p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x1440 8p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 720x1440 16<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 9p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 18p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1440x720 8p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 635<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 12<br /> <br /> Roland VS 640 CMYK Mode  Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> DotType<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern<br /> <br /> Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x720 2p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 790<br /> <br /> 32<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 360x720 3p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 790<br /> <br /> 26<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 360x720 5p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540x720 5p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540x720 6p (A)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 540x720 6p (B)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 50<br /> <br /> 540x720 8p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 6p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p (A)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p (B)<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 6p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x720 8p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 10p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 720x1440 16p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 20p<br /> <br /> Variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 720720 8p 1bit<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 9p 1bit<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p 1bit<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 13<br /> <br /> Roland VS 640 CMYKLcLm / CMYKLcLmWMt Mode  Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize DotType Headspeed Feedspeed Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x720 6p<br /> <br /> Variable 1<br /> <br /> 790<br /> <br /> 13<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 360x720 10p<br /> <br /> Variable 7<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540x720 10p<br /> <br /> Variable 7<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540x720 12p<br /> <br /> Variable 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 540x720 11p<br /> <br /> Variable 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 50<br /> <br /> 540x720 16p<br /> <br /> Variable 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p<br /> <br /> Variable 3<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (A)<br /> <br /> Variable 3<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x720 16p (B)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (A)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (B)<br /> <br /> Variable 5<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 720x1440 16p<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p (CMYKLcLmMt)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p (MetallicSilver)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (CMYKLcLmMt) (A)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (CMYKLcLmMt) (B)<br /> <br /> Variable 5<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (MetallicSilver)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 90<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p (White->CMYKLcLm) (A) Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 27<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p (White->CMYKLcLm) (B) Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p (CMYKLcLm->White)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 27<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (CMYKLcLm->White)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1440x720 12p (White)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 400<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (White->CMYKMt) (A)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (White->CMYKMt) (B)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1440x720 16p (CMYKMt->White)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 40<br /> <br /> 1440x720 32p (CMYKMt->White)<br /> <br /> Variable 4<br /> <br /> 304<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 720720 16p 1bit<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 18p 1bit<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 32p 1bit<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 800<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> OFF<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 14<br /> <br /> Roland XC (540)  Printmode<br /> <br /> DotSize<br /> <br /> DotType Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> Pattern Overlap<br /> <br /> 360x360 1bit 1p (A)<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x360 1bit 1p (B)<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> 360x360 2bit 1p (A)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x360 2bit 1p (B)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> 540x360 2p (A)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 28<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 540x360 2p (B)<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 28<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> 540x360 2p+PASS<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 540x360 3P<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> -<br /> <br /> 360x720 4p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360x720 4P+PASS<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540x720 6p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 540x720 6P+PASS<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 26<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 8p<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720x720 1bit 8p+PASS<br /> <br /> Large<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720x720 8p+PASS<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720x1440 8p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720x1440 8p+PASS<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 1bit 9p<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 1bit 9p+PASS<br /> <br /> Medium<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 9p<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1080x1080 9p+PASS<br /> <br /> Var<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 18<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1440x1440 16p+PASS<br /> <br /> Small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 15<br /> <br /> Roland XJ‐540 640 740  Printmode<br /> <br /> Dotsize<br /> <br /> Dottype<br /> <br /> Headspeed<br /> <br /> Feedspeed<br /> <br /> IPC<br /> <br /> Pattern<br /> <br /> Offset<br /> <br /> 360 x 360<br /> <br /> Fix large<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360 x 360<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 723<br /> <br /> 30<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 540 x 360<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 28<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 540 x 360<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 964<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 60<br /> <br /> 360 x 720<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 360 x 720<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 36<br /> <br /> 540 x 720<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 540 x 720<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 26<br /> <br /> 720 x 720<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 720 x 720<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1000<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 720 x 1440<br /> <br /> variable<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 20<br /> <br /> 1440 x 1440<br /> <br /> Fix small<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 760<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> On<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> Recommended Print Modes for Roland Printers<br /> <br /> 16<br /> <br /> Application Notes Cutting with Fotoba Cutters<br /> <br /> Cutting with Fotoba  Cutters <br /> <br /> ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2010 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.<br /> <br /> The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1<br /> <br /> Cutting with Fotoba Cutters<br /> <br /> i<br /> <br /> Contents  Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1  Configuring for Fotoba Digitrim Cutters ..........................................................................................................2  Configuring for Fotoba Rollcut Cutters .............................................................................................................3  Basic settings .........................................................................................................................................................3  Printing one Copy of a Job or Copies with Gap between the Copies .............................................4  Printing several Copies of a Job without Gap ...........................................................................................5  Creating the Maintenance Job..................................................................................................................5  Using the Maintenance Job .......................................................................................................................6  Configuring for Fotoba XL… Cutters ..................................................................................................................8  Configuring the Cut Environment .................................................................................................................8  Sample Printout ....................................................................................................................................................9 <br /> <br /> Cutting with Fotoba Cutters<br /> <br /> ii<br /> <br /> Introduction  The Fotoba cutters that are supported in the ErgoSoft RIP are not designed to be used for contour cutting but for cutting images from a job using just horizontal and vertical cut lines. This type of cutting needs some special preparation and configuration that are quite different from the preparation and configuration needed for contour cutting. The Fotoba Cut Marks function of the ErgoSoft RIP supports three different types of cut mark configuration: Horizontal and vertical double lines around images needed e.g. for Fotoba Digitrim cutters. Double lines above and below the images needed e.g. for Fotoba Rollcut cutters. Double lines above and below the images as well as one line along the job needed e.g. for Fotoba XL… cutters.<br /> <br /> Cutting with Fotoba Cutters<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Configuring for Fotoba Digitrim Cutters  In order to activate the Fotoba cut marks in the job, the activation and configuration of the marks must be done before the images are imported into the ErgoSoft RIP. Please note that the setting cannot be changed for already imported images. To configure Fotoba cut marks, select menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Job > Extras. 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> In the section Fotoba, check Print Cut Marks to activate automatic printing of Fotoba cut marks. 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> In the list Mode, select 4 strips.<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Specify the thickness of the different strip parts: Outer White Inner White<br /> <br /> Black<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 3 4 5<br /> <br /> Black<br /> <br /> Outer White<br /> <br /> Specify the CMYK values for printing the black color of the “black” strips by clicking the “….” button. By default, the black is mixed using black ink only. If needed, you can add colored ink to get a darker, brighter black. 5<br /> <br /> Import the image(s). The needed strips are automatically added to the images. Please note that the Fotoba cut marks cannot be used together with print marks; print marks are automatically deactivated when Fotoba cut marks are activated. 6<br /> <br /> Cutting with Fotoba Cutters<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Configuring for Fotoba Rollcut Cutters  In order to activate the Fotoba cut marks, the activation and configuration of the marks must be done before the images are imported into the ErgoSoft RIP. Please note that the setting cannot be changed for already imported images.<br /> <br /> Basic settings  To configure Fotoba cut marks, select menu Tools > Options > Preferences > Job > Extras. 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> In the section Fotoba, check Print Cut Marks to activate automatic printing of Fotoba cut marks. 2<br /> <br /> In the list Mode, select 1 strip or 2 strips depending on your printing workflow. The different workflows are explained below. 3<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 3 5<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Specify the thickness of the different strip parts:<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> Outer White Inner White<br /> <br /> Black Black<br /> <br /> Outer White Excess Right<br /> <br /> Excess Left<br /> <br /> Use values Excess Left and Excess Right according to the figure above to configure an automatic left and right margin to the image in order to consider the position of the knifes cutting vertically (in the direction of media movement). 5<br /> <br /> Specify the CMYK values for printing the black color of the “black” strips by clicking the “….” button. By default, the black is mixed using black ink only. If needed, you can add colored ink to get a darker, brighter black. 6<br /> <br /> Cutting with Fotoba Cutters<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> Import the image(s). The needed strips are automatically added to the images. Please note that the Fotoba cut marks cannot be used together with print marks; print marks are automatically deactivated when Fotoba cut marks are activated. 7<br /> <br /> Printing one Copy of a Job or Copies with Gap between the Copies  When one copy of a job or several copies of a job with a gap between the copies are printed, each job must end with a Fotoba cut mark. Thus, you have to select 2 strips for Mode in the configuration of the Fotoba cut marks (see point 3 in the chapter about basic settings).<br /> <br /> Cutting with Fotoba Cutters<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Printing several Copies of a Job without Gap  When selecting the without Gap function in the Print dialog for printing more than one copy of a job, the copies of the jobs are printed one below the other without feeding the media at the end of a job. This printing method requires that the Fotoba cut mark at the end of the job is not printed; otherwise there will be 2 Fotoba cut marks between two jobs. Thus, you have to select 1 strip for Mode in the configuration of the Fotoba cut marks (see point 3 in the chapter about basic settings). To automatically add the missing Fotoba cut mark at the end of the printout we recommend using the Maintenance Job function of the Print Client as described in the next chapters. Please note that this method requires that there is no media feed at the end of the job. Please note that the availability of the without Gap function may depend on your licensed package of the ErgoSoft RIP.<br /> <br /> Creating the Maintenance Job  The maintenance job needs to add the missing Fotoba cut mark at the end of the “copies without gap” printout. Thus, the job used for this purpose must hold the missing Fotoba cut mark over complete media width. 1<br /> <br /> Create a new job with the same settings for the Fotoba cut mark as for the “copies without gap” job (1 strip for Mode) being selected.<br /> <br /> Add a wide but low rectangle of any color (e.g. white). This rectangle can be created in any image processing software and scaled (without keeping the proportions) to the needed size. Or you can use the Add Job Element function and select Gradient Rectangle to create this rectangle directly in the job. 2<br /> <br /> Print this job to the Print Client with options Keep Rip Data after Printing and Suspend Printing being checked in the Print dialog. 3<br /> <br /> Before manually starting the print process, copy the spool file of this job (*.ppl) from the spool folder of the used Print Client to another folder so that it will not be removed when the job is sent to the printer. 4<br /> <br /> Cutting with Fotoba Cutters<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> Using the Maintenance Job  The usage of the Maintenance Job must be set up in the Print Client in which it should be used. 1<br /> <br /> Set the Print Client to offline by clicking the offline icon.<br /> <br /> Click the Maintenance Job 2 icon to launch the maintenance jobs configuration dialog.<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> Click the Add icon to add a new maintenance job.<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Click the Browse icon (…) to select a maintenance job for adding and configuration.<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2 3 3 4<br /> <br /> To use a job that has been printed to the Print Client as maintenance job, select file type Print Client Job (*.ppl) from the list, open the folder in which you saved the job and select the job. Click Open to load the job into the dialog for maintenance job configuration. 5<br /> <br /> When the job is loaded into the Configure Maintenance Job dialog, you have to set the Scheduling Method. To add the Fotoba cut marks at the end of each Print Client job (which can have several copies), check After having Printed 1 Job(s). This will send the maintenance job after each job sent from the Print Client. Click OK to finish the configuration.<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> At last, the maintenance job must be activated by clicking the box at the left side of the job in the list to check it. Maintenance jobs that are in the list but not checked, are not activated and will not be automatically sent to the printer. 7<br /> <br /> Cutting with Fotoba Cutters<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> Close the maintenance jobs list by clicking the “x” in the upper right corner of the dialog frame. Hint: When you do not want to automatically print Fotoba cut marks after each job you may add the maintenance job to the list but do not activate it. Just, when needed, open the maintenance jobs list, select the job and click the Send Now button. Please note that this method requires that there is no media feed at the end of the job.<br /> <br /> Cutting with Fotoba Cutters<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> Configuring for Fotoba XL… Cutters  Basically, Fotoba XL… cutters work as already described for Fotoba Rollcut cutters. All configurations and workflows that are described above for configuring Fotoba Rollcut cutters are also valid for Fotoba XL… cutters and must be done. In addition to Fotoba Rollcut cutters, Fotoba XL… cutters need a certain line being printed along the job. This can be done automatically by activating contour cutting using a certain driver.<br /> <br /> Configuring the Cut Environment  1<br /> <br /> Activate the Cut Environments toolbar by selecting command View > Tools > Cut Environments.<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Add a cut environment based on drivers “*Fotoba XL” (available in newer versions of the ErgoSoft RIP) or “*Fabricut”.<br /> <br /> Since the cut environment is only needed to automatically create the cut line along the job side and not for contour cutting, you do not need to configure it for output. Just the configuration for the cut line must be done on the Extended tab. 3<br /> <br /> Set the border needed around the job. Please note, that normally, you do not need to modify the default settings.<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 5 6<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Set the width of the cut line that is printed along the left side of the job. 5<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> Set the distance between the job and the cut line.<br /> <br /> Cutting with Fotoba Cutters<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> Sample Printout  A printout for Fotoba XL… cutters should look like the following sample:<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> 4 5<br /> <br /> Cutting with Fotoba Cutters<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> Application Notes $POUPVS$VUUJOHXJUI ;VFOE$VU$FOUFS<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> ErgoSoft AG Moosgrabenstr. 13 CH-8595 Altnau, Switzerland © 2012 ErgoSoft AG, All rights reserved. The information contained in this manual is based on information available at the time of publication and is subject to change without notice. Accuracy and completeness are not warranted or guaranteed. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, without the expressed written permission of ErgoSoft AG. Brand or product names are trademarks of their respective holders.<br /> <br /> The ErgoSoft RIP is available in different editions. Therefore the description of available features in this document does not necessarily reflect the license details of your edition of the ErgoSoft RIP. For information on the features included in your edition of the ErgoSoft RIPs refer to the ErgoSoft homepage or contact your dealer. Rev. 1.1<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> i<br /> <br /> Contents Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................1 Creating/Importing Cut Environment ................................................................................................................1 Cut Environments Dialog ..................................................................................................................................1 Cut Environments Settings ...............................................................................................................................2 Quality Tab .......................................................................................................................................................2 Cutter Device Tab ..........................................................................................................................................2 Extended Tab ...................................................................................................................................................3 Production Tab ...............................................................................................................................................4 General Tab ......................................................................................................................................................4 Device Options Tab .......................................................................................................................................5 Creating a Cut Job .....................................................................................................................................................6 Activating Contour Cutting ..............................................................................................................................6 Importing Image ..................................................................................................................................................6 Preparing the Image in the Design Program ......................................................................................6 Importing Image ............................................................................................................................................7 Editing Job ..............................................................................................................................................................7 Setting Registration Marks Manually ...........................................................................................................8 Printing a Cut Job ......................................................................................................................................................9 Cutting the Job ...........................................................................................................................................................9 Specifying the Cut Paths ................................................................................................................................ 10 Selecting the Cut Paths .................................................................................................................................. 11 Displaying the Cut Paths ................................................................................................................................ 12 Starting the Contour Cutting ....................................................................................................................... 12<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> ii<br /> <br /> Introduction This document is meant to give you all needed information about cutting with the Zuend Cut Center. Please read this document carefully to make sure, that you can take the best possible benefit of using the ErgoSoft Cut function.<br /> <br /> Creating/Importing Cut Environment For easier access on the cutting functions we recommend to activate the Cut Environment tool bar via menu View > Tools > Cut Environment. Please note that you should save the workspace in order to restore the changes next time the workspace is loaded after starting the ErgoSoft RIP or having switched to another workspace.<br /> <br /> Cut Environments Dialog Open the Cut environments dialog by clicking on the Cut Environments Icon in the Cut Environment toolbar or by selecting menu Tools > Cut Environments. 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> Select Add to open the Add Contour Cut Environment 1 dialog. The list shown here contains all manufacturers of which a cutting device is supported. To select a specific device driver, please click on the 2 “+“ in front of the particular manufacturer to display the list of the devices. Select the device driver *Zuend Cut Center and enter a Name for the cut environment. Confirm the driver selection by clicking the OK button. 2<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> Cut Environments Settings Now the Quality tab of the new cut environment is displayed. Please find a description of the available and required settings in the following.<br /> <br /> Quality Tab In the Quality tab you can set the Speed, Pressure and Accuracy for the cutter. If you uncheck the checkboxes for speed and pressure, these settings will be controlled by the device itself. The accuracy specifies the number of points a curve is build with. The higher the accuracy the more points and the smaller the steps will be with cost of speed; the lower the accuracy the less points and the longer the steps will be with cost of smoothness, curve may have unwanted edges. Please note that all settings can be changed for each cut path in the cut path settings while just speed and pressure can be changed in the Cut Client.<br /> <br /> Cutter Device Tab The Cutter Device tab allows you to set up a configuration file which contains all the needed information to send data to your cutter. These settings can be loaded whenever you create a new cut environment for this cutter. Create Cutter Configuration File To specify the required information such as the port used as well as port settings, create a new configuration file by clicking the New button. Once you have created a cut environment, you can edit, delete or rename the configuration file using the respective buttons. 1<br /> <br /> Specify Cutter Port Since the Zuend Cut Center comes with its own data transfer of plot files to the cutting plotter, the ErgoSoft RIP does not need to assign a physical port but just a folder in which the plot data is saved.<br /> <br /> 1 1<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> 2 3<br /> <br /> Specify Folder for Spool Files Set up a spool folder in which the plot data for the Zuend Cut Center is saved. 3<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> 2<br /> <br /> When having several systems to prepare cut files for the same cutting plotter, assigning a different StationId to each system will prevent having accidentally printouts from 2 systems with the same barcode. Since the StationId is part of the barcode, barcodes from 2 systems with different StationIds will be different any time. 4<br /> <br /> Extended Tab The Extended tab allows you to control several settings for the cutting and cutting marks configuration. The drivers provided by ErgoSoft do already contain the correct settings for the selected devices. Therefore these settings should be handled with caution. The Border settings define the size of the borders used for a job which should also be cut. The drivers provided by ErgoSoft do already contain the correct settings for the selected devices. 1<br /> <br /> Section Scale allows you to do a manual distortion correction. This option is only available for cutters which do not have an automatic distortion correction. 2<br /> <br /> 1 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> Section Marks allows you to specify the size of the cut marks and the distance between the cut marks and the image or job as well as the distance between cut marks for frequently printing cut marks in order to increase cutting accuracy. 3<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> Production Tab The Production tab allows some settings useful for the production itself. By default, the cutter will cut the complete job in one step. This means that the media will be moved forwards and backwards over the complete job length. Checking Use Paneling and entering a Panel Size will split the job into panels so that the media must be moved forward and backward just over the panel size. When all lines in the first panel are cut, the media will be moved forward to cut the lines in the next panel. Paneling can also be set (but not deactivated) for each cut paths. Thus, when needing some cut paths with and some without paneling, we recommend to specify the paneling in the cut path settings. Check Cut in Reversed Order to start cutting at the end of a stack of printed jobs instead of at the beginning. This option might be useful for many jobs printed on media already rolled to avoid moving the media back at the beginning of the job.<br /> <br /> General Tab The General tab allows modifying the name or the description of the cut environment. It also shows the basic cut driver the cut environment is based on.<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> Device Options Tab The Device Options tab allows configuring some settings of the cutting plotter itself. Enter the IP address and port of the computer on which the Zuend Cut Center software is installed. When the Zuend Cut Center is installed on the same computer as the ErgoSoft RIP software you do not need to change the default setting which is the local IP address. 1<br /> <br /> When the connection to the 2 Zuend Cut Center software is establish you can get a list of installed media types from the Zuend Cut Center to select the media type that you want to cut. 3<br /> <br /> 1 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 4<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> Configure the barcode according to your preferences.<br /> <br /> Configure the Registration Marks according to your cutting plotter and your preferences. Please note that the driver also offers the possibility to manually set registration marks in the ErgoSoft RIP. For more information, please refer to the chapter “Setting Registration Marks Manually”. 4<br /> <br /> Normally, curves are split into lines so that a curve is represented by many short lines. When your cutting plotter supports curves, you may uncheck Split curves into lines so that real curves are to be cut. 5<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> Creating a Cut Job Activating Contour Cutting In order to create a cut job and to use the selected cut environment, you have to activate contour cutting. You can do that by clicking the Contour Cut icon in the Cut Environment toolbar. The required borders for the cut marks are automatically added to the media borders so that the available job width might be less. Please note that the job width will be limited to the smaller value of maximum job width supported by the printer and the maximum job width supported by the cutter.<br /> <br /> Importing Image Preparing the Image in the Design Program Use a suitable design program such as CorelDraw, Photoshop, Illustrator, or FreeHand to create the cutting paths in the original image, making sure the cutting curve will be able to cut the image later. You have several possibilities to define your cut path: Path in CMYK, Clipping Path, or Spot Color Path with the possibility to not print it. When designing a CMYK path please keep in mind that it will be also printed and thus, should have a color that is not visible in the printout.<br /> <br /> CutSample 1: Photoshop Clippath<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> CutSample 2: rectangle with CMYK path in 100% black star with Spot Color outline “Star” polygon with Spot Color outline “Polygon”<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> When saving the file as EPS or PDF you have to take care that the cutting paths are not converted. The following example shows the settings for Illustrator CS3/CS4 when saving as EPS or PDF file. The relevant setting is hidden in the “Transparency” section of the EPS saving options as well as in the “Advanced” tab of the PDF (1.3) saving options:<br /> <br /> Take care that “Convert All Strokes to Outlines” is not checked to prevent the contours being converted into fill paths.<br /> <br /> Importing Image You can import the image to be cut as all other images.<br /> <br /> Editing Job You can edit your images in the job as usual. You can rotate, tile, crop, duplicate, mirror etc. in the same way as for none cut jobs.<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> Setting Registration Marks Manually The Zuend Cut Center allows setting the cut marks manually. The ErgoSoft RIP offer this manual cut mark positioning in addition to automatic positioning of cut marks which is configured in the cut environment. Manual cut mark positioning can be done for the selected image by selecting Cut Mark Position from the image context menu that is displayed when you click the right mouse button on the image.<br /> <br /> Set the marks by clicking the position in the preview window. Remove a mark by clicking on it in the preview window. 1<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> To remove all cut 2 marks you can click the Clear button instead of removing each mark manually. 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> The complete list of marks can be saved and loaded for another image needing the same marks.<br /> <br /> Please note that defining the marks manually for one image in a job will discard automatic mark creation during printing; you have to set the marks manually for all other images in the job, too.<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> 8<br /> <br /> Printing a Cut Job Once you have finished the layout of your job, you can print the job on your printer. But before you print your job it is necessary to decide how the cutting of the job should be processed; you have to specify and select the cut paths. Since the plot files for Zuend Cut Center must be saved in a folder instead of sending them directly to the port, the cut file is created automatically directly after having ripped the print job. In addition, cutting can also be started manually.<br /> <br /> Cutting the Job When the job is printed, the plot file is created automatically and saved in folder that is configured in the cut environment. In addition, the cut job can also be started manually: Click the Cut icon in the Standard toolbar or select menu File > Cut. The configuration of the cut paths is identical in both cases. In the appearing dialog you can specify which paths should be used as cut path.<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> 9<br /> <br /> Specifying the Cut Paths To set up the desired path click the New or Edit button. This opens the dialog in which you specify the cut path settings. Tabs Quality and Paneling (which is only available when paneling is not 1 a activated in the cut environment) allow overwriting the settings of the cut en2 vironment for the current cut path so that e.g. one cut path can be configured with paneling while all other cut paths do not use 1 c paneling. The devicedependent tab Cutting Tool allows selecting the cutting tool for the path. 4 The path settings for the samples shown above are as follows: 6 (a) CMYK path named “100% Black” (b) Clip path named “Photoshop Clip Path” (c) Spot color path named “Star” (d) Spot color path named “Polygon” 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> b<br /> <br /> 1<br /> <br /> d<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> 7<br /> <br /> 5<br /> <br /> The color for the CMYK path can be selected using the color selection window opening when clicking the button at the right side. Checking Also cut fill paths will not only cut stroke paths with the specified color but also fill paths. To avoid problems this option should be checked (or unchecked) when the visual path check does not show the correct preview. 2<br /> <br /> 3<br /> <br /> When having defined a clipping path (e.g. Photoshop Clipping Path) in your image, you have to select Clip paths.<br /> <br /> When selecting All paths, all paths which can be found in the image will be cut. This option is meant to be used for finding out whether the ErgoSoft RIP can find any cut path in the image when the wanted path is not cut. 4<br /> <br /> When having defined a cut path using a spot color, select Spot Color and enter the name of the spot color. When you want to cut several spot colors in one path, you may separate them by semicolons, e.g. “star;polygon”. Spot color paths is the only colored path type that must not be printed. 5<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> 10<br /> <br /> 6<br /> <br /> Activating Cut Image Borders will cut the image borders. This option is also available without any other cut path selection.<br /> <br /> For each cutting path, the tab Cutting Tool allows configuring the tool that has to be used for cutting the path. When your cutting plotter offers several tools, you may select different tools in the same cut job by configuring different cut paths and selecting them as described below. 7<br /> <br /> Selecting the Cut Paths After having specified the cut paths the paths to be actually cut must be selected. Paths can be added to the list and removed from the list. Use the arrow buttons to change the order in which the paths are cut. To add a path, just click the Add icon, select the path in the list Passes and then select the configuration from the list Path Settings. Use the same method to change the configuration of a path.<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> 11<br /> <br /> Displaying the Cut Paths Before you send the cut command you can display the cut path. Therefore click on the View button in the Contour Cut dialog. In the appearing Display cut path dialog you can see the paths which will be used as cut paths. When having selected several cut paths clicking the View button while the preview window is open will scroll through the paths displaying the previews of the paths one after the other.<br /> <br /> Starting the Contour Cutting To start the cut process and send the cut command, click the Start button. Your job will now be cut according to the defined settings.<br /> <br /> Contour Cutting with Zuend Cut Center<br /> <br /> 12<br /> <br /> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> <div class="row hidden-xs"> <div class="col-md-12"> <div class="panel panel-info"> <div class="panel-heading"> <h4 class="text-center panel-title">Suggest Documents</h4> </div> <div class="panel-body"> <div class="latest-news list-style"> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-2012-leadership-training-manual-louisiana-tech-university.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/2012-leadership-training-manual-louisiana-tech-uni_5a37d255d64ab24bdf9f4bf7.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-2012-leadership-training-manual-louisiana-tech-university.html">2012 Leadership Training Manual - Louisiana Tech University</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-health-training-manual-volume-1-spell.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/technical-health-training-manual-volume-1-spell_5c3cbcb7097c47c4338b457f.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-health-training-manual-volume-1-spell.html">Technical Health Training Manual - Volume 1 - spell</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-competencies-dag-tech.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/technical-competencies-dag-tech_5ad678add64ab202631220e4.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-competencies-dag-tech.html">Technical Competencies - DAG Tech</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-training-midea-cac.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/technical-training-midea-cac_5ad3987ed64ab2cee4c3b7a0.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-training-midea-cac.html">Technical Training - Midea CAC</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-bulls-tech-support-company.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/technical-bulls-tech-support-company_5aa5b2edd64ab2ccf7e6fc30.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-bulls-tech-support-company.html">Technical Bulls - Tech Support Company</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-citroen-technical-training-pdf.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/citroen-technical-training-pdf_5a57b7ead64ab202ebfb1bd8.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-citroen-technical-training-pdf.html">Citroen technical training pdf</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-sct-banner-technical-student-technical-training-workbook.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/sct-banner-technical-student-technical-training-wo_5ad35825d64ab27acda1e9b8.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-sct-banner-technical-student-technical-training-workbook.html">SCT Banner Technical Student Technical Training Workbook</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-training-program-dcaa-technical-training-amt-garageforum.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/training-program-dcaa-technical-training-amt-garag_5a312cedd64ab270617bd89b.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-training-program-dcaa-technical-training-amt-garageforum.html">Training Program DCAA Technical Training - AMT GarageForum</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-ebook-nrc-technical-training-center-reactor-concepts-manual-.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/ebook-nrc-technical-training-center-reactor-concep_5a63cacfd64ab2eb6f2004c5.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-ebook-nrc-technical-training-center-reactor-concepts-manual-.html">Ebook Nrc Technical Training Center Reactor Concepts Manual</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-11296.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/ebook-nrc-technical-training-center-reactor-concep_5a63cfbcd64ab2e96f0817f3.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-11296.html">Ebook Nrc Technical Training Center Reactor Concepts Manual</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-solar-photovoltaic-systems-technical-training-manual-unesdoc-unesco.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/solar-photovoltaic-systems-technical-training-manu_5a363525d64ab2f649b04126.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-solar-photovoltaic-systems-technical-training-manual-unesdoc-unesco.html">Solar photovoltaic systems technical training manual - unesdoc - Unesco</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-solar-training-manual-basic-design-and-macsen-pv.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/technical-solar-training-manual-basic-design-and-m_5a3c8a98d64ab238e0316fdb.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-solar-training-manual-basic-design-and-macsen-pv.html">Technical solar training manual Basic design and - macsen-pv</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-tech-sem-manual-iceweb.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/tech-sem-manual-iceweb_5a427dc3d64ab23efbd3bbf4.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-tech-sem-manual-iceweb.html">Tech Sem. Manual - ICEWeb</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-87599.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/ebook-nrc-technical-training-center-reactor-concep_5a63cef7d64ab2eb6f2004e2.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-87599.html">Ebook Nrc Technical Training Center Reactor Concepts Manual</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-ultimate-tech-manual-dphhs.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/ultimate-tech-manual-dphhs_5c616731097c4764338b4570.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-ultimate-tech-manual-dphhs.html">Ultimate Tech Manual - DPHHS</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-hvac-hvac-tech-hvac-tech-hvac-technical-institute.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/hvac-hvac-tech-hvac-tech-hvac-technical-institute_5ad9c2f37f8b9a586c8b456d.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-hvac-hvac-tech-hvac-tech-hvac-technical-institute.html">HVAC - HVAC Tech HVAC Tech - HVAC Technical Institute</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-apple-technical-support-tech-customer-service-d7e3b8bc0462b7f3fc3ce003a39c4762.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/apple-technical-support-tech-customer-service_5b2df34ed64ab27b08fcb153.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-apple-technical-support-tech-customer-service-d7e3b8bc0462b7f3fc3ce003a39c4762.html">Apple technical support | Tech | customer service</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-electro-technical-certificate-hi-tech-calibration-services.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/electro-technical-certificate-hi-tech-calibration-_5c5dfa95097c47a7248b4576.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-electro-technical-certificate-hi-tech-calibration-services.html">Electro - Technical Certificate - Hi Tech Calibration Services</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-the-importance-of-technical-competencies-virginia-tech.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/the-importance-of-technical-competencies-virginia-_5ad6689ad64ab2e757b8b5c2.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-the-importance-of-technical-competencies-virginia-tech.html">THE IMPORTANCE OF TECHNICAL COMPETENCIES - Virginia Tech</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-manual-matramatic-matparts.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/technical-manual-matramatic-matparts_5a4ce44ad64ab26c5eec17b4.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-manual-matramatic-matparts.html">Technical Manual Matramatic - Matparts</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-manual-femagov.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/technical-manual-femagov_5a4337e6d64ab216faf65820.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-manual-femagov.html">Technical Manual - FEMA.gov</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-manual-odyssey-battery.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/technical-manual-odyssey-battery_5b094bc28ead0ebf1a8b459d.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-manual-odyssey-battery.html">Technical Manual - ODYSSEY battery</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-the-acta-technical-manual.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/the-acta-technical-manual_5a467ad1d64ab2782c10f0c5.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-the-acta-technical-manual.html">The ACT® Technical Manual</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-precast-technical-manual-meadowburkea.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/precast-technical-manual-meadowburkea_5ad436b1d64ab236d61d5888.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-precast-technical-manual-meadowburkea.html">Precast Technical Manual MeadowBurke®</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-assessa-technical-manual.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/assessa-technical-manual_5ad444bfd64ab2ddda281930.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-assessa-technical-manual.html">Assess™ Technical Manual</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-manual-siemens-canada.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/technical-manual-siemens-canada_5a3eb6afd64ab2442a9a05d2.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-manual-siemens-canada.html">Technical Manual - Siemens Canada</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-manual-csr-hebel.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/technical-manual-csr-hebel_5c61ac61097c4736568b45a2.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-manual-csr-hebel.html">Technical Manual - CSR Hebel</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-data-manual-viessmann.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/technical-data-manual-viessmann_5a4ce25cd64ab26e5ea38d05.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-data-manual-viessmann.html">Technical Data Manual - Viessmann</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-star-readinga-technical-manual.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/star-readinga-technical-manual_5a6a8c83d64ab21d3770063a.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-star-readinga-technical-manual.html">STAR Reading™ Technical Manual</a> </h3> </div> <div class="item col-md-3 col-xs-6"> <div class="image"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-manual-ursource.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/250x250/technical-manual-ursource_5c619f97097c471e058b4586.jpg" alt="" /> </a> </div> <h3 class="title"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-manual-ursource.html">Technical Manual - ursource</a> </h3> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> <div class="col-lg-3 col-md-4 col-xs-12"> <!-- Composite Start --> <div id="M315023ScriptRootC207885"> <div id="M315023PreloadC207885"> Loading... </div> </div> <!-- Composite End --> <div class="panel-meta panel panel-success"> <div class="panel-heading"> <h2 class="text-center panel-title">Technical Training Manual - ergosoft tech</h2> </div> <div class="panel-body"> <div class="row"> <div class="col-md-12"> Technical Training Manual ErgoSoft RIP Solutions www.ergosoft.net S1 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Linearization and Profiling Section 3- Image Contro... </div> <div class="col-md-12"> <div class="doc"> <hr /> <div class="download-button" style="margin-right: 3px; margin-bottom: 6px;"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/download/technical-training-manual-ergosoft-tech_5a496dbfd64ab2d39d9416c3.html" class="btn btn-success btn-block"><i class="fa fa-cloud-download"></i> Download PDF </a> </div> <div class="share-box pull-left" style="margin-right: 3px;"> <!-- Google+ --> <a href="http://plus.google.com/share?url=http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-training-manual-ergosoft-tech.html" target="_blank" class="btn btn-social-icon btn-google"> <i class="fa fa-google"></i> </a> <!-- Twitter --> <a href="http://www.linkedin.com/shareArticle?mini=true&url=http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-training-manual-ergosoft-tech.html" target="_blank" class="btn btn-social-icon btn-twitter"> <i class="fa fa-twitter"></i> </a> </div> <div class="clearfix"></div> <div class="row"> <div class="col-md-12" style="margin-top: 6px;"> <span class="btn pull-left" style="padding-left: 0;"><i class="fa fa-file-pdf-o"></i> 36MB Sizes</span> <span class="btn pull-left" style="padding-left: 0;"><i class="fa fa-download"></i> 0 Downloads</span> <span class="btn pull-left" style="padding-left: 0;"><i class="fa fa-eye"></i> 47 Views</span> </div> </div> <div class="clearfix"></div> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> <div class="panel panel-recommend panel-primary"> <div class="panel-heading"> <h4 class="text-center panel-title">Recommend Documents</h4> </div> <div class="panel-body"> <div class="row m-0"> <div class="col-md-3 col-xs-3 pl-0 text-center"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-2012-leadership-training-manual-louisiana-tech-university.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/60x80/2012-leadership-training-manual-louisiana-tech-uni_5a37d255d64ab24bdf9f4bf7.jpg" alt="" width="100%" /> </a> </div> <div class="col-md-9 col-xs-9 p-0"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-2012-leadership-training-manual-louisiana-tech-university.html"> 2012 Leadership Training Manual - Louisiana Tech University </a> <div class="doc-meta"> <div class="doc-desc">Hula Hut Relay and Stepping Stones are the key team-building challenges used to accomplish this. Other activities such a</div> </div> </div> <div class="clearfix"></div> <hr class="mt-15 mb-15" /> </div> <div class="row m-0"> <div class="col-md-3 col-xs-3 pl-0 text-center"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-health-training-manual-volume-1-spell.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/60x80/technical-health-training-manual-volume-1-spell_5c3cbcb7097c47c4338b457f.jpg" alt="" width="100%" /> </a> </div> <div class="col-md-9 col-xs-9 p-0"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-health-training-manual-volume-1-spell.html"> Technical Health Training Manual - Volume 1 - spell </a> <div class="doc-meta"> <div class="doc-desc">cultural/development training, the sessions in this manual include frequent cross .... discussion of a picture because p</div> </div> </div> <div class="clearfix"></div> <hr class="mt-15 mb-15" /> </div> <div class="row m-0"> <div class="col-md-3 col-xs-3 pl-0 text-center"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-competencies-dag-tech.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/60x80/technical-competencies-dag-tech_5ad678add64ab202631220e4.jpg" alt="" width="100%" /> </a> </div> <div class="col-md-9 col-xs-9 p-0"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-competencies-dag-tech.html"> Technical Competencies - DAG Tech </a> <div class="doc-meta"> <div class="doc-desc">DAG Tech has vast technical competencies. We have expert knowledge and a proven track record of IT support and design in</div> </div> </div> <div class="clearfix"></div> <hr class="mt-15 mb-15" /> </div> <div class="row m-0"> <div class="col-md-3 col-xs-3 pl-0 text-center"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-training-midea-cac.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/60x80/technical-training-midea-cac_5ad3987ed64ab2cee4c3b7a0.jpg" alt="" width="100%" /> </a> </div> <div class="col-md-9 col-xs-9 p-0"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-training-midea-cac.html"> Technical Training - Midea CAC </a> <div class="doc-meta"> <div class="doc-desc">HD video download; Midea VRF Products Introduction: Midea already has a long history in VRF product's design & manufactu</div> </div> </div> <div class="clearfix"></div> <hr class="mt-15 mb-15" /> </div> <div class="row m-0"> <div class="col-md-3 col-xs-3 pl-0 text-center"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-bulls-tech-support-company.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/60x80/technical-bulls-tech-support-company_5aa5b2edd64ab2ccf7e6fc30.jpg" alt="" width="100%" /> </a> </div> <div class="col-md-9 col-xs-9 p-0"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-technical-bulls-tech-support-company.html"> Technical Bulls - Tech Support Company </a> <div class="doc-meta"> <div class="doc-desc">Techical Bulls is a tech support company provides services for various devices like Kindle, X-Box, Roku, computers, Prin</div> </div> </div> <div class="clearfix"></div> <hr class="mt-15 mb-15" /> </div> <div class="row m-0"> <div class="col-md-3 col-xs-3 pl-0 text-center"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-citroen-technical-training-pdf.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/60x80/citroen-technical-training-pdf_5a57b7ead64ab202ebfb1bd8.jpg" alt="" width="100%" /> </a> </div> <div class="col-md-9 col-xs-9 p-0"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-citroen-technical-training-pdf.html"> Citroen technical training pdf </a> <div class="doc-meta"> <div class="doc-desc">Anatollo snuff accumulates its wadsetted Tut-tuts admiration? enclothe infamous Bartolomei, his cracovienne breakfast le</div> </div> </div> <div class="clearfix"></div> <hr class="mt-15 mb-15" /> </div> <div class="row m-0"> <div class="col-md-3 col-xs-3 pl-0 text-center"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-sct-banner-technical-student-technical-training-workbook.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/60x80/sct-banner-technical-student-technical-training-wo_5ad35825d64ab27acda1e9b8.jpg" alt="" width="100%" /> </a> </div> <div class="col-md-9 col-xs-9 p-0"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-sct-banner-technical-student-technical-training-workbook.html"> SCT Banner Technical Student Technical Training Workbook </a> <div class="doc-meta"> <div class="doc-desc">familiarity with SQL. Types of Data Integrity. • Nulls. • Unique Column Values. • Primary Key Values. • Referent</div> </div> </div> <div class="clearfix"></div> <hr class="mt-15 mb-15" /> </div> <div class="row m-0"> <div class="col-md-3 col-xs-3 pl-0 text-center"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-training-program-dcaa-technical-training-amt-garageforum.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/60x80/training-program-dcaa-technical-training-amt-garag_5a312cedd64ab270617bd89b.jpg" alt="" width="100%" /> </a> </div> <div class="col-md-9 col-xs-9 p-0"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-training-program-dcaa-technical-training-amt-garageforum.html"> Training Program DCAA Technical Training - AMT GarageForum </a> <div class="doc-meta"> <div class="doc-desc">T0196F • Truck FUSO • Canter • Fundamentals for Operations with Mercedes-Benz Diagnostic System ... T0213F • Pas</div> </div> </div> <div class="clearfix"></div> <hr class="mt-15 mb-15" /> </div> <div class="row m-0"> <div class="col-md-3 col-xs-3 pl-0 text-center"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-ebook-nrc-technical-training-center-reactor-concepts-manual-.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/60x80/ebook-nrc-technical-training-center-reactor-concep_5a63cacfd64ab2eb6f2004c5.jpg" alt="" width="100%" /> </a> </div> <div class="col-md-9 col-xs-9 p-0"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-ebook-nrc-technical-training-center-reactor-concepts-manual-.html"> Ebook Nrc Technical Training Center Reactor Concepts Manual </a> <div class="doc-meta"> <div class="doc-desc">Training Center Reactor Concepts Manual please fill out registration form to access in our databases. You may ... repair</div> </div> </div> <div class="clearfix"></div> <hr class="mt-15 mb-15" /> </div> <div class="row m-0"> <div class="col-md-3 col-xs-3 pl-0 text-center"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-11296.html"> <img src="http://letstalkislam.com/img/60x80/ebook-nrc-technical-training-center-reactor-concep_5a63cfbcd64ab2e96f0817f3.jpg" alt="" width="100%" /> </a> </div> <div class="col-md-9 col-xs-9 p-0"> <a href="http://letstalkislam.com/pdf-11296.html"> Ebook Nrc Technical Training Center Reactor Concepts Manual </a> <div class="doc-meta"> <div class="doc-desc">Training Center Reactor Concepts Manual please fill out registration form to access in our databases. You may ... bond w</div> </div> </div> <div class="clearfix"></div> <hr class="mt-15 mb-15" /> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> </div> <!-- BEGIN FOOTER --> <footer id="footer"> <div id="footer-top" class="container"> <div class="row"> <div class="block col-sm-4"> <ul class="footer-contacts"> <li><i class="fa fa-envelope"></i> <a href="mailto:info@letstalkislam.com">info@letstalkislam.com</a></li> </ul> </div> <div class="block col-sm-4"> <ul class="footer-links"> <li><a href="http://letstalkislam.com/about">About Us</a></li> <li><a href="http://letstalkislam.com/contact">Contact Us</a></li> <li><a href="http://letstalkislam.com/copyright">Copyright</a></li> <li><a href="http://letstalkislam.com/privacy">Privacy Policy</a></li> <li><a href="http://letstalkislam.com/term">Terms and Conditions</a></li> </ul> </div> <!-- BEGIN NEWSLETTER --> <div class="block col-sm-4"> <form action="http://letstalkislam.com/newsletter" method="post"> <div id="newsletter" class="col-sm-12"> <h2 class="section-title">Newsletter</h2> <div class="input-group"> <input type="text" placeholder="Enter your E-mail" name="email" id="newsletter_email" class="form-control" /> <span class="input-group-btn"> <button class="btn btn-default" style="background: #00A69C;color: #fff;" type="submit">Send</button> </span> </div> </div> </form> </div> <!-- END NEWSLETTER --> </div> </div> <!-- BEGIN COPYRIGHT --> <div id="copyright"> <div class="container"> <div class="row"> <div class="col-sm-12"> Copyright © 2019 letstalkislam.com. All rights reserved. <!-- BEGIN SOCIAL NETWORKS --> <ul class="social-networks"> <li><a href="#"><i class="fa fa-facebook"></i></a></li> <li><a href="#"><i class="fa fa-twitter"></i></a></li> <li><a href="#"><i class="fa fa-google"></i></a></li> <li><a href="#"><i class="fa fa-pinterest"></i></a></li> <li><a href="#"><i class="fa fa-youtube"></i></a></li> <li><a href="#"><i class="fa fa-rss"></i></a></li> </ul> <!-- END SOCIAL NETWORKS --> </div> </div> </div> </div> <!-- END COPYRIGHT --> </div> <!-- END WRAPPER --> </footer> <!-- END FOOTER --> <!-- Global site tag (gtag.js) - Google Analytics --> <!--LiveInternet counter--><script type="text/javascript"> document.write("<a href='//www.liveinternet.ru/click' "+ "target=_blank><img src='//counter.yadro.ru/hit?t44.6;r"+ escape(document.referrer)+((typeof(screen)=="undefined")?"": ";s"+screen.width+"*"+screen.height+"*"+(screen.colorDepth? screen.colorDepth:screen.pixelDepth))+";u"+escape(document.URL)+ ";h"+escape(document.title.substring(0,150))+";"+Math.random()+ "' alt='' title='LiveInternet' "+ "border='0' width='31' height='31'><\/a>") </script><!--/LiveInternet--> </body> </html>